Zima: Ballistics Calculator — Operator's Guide

Version: 2.x (current through app version 2.0.48, as on main) · Last updated: 2026-10-29 Platforms: iOS / iPadOS / macOS (Catalyst) / Apple Watch · Android phone / tablet / Wear OS Distribution: Apple App Store · Google Play · Age rating: 13+

The single canonical guide for both iOS and Android. iOS is the design master; the Android app matches it except for the platform-native differences and the features that are on the iPhone only for now, both listed in §25 Platform Differences. Features tagged [iOS] are platform-specific and are called out inline, and iPhone only for now marks a feature the Android app does not have yet.

Independently Verified Physics

Every ballistic solution in this app has been validated against published reference ballistics data, including McCoy's Modern Exterior Ballistics — the gold standard in exterior ballistics. The 3DOF, 4DOF, and 6DOF solvers, all 9 standard drag models (G1, G2, G5, G6, G7, G8, GI, GL, GS), and the correction factors (spin drift, Coriolis deflection, aerodynamic jump, cant angle, and zero-atmosphere BC correction) are each covered by the app's automated physics test suite. The 6DOF solver reproduces the published 6-DOF results in McCoy's book (his Example 9.1) and is no longer experimental, and 4DOF is a true modified point-mass solver. Pejsa is a fast analytical approximation, held to the point-mass solver rather than to an outside source. When you pull a firing solution from this app, the math behind it has been proven against an independent reference — not merely tested against itself. The Android engine is a direct port of the iOS engine and produces the same solutions.

Free to download. Ballistics Pro is $19.99 for life — one payment. Version 2.0.38 adds a six-month Pro Pass for $14.99 — also one payment, and it never renews. Every tool that solves a rifle is free on the five sample rifles; Pro, or a one-time 7-day free trial, calculates your own (§24.5). No ads. No tracking.

Introduction
Getting Started
Navigation
Calculator
Profiles — My Armory
Databases
Analysis Tools
Verification & Truing
Field Tools
PRS / Competition
Hunting
LE / Military / TAK
Logging & Tracking
Reticle Tools
Tools
Suites
Training Academy
Sensors
Bluetooth Devices
Export & Sharing
Settings
Apple Watch & Wear OS
Widgets & Live Activities
In-App Purchase — Ballistics Pro
Platform Differences
Appendices

1. Introduction

Zima: Ballistics Calculator is a professional-grade exterior-ballistics engine plus an integrated suite of range, analysis, field, competition, hunting, law-enforcement, and military tools — all in a single application that works fully offline.

At its core, the app numerically integrates the equations of motion for a projectile traveling through a moving atmosphere. From a muzzle velocity, ballistic coefficient or custom drag curve, and environmental conditions, it computes:

Elevation and windage corrections at any distance
Time of flight, remaining velocity, and remaining energy
Spin drift, Coriolis deflection, aerodynamic jump, and cant error
Transonic and subsonic crossing points

Engine. Four solvers — 3DOF Point Mass, 4DOF Modified Point Mass, 6DOF Full Rotational, Pejsa — over nine standard drag models (G1, G2, G5, G6, G7, G8, GI, GL, GS) plus user-supplied custom Cd-vs-Mach curves (Pro). The 3DOF, 4DOF, and 6DOF solvers are checked against published reference ballistics data, and against McCoy's Modern Exterior Ballistics, by the app's automated physics tests; Pejsa is a fast analytical approximation for quick checks.

The Physics Verified card on the About screen: 3 solvers (3DOF, 4DOF, 6DOF), 9 drag models and 6 corrections, checked against published reference ballistics data.

Languages. The app is translated into 75 languages besides English and follows your phone's language setting.

Who it is for

Precision-rifle competitors (PRS, NRL, F-Class) — stage planners, quick targets, competition mode, DA range cards, match score tracking
Long-range hunters — ethical shot distance, shot-placement overlays, vital-zone presets, shooting-light (twilight) times
Law enforcement / SWAT marksmen — glass deflection, barrier penetration, precision offset / hold-off, cold-bore tracking, NV/IR zero profiles
Military personnel — mil relation, anti-materiel reference, spotter/shooter call, sniper DOPE book, DA Form 5517, MGRS, TAK integration
Reloaders and gunsmiths — Chrono String checks and statistics, load development (ladder + group), recoil calculator, barrel harmonics, muzzle-blast estimation
Airgunners — a dedicated 671-entry pellet/slug database

Supported platforms

Platform	Support level
iPhone (iOS 18+)	Full feature set
iPad (iPadOS 18+)	Full feature set, larger two-pane layout
Mac (macOS 14+ via Catalyst)	Mac Catalyst version of the iPad app
Apple Watch (watchOS 10+)	8-page companion, opening on the Shoot page
Android phone / tablet (Android 9+)	Full feature set, with a tablet layout (the iPhone-only items are listed in §25)
Wear OS	8-page companion, the same pages as the Apple Watch, opening on the Shoot page

Important disclaimer

All ballistic solutions are mathematical approximations. Physical variables including lot-to-lot velocity variation, actual drag behavior, barrel fouling, and real-world atmospheric gradients will cause results to differ from computed values. Always verify solutions in the field before relying on them operationally. The app displays this disclaimer on every results view.

2. Getting Started

First launch

iOS: a short Terms & Privacy screen (tap Agree), then a full-screen Terms of Use & Legal Notice. You must scroll to the bottom before I Agree — Continue becomes active. The notice covers the Terms of Use, the accuracy disclaimer, the professional-use notice, the Export Control Notice (ITAR/EAR), TAK / military features, and the age requirement (13 years or older). A Your Privacy, Protected pledge follows. If an iCloud backup of the app is found, you are offered Restore from iCloud or Start Fresh; in a language other than English, the app also tells you once that its translations are machine-made.

Android: the same Terms of Use & Legal Notice (I Agree — Continue, or Exit) and Privacy Pledge gates, in the same order, then the tour.

Onboarding tour (10 pages)

The welcome page (Zima: Ballistics Calculator) → Professional Grade → Your Whole Kit → Field Ready → Always Improving → Built for Speed → TAK Integration → Suite Picker → App Level → Ready to Go. You can replay it any time on either phone; a replay skips the Suite Picker (its choices are never applied again), so it is 9 pages. The first page counts the app's features and tools (the same number as the Pro screen, §24), and Always Improving counts the reticles in the catalog.

Tour page 1, Zima: Ballistics Calculator: the count of features and tools, with the Verified against published reference data line. Back is the arrow at the top left; Skip is at the top right.

Tour page 2, Professional Grade: spin drift, Coriolis and aerodynamic jump, 3D trajectory, WEZ hit probability, the bullet and cartridge database, MGRS and DA Form 5517.

Tour page 3, Your Whole Kit: iPhone, Apple Watch, widgets and Mac, the Live Activity, iCloud sync, PDF range cards and QR profile sharing.

Tour page 4, Field Ready: GPS target ranging, the device barometer and inclinometer, the target library, the Reticle Simulator and My Armory.

Tour page 5, Always Improving: Siri Shortcuts, LiDAR target capture, the reticle count, and the Apple Watch app.

Tour page 6, Built for Speed: pinning tools to the tab bar, Quick Solve, and the searchable More menu.

Tour page 7, TAK Integration: connecting to ATAK / WinTAK servers, configured in Settings, TAK Server.

Tour page 8, How much do you want to see?: Basic, Standard (selected) and Advanced, with Continue.

Tour page 9, Ready to Go: the Get Started button. The dots at the bottom count the nine pages of a replayed tour.

Navigation: More → Tour → Welcome Tour (iPhone and Android). Settings → Tutorials on Android also hides or resets the help cards.

Suite Picker

During onboarding you choose what describes you (Reloader / Hunter / PRS-NRL Competitor / LE-Military-Tactical / Power user, which is pre-selected). On the iPhone the choice only sets which rows each suite hub shows first — every suite stays in More, and each hub has its own settings screen (the slider icon) to change its rows later. On Android the choice decides which suite hubs appear in More.

App Level — Basic, Standard or Advanced

The app can show only as much as you want to see. Basic is the essentials (20 tools: the Calculator, Quick Solve, My View, Range Card, Come-Up Card / Scope Cap, Reticle Simulator, My Armory, the Bullet Database, Cartridge Database and Reticle Library, Bluetooth Devices, Chronograph Session, the Sight-In Assistant, Ethical Shot Distance, Shooting Light / Legal Hours, Shot Placement Reference, Shot & Recovery, the Shot Log, Group MOA Calculator, and the Shooting Range Finder), Standard adds truing, logs, analysis, competition and mapping tools and every Calculator option, and Advanced shows everything, including drag curves, reference tables and specialist tools (Virtual Turret, Custom Reticles, Zero Shift Table, MV Degradation Tracker, Turret Tracking Test, Scope Click Tracker, Cd Measurement, Barrel Harmonics, DOPE Trend Analysis, Hit Probability, Danger Space, the Multi-Target Solver, LiDAR Target Capture, Measured and Custom Drag Curves, the Drag Curve Visual Editor, the DSF Library, and the SDF Table). The first-run tour asks How much do you want to see? after the Suite Picker, and Settings → App Level changes it at any time. A new install starts at Standard until you pick; a phone that was already using the app starts at Advanced, so an update hides nothing.

Settings, App Level: Basic, Standard (selected) and Advanced, each with its one-line description, and the note that the level sets which tools More lists and which Calculator cards show.

The level trims what is listed, never what exists. More lists the tools at or below the level, and every suite you switched on, always; a tool you reach by search, a favorite, or Recent says "Standard level" or "Advanced level" on its row; a row at the end of the list says how many tools are hidden and opens the level screen; and search finds every tool at every level. At Basic the Calculator also folds away the Solver & Advanced card while it holds its defaults. A card whose setting changes the answer (a different solver, Coriolis switched on, spin drift or aerodynamic jump switched off, a cant angle or live cant) shows at every level, and More Options at the bottom of the Calculator shows it for the visit. The level and your starred tools ride the backup; restoring a backup made before App Level opens every tool. Android has the same three levels (Settings → App Level, and the same question in its tour). App Level is free.

Navigation: Settings → App Level (or the row at the end of More)

New-user walkthrough (zero to firing solution)

Add a rifle — the + in the Armory offers Add Rifle, which opens the rifle catalog first: pick a model and Add a Rifle, a guided setup of five short steps (§5.8), starts on it, or tap Add Your Own for a blank one. The steps are the rifle (name, caliber, twist), the bullet, the muzzle velocity, the zero and scope, and a review. (Adding rifles is free, as many as you like. Without Pro, only the five sample rifles calculate; your own rifles calculate with Pro or the 7-day free trial, §24.5.)

Step 1: the + in My Armory, then Add Rifle, opens the rifle catalog first: pick a model to start the guided setup on it, or tap Add Your Own for a blank one. (The + menu itself is pictured in section 5.9.)

2. Add a load — the guided setup makes the rifle's first load for you. To add another later, use the + on the Armory's Ammo shelf (or New load on the bench's Ammo part, §4.19) and choose a bullet from the Bullet Database (more than 3,700 bullets) to fill weight / diameter / BC / drag model, then enter muzzle velocity.

Step 2: the Ammo shelf's See All page; its + at the top right opens the New Load page. The ammo cards, and a Cartridge Database row of 152 cartridges, are under it.

3. Solve — set range, atmosphere (or fetch weather), wind → Calculate. The results open in four tabs: Drop Table, Chart, Corrections & Reticle, and Stability. 4. Take it to the field — from results, jump to HUD Mode, Competition Mode, Field Mode, Target List, Compact Shoot View, or a Come-Up Card.

Navigation: Armory tab → + (Add Rifle); to add ammo later, the Ammo shelf's +

Starter rifles and the first-rifle offer

A new install includes five sample rifles so the Calculator can solve before you type anything: M4 Patrol, M4 Service, .308 Precision, 6.5 CM Match, and AK Irons. They are the rifles that calculate free on every tool that solves a rifle (§24.5). They are ordinary profiles (rename, edit, or delete them), but a sample stays a sample only while its rifle and its ammo keep the example's numbers: type in different ones and it becomes a rifle of your own. A phone that had the earlier starter rifles keeps them as samples too, and may still show their earlier names. On the iPhone the samples are added only if your Armory is still empty after the first-rifle offer below. An empty Armory also shows tap-to-add example cards.

Starter gear. So no shelf starts empty, the app also adds example gear: optics, suppressors, night gear, and loadouts. The bench shows Starter gear added with a count of each, and Keep keeps all of it while Remove takes back only what the app added; nothing of yours is touched.

The bench offers to keep or remove the example gear the app adds on a new install.

Add a rifle to get started. After the first-run tour (finished or skipped), a new user with no rifle of their own and none chosen in the Calculator is offered three buttons: Add a Rifle (the guided setup, §5.8; the rifle it saves is chosen in the Calculator), Use an example rifle (the sample rifle the app opens on, chosen in the Calculator), and Not now (the sample rifles wait in My Armory and none is chosen). While iCloud has not yet answered whether a backup exists, only Use an example rifle and Not now show, so a new rifle cannot skip the restore offer. The offer shows once per install, never to someone already using the app or holding a rifle of their own, and replaying the tour never shows it. The Android app shows the same offer; its Calculator already opens on a sample rifle, and that pick does not count as your own.

Tab bar

A bottom bar whose last tab (More) is fixed and cannot be moved or removed. The tabs before it are fully customizable, and that includes Calculate: move it, replace it, or put another tool first (the first tab holds the left slot, and the rest scroll when the bar holds more tabs than fit). On the iPhone you can pin up to eleven. Default tabs: Calculate, Armory, Range Card, Simulator (the Reticle Simulator). A bar saved before this version keeps Calculate first, exactly as it was, and the last tab left cannot be removed. With the Calculator out of the bar it still runs behind the scenes, and a screen that sends you to it still opens it. The bar is a little shorter than before, with each tab name on one line unless one in the bar needs two. Drag to reorder, and use Reset to return to the defaults (iPhone); Android reorders with arrows. Customize Tabs lists the tools you can add under the More menu's own section headings. On the iPhone every tab's top bar has a magnifier (search, below) and a ••• menu holding Settings and All Tools (which opens More); on the More tab itself the menu also lists Report an Issue or Suggestion. Opened from its tab, the Reticle Simulator hides the tab bar; its back arrow at the top left returns to Calculate.

Settings, Tab Bar: the Customize Tabs row that opens the tab editor.

Customize Tabs: Tab Bar (5 of 12) lists Calculate, Armory, Range Card, Simulator and, fixed at the end, More (marked Always), each with a handle to drag. Edit and Reset are at the top right; the note under the list says the first tab stays at the left, More is always last, and up to 11 tabs can be picked.

After Edit: a red minus on each tab removes it (More has none), next to the drag handles. The blue check ends editing; Reset returns the bar to its defaults.

Below the tab list, the tools you can add are grouped under the More menu's own section headings (Shoot, Rifles & Gear and the rest); the green + on a row adds it to the bar.

Search tools... filters the list: typing wind shows Wind Guide, Wind Uncertainty and Wind Training under Results; the X at the right clears the search.

The ••• menu at the top of the More tab: Settings, All Tools, and Report an Issue or Suggestion.

Navigation: Settings → Tab Bar → Customize Tabs

The escape hatch to every feature not pinned to the tab bar. The search box stays at the top of the screen, and under it a row of jump buttons, one per section: tap one to scroll straight to that section (the buttons only move you; they hide nothing, and they step aside while you search). Below them, in order: the Field Guide row (§3, Field Guide); an Upgrade to Pro row (only while you do not have Pro, §24); Favorites, the tools you starred (touch and hold any tool, or swipe its row to the right, for Add to Favorites or Remove from Favorites; starred tools sit above Recent at every App Level); Recent, your last five visited tools that are not in the tab bar or held by a suite (swipe a row to remove it); and a row for Settings. Then come the sections, every one always open under its own heading (nothing to expand or collapse): Suites (Training Academy, Range Day, Armory, Hunting, Competition, Military / LE, Analysis, AI Insights, and Reloading; only the suites that are switched on), then ten tool sections, Shoot · Rifles & Gear · Zero & Truing · Reloading · Hunting · Competition · Logs & Analysis · Maps & Ranging · Reference & Practice · LE / Military / TAK. When your App Level (§2) leaves tools out, a row after the sections says how many and opens the level screen; then come Tour (Welcome Tour), Feedback (Something look off? first, the Calculator's input checks, §4.22; then Report a Bug, Suggest an Improvement, and Rate the App), and About. Every suite and every tool has one short line under its name saying what it is for.

The More menu on the iPhone: the search box, the jump buttons, the Field Guide and Settings rows, then the Suites. Android lays it out the same way.

Touch and hold a tool's row: the menu offers Add to Favorites.

Favorites sit above Recent once a tool is starred; both lists show the tool's name and its one-line description.

Swipe a Favorites row to the right: the yellow star button reads Remove from Favorites.

Swipe a Recent row: the blue Remove button takes it off the list.

The sections and their rows, in the order the app shows them at the Advanced level (every suite is switched on in this version, so each suite row in brackets leads its section; rows after "Related" belong to another section):

Suites: Training Academy, Range Day Suite, Armory Suite, Hunting Suite, Competition Suite, Military / LE Suite, Analysis Suite, AI Insights, Reloading Suite.
Shoot: [Range Day Suite] Calculator, Quick Solve, My View, Range Card, Come-Up Card / Scope Cap, Reticle Simulator, Field Mode (Quick Solve), HUD Mode, Competition Mode, Spotting Correction, Target List, Multi-Target Scene, Range Sheet, DA Range Card, Virtual Turret, Wind Uncertainty.
Rifles & Gear: [Armory Suite] My Armory, Bullet Database, Cartridge Database, Reticle Library, Bluetooth Devices, Chronograph Session, Ammo, Barrel Life, Suppressor, Target Library, Pellet Database, Barrel/Twist Database, Custom Reticles.
Zero & Truing: Sight-In Assistant, Zero Distance Explorer, Truing / Calibration, Chrono String Statistics, BC Back-Calculator, Cold Bore Tracking, Zero Shift Table, MV Degradation Tracker, Turret Tracking Test, Scope Click Tracker, Cd Measurement (Two-Chrono BC). Related: Chronograph Session, Bluetooth Devices, Group MOA Calculator.
Reloading: [Reloading Suite] Load Development Assistant, Barrel Harmonics / OCW Node. Related: Chrono String Statistics, Chronograph Session, Cartridge Database, Bullet Database, Group MOA Calculator.
Hunting: [Hunting Suite] Ethical Shot Distance, Shooting Light / Legal Hours, Shot Placement Reference, Shot & Recovery, Point Blank Range (MPBR), Effective Range Calculator, Terminal Ballistics, Moving Target. Related: Range Planning Map, GPS Target Ranging, Wildfires & Public Lands, Sight-In Assistant, Come-Up Card / Scope Cap, Danger Space Calculator, Target Library, Sound Delay Calculator, Muzzle Blast / Noise Estimate.
Competition: [Competition Suite] Quick Targets (Hot Ranges), Match Score Log, Session Tracker, Stage Planner. Related: Range Sheet, DA Range Card, Competition Mode, Target List, Multi-Target Scene, Moving Target, Shot Log.
Logs & Analysis: [Analysis Suite] Shot Log, Group MOA Calculator, Shot Group Analyzer, Shot Book, Sniper / Precision DOPE Book, Rifle Data Book, Shot Analysis, Load / Trajectory Comparison, Multi-Rifle Drop Table, 3D Trajectory Visualization, DOPE Trend Analysis, Hit Probability (WEZ), Danger Space Calculator, Multi-Target Solver. Related: Terminal Ballistics, Effective Range Calculator.
Maps & Ranging: Shooting Range Finder, Range Planning Map, GPS Target Ranging, Wildfires & Public Lands, Mil Relation Range Estimator, Sound Delay Calculator, LiDAR Target Capture, Topo Map.
Reference & Practice: Wind Guide, Wind Training, Range Training, Recoil Calculator, Muzzle Blast / Noise Estimate, Measured Drag Curves, Custom Drag Curves, Drag Curve Visual Editor, DSF Library (Drop Scale Factor), SDF Table (Speed-Dial Factor).
LE / Military / TAK: [Military / LE Suite] Glass Deflection Calculator, Precision Offset / Hold-Off, Barrier Penetration Data, Anti-Materiel Reference, DA Form 5517 Range Card, MGRS / Coordinate Converter, Machine Gun Range Card, TAK Server Connection, TAK Data Packages, TAK Missions. Related: Terminal Ballistics, Danger Space Calculator, Shooting Light / Legal Hours, GPS Target Ranging.
Tour: Welcome Tour.
Feedback: Report a Bug, Suggest an Improvement, Rate the App.
About (a last row of its own, without a heading).

The end of the More menu: the App Level row (App Level: Standard, 18 more tools at a higher level), Tour with Welcome Tour, Feedback (Something look off?, Report a Bug, Suggest an Improvement, Rate the App) and About.

The About screen opened from the last row of More: the Zima Logistics note and the support address.

Every tool is listed in its own section, with a one-line description, and a section can also list tools that belong elsewhere under a Related caption (for example, Hunting lists Terminal Ballistics, Effective Range, and Point Blank Range). A tool that is pinned to the tab bar or held by a switched-on suite stays in its section, and its row says where else it lives: In the tab bar, or In Hunting Suite ("In Range Day Suite and Armory Suite"). A suite's own row leads the section it belongs to; for example, the Hunting Suite leads Hunting. At the Basic and Standard levels (§2) a section lists only the tools at or below the level, and a tool above it that you reached by search, a favorite, or Recent says Standard level or Advanced level.

Search matches a tool's name (in English and in your language), its search words (for example "chrono", "garmin", "mrad", or "hunting"), and the name of any section that lists it, so "hunting" returns everything in the Hunting section. It finds every tool at every App Level. Results are a flat list, best match first, and a decimal comma reads as a point (6,5 finds 6.5). Typing an abbreviation such as MOA or DOPE also offers to look it up in the Field Guide.

On Android the screen is laid out the same way (the search box above the list, the jump buttons under it, the Field Guide first, the Upgrade to Pro row for free users, then Favorites, Recent, and Settings, the same ten sections, the App Level row, Tour, Feedback, and About, every section always open). Android lists every tool the iPhone does except LiDAR Target Capture, and adds a few small tools of its own (§25).

Navigation: More tab

Global search

A searchable index of every screen. On the iPhone it opens from the magnifier at the top right of the tab screens; on Android, from the search icon at the top of More. Type any keyword to filter in real time; tap a result to navigate directly (a tool that is not in the tab bar opens over the current screen, with Done to close it). It reads the same table as More, so it finds every tool at every App Level. On the iPhone it takes several words in any order, the same rule the catalogs use (§6).

The Search sheet opened from the magnifier at the top right of a tab screen: Done at the top left, then every suite and tool grouped under headings, each with its one-line description.

Typing chrono in Search features...: the results are a flat list (Bluetooth Devices, Chronograph Session, Chrono String Statistics, Cd Measurement (Two-Chrono BC)), each with its description.

A tool picked from the results opens over the current screen with Done at the top left to close it (here Chrono Stats).

Navigation: magnifier icon (iPhone) / More → search icon (Android)

Field Guide

One searchable page to look things up on the range. Where things are lists every suite and tool grouped like More, each with the line More shows under it and its path from More (for example More › Shoot › Calculator); it says when a tool is also in the tab bar or in a suite, or is listed only at a higher App Level. Acronyms and terms is an A to Z list of well over a hundred abbreviations and terms (MOA, MIL/MRAD, BC, G1, G7, DOPE, DA, FFP, SFP, TOF, SD, ES, Sg, WEZ, PRS, NRL, TAK, MGRS, and more), most worded by the app's own glossaries; 3DOF, 4DOF, and 6DOF open What is 6DOF? (§4.17). One search box covers both parts and puts the closest match first. It works offline. Android has the same Field Guide.

The Acronyms and terms part: 3DOF, 4DOF and 6DOF entries, each with a What is 6DOF? link.

Typing MOA searches both parts at once: the matching terms (MOA, IPHY) first, then the tools that match (Group MOA Calculator, Reticle Simulator with In the tab bar, Reticle Library), each with its path from More.

Navigation: More → Field Guide (at the top, under the search box), or Calculate tab → ••• → Field Guide

On the iPad (and the Mac), a sidebar replaces the tab bar. At the top are Favorites (the tools you starred in More or here, then the tabs you pinned) and Recent; then Training & Suites (each suite while it is switched on) and the More menu's ten sections (Shoot, Rifles & Gear, Zero & Truing, Reloading, Hunting, Competition, Logs & Analysis, Maps & Ranging, Reference & Practice, LE / Military / TAK), each listing the same tools by the same names, at your App Level. Settings and Backup sit at the bottom, with a Search tools… field that finds every tool by its More name or search words whatever the level, and PRO and LE/MIL badges on gated rows. A row's menu has Add to Favorites or Remove from Favorites, and Open in New Window. Every tool More lists is a row here.

Navigation: iPad, regular width → sidebar

4. Calculator

The Calculator is the app's primary screen and entry point. At the top sits the bench (§4.19), a picture of the rifle you are shooting with and everything fitted to it, with your saved loadouts (§4.20) in a row above it; the rifle, optic, ammo, suppressor, night gear, and zero are chosen and changed there. Under it come the input cards (Atmosphere, Wind, Target, and Solver & Advanced), in a scrolling column of collapsible cards (iPhone / Android phone) or a two-pane layout (iPad, inputs on the left and results on the right). The top bar has the Cards button (§4.11), a Shoot view button (the four-square icon , §4.15), a history icon , and the ••• menu (Show Tutorial, Field Guide (§3), Send Inputs & Results (§4.16), Show wind drag flag, Report an Issue or Suggestion, Settings, and All Tools). While the Calculator holds a zero-condition or cold-bore change that the loaded rifle does not, a bar at the bottom reads "Unsaved changes to (rifle)" and lists each one with its old and new value, with "These are used for this calculation only until you save them to the rifle.", Undo (puts the rifle's own values back), and Save to Rifle. Edits made to that rifle in the Armory reach the open Calculator at once. Each input card has an icon, a collapse arrow, an orange dot when it differs from the profile, and reset and info buttons. After the first solve on a phone, the input sections collapse and the view scrolls to the results; changing any input clears the shown results until you press Calculate again. Touching and holding Calculate lists Compact Shoot View, HUD Mode, Field Mode, Competition Mode, and the Target List (HUD Mode and the Target List wait for a solve, and the Pro ones still ask for Pro), the same as the results' Quick Actions; a hint under the button says so. Right under Calculate, a quieter My View button opens My View (§4.21) for the same rifle, load, and conditions. It is always there, solved or not; if nothing is solved yet, My View solves once, quietly, when it opens. When the Calculator cannot solve, a Cannot Calculate card says why, with a Report button for engine failures. On the iPhone the inputs are two-column cards by default (Settings → Layout → Card-Style Inputs); a few controls appear only in the standard row layout (§25 B).

The top bar of the Calculate tab: search, Cards, Shoot view, history, and the ••• menu.

The Calculate tab: the loadout row, the bench, and the Optic choices under it.

The ••• menu at the top of the Calculate tab: Settings, All Tools, Show Tutorial, Field Guide, Send Inputs & Results, Show wind drag flag, and Report an Issue or Suggestion.

Navigation: Calculate tab

4.1 Projectile inputs

Weight (grains or grams, per your Bullet Weight setting), diameter, length, BC, Drag Model (G1, G7, G2, G5, G6, G8, GI, GL, GS, and, on the iPhone, Custom Cd Curve, which is Pro), muzzle velocity, and temperature sensitivity (fps per °F, or m/s per °C, against a reference temperature). Switching the drag model re-pairs the BC from the bullet's published BCs, or empties it with an orange note.

One home for projectile data. With a rifle and a load chosen, the projectile's numbers live with the load: tap Ammo on the bench (§4.19) to see the bullet in one line (weight, drag model, and BC) and the muzzle velocity, temperature sensitivity, and reference temperature (the Metric setting decides the units), typed straight in and saved as each box is left. Edit in Armory opens the load's own page with every field, and what you save there reaches the Calculator at once. What-if opens the projectile fields in an orange card marked "Not saved. Used for this solve only.", with Save to Load and Discard; the rifle's and optic's What-if works the same way and says Save to Rifle. A bullet applied over a load says which load it came from ("Not saved: a different bullet from …") and offers Save to Load, Save as New Load, or Discard. A locked rifle or load is never changed; the screen says so.

The Ammo part on the bench: the load cards, the bullet in one line, the muzzle velocity, the temperature sensitivity with Work It Out From Two Readings, the reference temperature, and Edit in Armory.

What-if: the orange card marked "Not saved. Used for this solve only.", with Discard and Save to Load.

Every Apply asks where it goes. The Bullet Database's Apply, Custom Drag Curves' Use, Measured Drag Curves, the MV Degradation Tracker, the BC Back-Calculator's Apply to Calculator, and the Chrono String's Use as muzzle velocity each ask Where should this go?: Save to (the load), New Load…, or Just this solve (What-if). A velocity or BC is never saved onto a load whose bullet the Calculator no longer holds, and an applied bullet's name is dropped once you change its weight or diameter by hand.

Where should this go?: Save to the load (here Hornady 123gr SST), New Load…, or Just this solve (What-if).

Work It Out From Two Readings, under every Temp Sensitivity field (both Calculator layouts and both load editors), opens Two Chronograph Readings: enter the average speed of the same load chronographed on two days at different temperatures (First Reading and Second Reading, each a velocity and a temperature), and the sheet shows "Temp Sensitivity: …" for Use This Sensitivity to fill in. Readings less than 10 °F (6 °C) apart are refused, and so is a result larger than any powder changes ("Check the two readings"). Keep Reference Temp at the temperature your muzzle velocity was measured at. [Android] The button is on a load's Armory page and in the full load editor; the bench's Ammo part does not have it.

The Two Chronograph Readings sheet: First Reading and Second Reading (a velocity and a temperature each), the Temp Sensitivity result, and Cancel and Use This Sensitivity at the top.

Navigation: Calculate tab → Projectile section

4.2 Firearm inputs

Barrel length, twist rate + direction, sight height above bore, zero, and turret-tracking percentage (scale all click outputs if the scope does not track perfectly). The optic holds the brand, model, reticle name, click values, and turret unit, and the suppressor is described in §4.12. These live on the bench (§4.19): the Rifle part shows the barrel and twist in one line and the cold bore offset, the Optic part the sight height and the turret tracking, and each has What-if and Edit in Armory; the zero has a part of its own.

The Rifle part on the bench: the rifle cards, the barrel and twist in one line, What-if, and the cold bore offset (an elevation shift and a windage shift).

Navigation: Calculate tab → bench → Rifle, Optic, or Zero

4.3 Atmosphere inputs

Temperature, pressure (with barometer auto-fill), humidity, and altitude. Use Density Altitude lets you enter DA directly; the app reverse-computes the equivalent temperature and pressure via the ICAO standard-atmosphere lapse rate, and the powder-temperature correction, station pressure, and wind zones then behave exactly as they do in the normal mode. Atmosphere Presets save and recall named conditions (Save Current Conditions, then Apply; none are built in); Live Weather (Fetch Weather) pulls the current temperature, pressure, and humidity at your GPS location — never wind. A tap on the button fetches; touching and holding it lists Live Weather, Phone Sensors (waits while a typed density altitude holds the air), Kestrel Live while a Kestrel is connected or Connect a Weather Meter (Devices) otherwise, and Presets, and a hint under the button says so. A collapsible Zero Atmosphere section holds the temperature, pressure, humidity, and altitude your zero was shot in, with Use Current and Save to Profile. Air Density and Density Altitude readouts sit under the fields (standard input layout on the iPhone).

The Atmosphere card: Presets, Live Weather, and Sensors, Use Density Altitude, the four weather fields, the Density Altitude and Air Density readouts, and Zero Atmosphere. The orange line says the air is still the standard day.

Touch and hold the weather button: Live Weather, Phone Sensors, Connect a Weather Meter, and Presets.

Atmosphere Presets: Save Current Conditions, and the Saved Presets list (empty until you save one).

The Zero Atmosphere section opened: Zero Temp, Zero Press, Zero Humidity and Zero Alt (blank means the current conditions are used), with Use Current and Save to Profile.

Where the air came from. The Atmosphere card carries a line naming the source of the air the Calculator is using and when: "Kestrel · live 2 s ago" (green while a connected Kestrel is sending it), "Kestrel · applied 3:41 PM", "Live Weather · 3:41 PM", "iPhone barometer", "GPS altitude", "Preset", "Saved calculation", or "Typed"; two sources read "iPhone barometer + Live Weather · 3:41 PM", more read "Mixed sources". While the air is still the untouched standard day it reads, in orange, "Standard sea-level air: not your weather". Tap the line for Where the Air Came From: each value (temperature, pressure, humidity, altitude, wind speed, wind direction) with its own source and time, and Kestrel Live while a Kestrel is connected (§19.6). A value you type over reads as Typed.

Where the Air Came From: the orange standard-air warning, then temperature, pressure, humidity, altitude, wind speed and wind direction, each with its own source line (Standard air or Default).

After typing the weather in by hand: the Atmosphere card's source line reads Typed, and the four fields show the typed values.

Navigation: Calculate tab → Atmosphere section

4.4 Wind inputs

Wind speed and direction. Direction is relative to where the rifle points: 12 o'clock is a headwind and 3 o'clock is a wind from the right. Each wind row has an Input Mode: Text, or Compass, which draws the wind dial above the same speed and direction fields. Multi-Segment Wind adds Near (0–200), Mid (200–600), and Far (600 and beyond) winds, in yards or meters. ± Wind opens a Wind Bracket popover (Low and High wind, 5 and 15 mph by default), and the results then add a wind dial range (on the iPhone, in the standard input layout). Show wind drag flag in the top bar's ••• menu toggles a floating wind dial, with the wind written under it, that sets the wind the solve reads: drag round the dial for the direction, drag the written wind up or down for the speed (up to 50 mph), and drag its edge to move it out of the way. With Multi-Segment Wind on it sets the near leg, otherwise the first wind row. Android has the same Input Modes, floating dial, and ± Wind bracket on its Wind card, plus a Quick 3-Segment button that sets up the three wind legs in one tap [Android]. Add Wind at Range adds a further wind leg at a range on both phones. The separate Wind Uncertainty tool (More → Shoot, both phones, §7.22) shows how much wind a target forgives.

The Wind card: Multi-Segment Wind, the Text and Compass input modes, Speed and Direction, Add Wind at Range, and ± Wind.

Multi-Segment Wind switched on: Near (0–200), Mid (200–600) and Far (600 and beyond) legs, each with its own Text or Compass mode, Speed and Direction.

± Wind Bracket: Enable Wind Bracketing, with the Low Wind (5 mph) and High Wind (15 mph) bounds.

Add Wind at Range: a further wind leg (here at 500 yd) under the first one, with its own Text or Compass mode, Speed, Direction and the range it starts at.

Swipe a wind leg to the left to get its red Delete button.

The floating wind dial from Show wind drag flag: the wind written under it (10 mph · 90°), and the close button at its top right.

The wind dial. One dial shows the wind on every screen that has one: the Calculator's Compass mode and floating dial, Competition Mode, Kestrel Live, the Reticle Simulator, and the Wind Estimation training. The bullet in the middle, nose up, is the line of fire. N, E, S, and W (and the corner points) sit on a ring that turns with the phone's compass so N points where north is; with no compass, no permission, or an uncalibrated compass, the ring holds still with N at the top and the dial says Compass off. The wind is one arrow coming in from the side it blows from, and the dial writes it in one line, for example "10 mph · From 9 o'clock · 270° · NW 315°"; the compass bearing appears only when it is known (a weather meter's own, or the target direction you set), and the phone's heading is never turned into one. Drag round the dial to set the direction to the nearest 5 degrees, or hold first for the exact degree; the number fields stay under it for exact values. Turning the phone moves only the ring and never changes a solve. VoiceOver (TalkBack on Android) reads the same words and turns the wind in 15 degree steps.

The wind dial in Compass mode: the bullet in the middle, N, E, S and W on the ring, one arrow for the wind, and the written line '10 mph · From 3 o'clock · 90°' with the Speed and Direction fields under it. 'Compass off' shows because the Simulator has no compass.

Navigation: Calculate tab → Wind section

4.5 Solver & Advanced inputs

Choose the Solver — 3DOF, 4DOF, 6DOF, or Pejsa (What is 6DOF?, §4.17, opens from this card). At the Basic App Level (§2) this card folds away while it holds its defaults. Toggle the Spin Drift, Aero Jump, and Coriolis corrections. Enter cant (typed, or read from the phone's motion sensor on the iPhone, §18.4) and latitude / azimuth for Coriolis; inclination is the Angle field on the Target card (§4.6). Offsets from the rifle's Cold Bore Offset, the suppressor's shifts, and the zero mode apply to all four solvers. Notes on the solvers and corrections:

4DOF is a true modified point-mass solver: it computes spin drift from the bullet's spin and yaw of repose during the flight, so it needs the bullet's length and twist.
6DOF is the validated full rotational model: it reproduces the published 6-DOF results in McCoy's Modern Exterior Ballistics. It needs the bullet's eight aero-coefficient tables (§5.5); without them the Calculator refuses, says what is missing and where to find it, and offers Enter 6DOF Aero Data. It also warns when it stops short of your range because the bullet yaws more than its data describes. With 6DOF chosen, a status row says "6DOF: Aero data loaded" or "6DOF: No aero data", what is needed (the eight Mach-indexed tables), where to get it, and how to enter it (on the iPhone, in the standard input layout; Android shows the same row).
Pejsa works only with a single G1 or G7 BC; for another drag model, a custom curve, or velocity-banded BCs, the Calculator refuses and points you to 3DOF or 4DOF.
With Coriolis on, the Calculator and every tool either apply it or say why they cannot (for example, no latitude or azimuth yet).
Aerodynamic jump moves the impact the way a crosswind pushes it: with a right-hand twist, a wind from the right raises the impact and a wind from the left lowers it.
On a slope, a head or tail wind is split along and across the sight line, and the air thins or thickens along the climb or descent; the header Mach number and speed of sound use that air.

The Solver & Advanced card: the solver, Spin Drift, Aero Jump, Coriolis, and cant.

The Solver menu: 3DOF, 4DOF, 6DOF and Pejsa.

6DOF chosen for a bullet with no aero data: the red 6DOF: No aero data notice, What's needed, Where to get it, and the What is 6DOF? link.

Cannot Calculate with 6DOF and no data: it says the solver needs all 8 coefficient tables, how to enter them, and offers Enter 6DOF Aero Data.

Navigation: Calculate tab → Solver & Advanced section

4.6 Target inputs

Range, Table Start, max range, increment (table step size), Angle (°) — the inclination of the shot, with a camera inclinometer icon beside it (§18.2) — and Height Difference. In the card layout the Target card reads Range | Increment, Table Start | Max Range, then Angle | Height Difference.

The Target card: Range, Increment, Table Start, Max Range, Angle, and Height Difference.

Table Start (yards, or meters with the Metric setting) sets where the drop table, its chart, and the CSV and Excel exports begin; 0, the default, starts the table at its first increment. Range 3000 with Max Range 5280 and Table Start 3000 shows 3,000 to 5,280. A start between two rows begins at the next row. The solve itself still runs from the muzzle, so the target's hold and everything else are unchanged. It is refused when it is negative, when it is not below Max Range, or when it falls past the last row the table records (Max Range 1,000 yd with an increment of 300 yd records rows to 900 yd, so a Table Start of 950 yd is refused). It is saved with the calculation (a calculation saved before reopens at 0), carried by the backups, and named in Send Inputs & Results.

Height Difference (ft, or m with the Metric setting) is how far the target sits above (+) or below (−) you. Typing it fills the Angle box, using the Range as the line-of-sight distance a rangefinder gives (100 ft at 1,000 yd is 1.91 degrees), and the Angle then follows the Range while the height is set, whether the range comes from the Calculator, Quick Solve, the Shoot view, Field Mode, or a rangefinder. Typing an Angle, or an Angle that comes from the camera inclinometer, a rangefinder, GPS Ranging, or a recalled calculation, clears the height: the Angle wins. Empty, the field shows dimmed the height the entered Angle reaches. A height as large as the range or larger shows "The height difference must be smaller than the range." under the field, and Calculate refuses it. Saved calculations, the Range Card, the Watch table, and Siri carry the Angle it set, one Angle for the whole solve, as for a typed angle; the Shoot view shows the height under its Angle; and the Stage Planner keeps the Calculator's one Angle for every target. There is no line-of-sight/flat switch, because a flat map distance would need a different Range, not just a different angle. Table Start and Height Difference are free, like the rest of the Calculator.

Navigation: Calculate tab → Target section

4.7 Corrections summary

After tapping Calculate, the results open under a Warnings list and a header strip (muzzle velocity, speed of sound, Mach number, and a supersonic / transonic / subsonic flag; when Temp Sensitivity moved the muzzle velocity, a note such as "−40 fps from Temp Sensitivity: 35°F vs. 59°F reference temp"). The header also says what air the answer was solved in: "Air: 59 °F · 29.92 inHg · 0 % · 0 ft" (or "Air: density altitude …"), followed by where that air came from (§4.3). While the weather is still the untouched standard sea-level day, the line is orange and adds "Standard sea-level air, not today's weather. Get your weather or enter it for a real hold." Quick Solve shows the same orange sentence.

The top of the results: the Warnings list, then the header strip with the muzzle velocity, speed of sound, Mach number, the air the answer was solved in, and a Something look off? row.

The header strip after typing the weather: MV 2,350 fps, speed of sound, Mach 2.07 Supersonic, then 'Air: 72 °F · 29.40 inHg · 40 % · 500 ft', the source (Typed), and the Something look off? row.

The Calculate button. Touch and hold it for Compact Shoot View, HUD Mode, Field Mode, Competition Mode, and the Target List.

The results tabs: Drop Table, Chart, Corrections & Reticle, and Stability (cut off at the right edge).

One speed regime everywhere. Transonic runs from Mach 0.8 to 1.2, and subsonic means only below Mach 0.8; every table, chart, the HUD, and every other screen use that one definition. The warning banner names the first transonic row and the first subsonic row of the drop table (for example "Bullet enters transonic zone at 800 yd" and "Bullet goes subsonic at 1,525 yd"; a table that never reaches a subsonic row has no subsonic line), so the banner always agrees with the first colored row. A load that already leaves the barrel in a regime says so ("Bullet is transonic from the muzzle", or "subsonic from the muzzle" below Mach 0.8); the muzzle's regime is the bullet's speed through the air at launch, so a head or tail wind counts.

Typing slips. The solve still runs, but an input that is almost certainly a typing slip is named in red in the Warnings list, in your units, with where to fix it ("Check this: …"): a muzzle velocity under 600 fps for a bullet of 40 gr or more (pellets and GL and GS lead bullets are exempt) or over 4,500 fps; a temperature correction that moves the velocity by more than 10 % (a Temp Sensitivity or Reference Temp slip); a zero distance under 5 yd or over 600 yd; a sight height under 0.25 in or over 5 in; and a G1 BC outside 0.01–1.2 or a G7 BC outside 0.01–0.65. These are wide screening limits and are never used in the math. The Shoot view, Quick Solve, and the Simple range card show the same lines.

Below the header are four scroll-across tabs (Drop Table, Chart, Corrections & Reticle, and Stability; the iPad shows them side by side instead), then an Export section, a Live Activity / Range Session control, Send to TAK when connected, and the compute time.

Under the tabs, the Export section: Export CSV, Export XLS (Excel), and a note pointing to Send Inputs & Results.

Further down: Start Range Session (Live Activity), then the Compute time (here 8.9 ms).

The Corrections & Reticle tab begins with the corrections at maximum range: elevation and windage corrections (MOA, MIL, or clicks at your configured click value), spin drift, aerodynamic jump, Coriolis (horizontal, plus the vertical Eötvös part when it is not zero), cant, the near zero (BZO), maximum ordinate and its range, Miller stability Sg, the bullet's Mach number, the local speed of sound, the bullet's state at the target range, a transonic/subsonic warning, the wind dial range (when wind bracketing is on), and the accuracy disclaimer. The Stability tab shows two gauges, At Muzzle and at 1,000 yd (or m), each reading Sg on a 0–3 bar with marks at 1.0, 1.3, and 2.0: Unstable below 1.0, Marginal below 1.3, Stable below 2.0, and Over-stabilized above.

The Corrections & Reticle tab, first card: the corrections at maximum range with their clicks, then spin drift, aerodynamic jump, near zero, stability, Mach, and the speed of sound.

The Stability tab: two gauges, At Muzzle and At 1000 yd, each reading Sg on a bar marked Unstable, Marginal, Stable and Over.

Navigation: Calculate tab → Calculate button → results

4.8 Trajectory table

The Drop Table tab — the full range table, up to 12 columns (range, drop, the angular hold in MOA, MIL, or IPHY, windage, velocity, energy, time of flight, Hear, Mach, spin drift, Coriolis, and aerodynamic jump), with subsonic rows in orange. A preset menu, a unit switch, and a Columns editor choose what shows, the column headings stay in view while the table scrolls, and Expand Full Page opens it full screen. The unit switch (MOA, MIL, IPHY) starts on the unit of the scope on your rifle (Match My Scope, §21.5): a MIL scope reads MIL and an MOA scope reads MOA. Pick another unit and the table shows that unit whatever the scope, and a Match My Scope button appears beside the switch; tap it to go back to the scope's unit. Every elevation and wind hold carries its hold arrow (§4.18); the wind column shows the drift as the hold that corrects it, pointing into the wind, its heading names the unit (Wind MIL), and each range carries its unit small and gray ("300 yd"). A number that shows as zero has no sign (0.0, never -0.0). Every number and heading stays on one line: each column is as wide as its longest value and heading at your text size, and the table scrolls sideways when the columns are wider than the screen. With a Table Start (§4.6) set, the table begins at that range. Exportable as CSV or Excel (§20.1); the PDF is on the Range Card tab.

The Drop Table: the unit switch, Expand Full Page, and the range rows with each hold's arrow.

The preset menu above the table: Global Settings (checked), Field, Long Range and Competition.

Expand Full Page: the whole table (range, drop, hold in MOA, wind hold, velocity, energy and time of flight) with the unit switch and Columns at the top and a back button.

Hold arrows in the table: up in warm red, down in cool green. A hold that reads zero shows no mark.

Hear the Hit. The Hear column is off until you switch on Hear the Hit in the Columns editor (it sits right after Time of Flight). It gives the seconds from the shot until you hear the hit at that range: the bullet's flight time plus the time the sound takes to come back, at the speed of sound in the air the solve used (so the same shot is heard later in cold air than in warm air). It is written to two decimals, and a dash means the solve had no usable speed of sound. The Full Range Card shows the same column, in its table and its PDF, when the switch is on (§13.1). Both phones.

The Column Editor: a switch and drag handle for Drop (inches), Drop (angular), Windage, Velocity, Energy, Time of Flight, and Hear the Hit (off).

Navigation: Calculate tab → results → Trajectory table

4.9 Trajectory charts

The Chart tab plots drop, velocity, energy, or windage against range (a segmented picker). Expand opens a full-screen trajectory chart with multi-select metric chips, a Data at card for the point you touch (range, drop, velocity, energy, windage, time of flight, and a subsonic flag) as you tap or drag, and a camera button to share a snapshot. Add note at selected range attaches a note to the chart (notes are dropped when the trajectory changes or the chart is closed), on both platforms. With a Table Start set, the range axis begins at the table's first row.

The Chart tab: the Drop, Velocity, Energy, and Windage picker, the Expand button, and the trajectory against range.

Expand: the full-screen Trajectory chart with the Drop, Velocity, Energy and Windage chips, the drop curve, and the Data at 525 yd card for the touched point.

Navigation: Calculate tab → results → Charts

4.10 Reticle holdover overlay

On the Corrections & Reticle tab, a visual MIL or MOA grid (per your Angular Unit) with color-coded dots (supersonic, transonic, subsonic) at each range step showing the bullet's holdover and windage relative to the crosshair. Tap a dot to read its range and its elevation and windage holds; tap it again to clear. Expand Full Page opens the plot full screen, where pinch and pan work.

The Reticle Holdover plot: Expand Full Page, See it in the Simulator, and the dots colored supersonic, transonic, and subsonic. The tapped dot (725 yd) shows its elevation and windage holds at the top.

Expand Full Page: the holdover plot full screen, dots colored supersonic, transonic and subsonic, with range labels along the curve.

Navigation: Calculate tab → results → Reticle Holdover section

4.11 Quick Actions

A Quick Actions list above the result tabs jumps to Compact Shoot View, HUD Mode, Competition Mode, Field Mode, Target List, Cards, and Compare with a Saved Solve (§4.14). Compact Shoot View and Compare are free; the rest follow the free plan (§24.5), free on a sample rifle and Pro on your own, and each card in the Cards menu has its own gate.

Quick Actions: Compact Shoot View, HUD Mode, Competition Mode, Field Mode, Target List, Cards, and Compare with a Saved Solve.

The Cards button. At the top of the Calculator, the Cards button (the stacked-cards icon) opens the card you used last (the Simple Range Card until you pick another); touching and holding it lists every card: Simple Range Card, Full Range Card, Come-Up Card, DA Range Card, Range Sheet, Multi-Target Scene, and Multi-Rifle Drop Table, each through its own screen and its own Pro gate. The Cards row in Quick Actions is its twin (it replaced the Come-Up Card row), with a line saying what the button does. The cards start from the Calculator: the Full Range Card takes the Calculator's air and its single wind once, over its starting values (not while the air is rebuilt from a typed density altitude, and only while wind zones are off), and the DA Range Card opens on the Calculator's rifle and load. The last card you opened stays on this phone.

Touch and hold the Cards button: Simple Range Card, Full Range Card, Come-Up Card, DA Range Card, Range Sheet, Multi-Target Scene and Multi-Rifle Drop Table.

Navigation: Calculate tab → results → Quick Actions

4.12 Suppressor

A suppressor applies its vertical and horizontal POI shift and its added length, and the Calculator solves again as you fit it or take it off. On the bench (§4.19), tap Suppressor: the choices list your suppressors and Off (Bare muzzle), and Take Off on the open part does the same. The part's On this rifle rows hold the Elevation shift and Windage shift the can causes on this rifle, in your turret's unit ("Plus is up and right"), saved as each box is left. Each rifle keeps its own numbers for a can: until the can is checked on a rifle, that rifle uses the can's own numbers, and the bench says so ("Not checked on this rifle yet: these are the can's own numbers"). The can itself, with its name, maker, caliber, length, and its own numbers, is edited on its Armory page (Edit in Armory). In the suppressor profile editor (Armory → Suppressors), a length outside 0 to 24 inches (0 to 610 mm) is refused with "Enter a length between 0 and 24 inches." instead of being saved as 0 or 24; an empty box still means 0.

The Suppressor part's choices under the bench: Off (Bare muzzle), Omega 300 and SOCOM556-RC3, with Tap a card to fit it.

A suppressor fitted: Take Off, the On this rifle numbers (Elevation shift and Windage shift, here 0 MOA), the note 'Not checked on this rifle yet: these are the can's own numbers', and Edit in Armory.

Navigation: Calculate tab → bench → Suppressor

4.13 Saved calculations

Every solve auto-saves all inputs, solver config, and results. The history lists them (filter All or Favorites; each row shows the name, rifle, range, and the elevation and windage hold, with their hold arrows, in your Angular Unit); star favorites, swipe to delete, and tap Load to restore a past solve into the Calculator. A line at the top says solves are saved automatically after each solve, how many are stored, and about how much space they take (a typical solve takes about half a kilobyte; a wind profile, a measured drag curve, or 6DOF tables add their own). Clear Older offers 1 week, 1 month, 3 months, 6 months, or 1 year, says how many solves that would delete, and deletes them only when you tap Delete in the confirmation; favorites are never cleared by age, and Clear Older is not offered while two solves are being picked to compare. A delete that cannot be saved says so (Couldn't Delete) instead of passing silently. The history and Clear Older are free.

Saved Calculations: All and Favorites, the automatic-save line with Clear Older, and a row for each solve with its hold, a star, and Load. The arrows button at the top right is Compare.

Clear Older: Older than 1 week, 1 month, 3 months, 6 months or 1 year.

Choosing an age when nothing is that old: 'No saved solves are older than 1 year. Favorites are always kept.' with OK.

Navigation: Calculate tab → history icon (Android: More → Calculation History)

4.14 What Changed? (compare two solves)

Pick two saved solves and see every input that differs, old and new, and how much each one moved your elevation and windage hold at the distance you choose. Open it from Quick Actions → Compare with a Saved Solve (it asks you to pick a saved solve to compare with the current one), or from the history screen → Compare (it needs two saved solves) → Pick Two Solves. The screen shows an Earlier and a Later solve card and a Distance picker; the Hold at line gives, for the distance you chose, the elevation and windage, old → new, with the change. Why the hold moved lists each changed input with its own effect on elevation and windage (each line re-solves the earlier solve with only that input changed, and a Together / interaction line makes them add up), and Show all inputs also lists the inputs that did not change. About 33 inputs are compared, from temperature through turret tracking. Free, on both platforms.

Pick a Saved Solve: All and Favorites, the automatic-save line with Clear Older, 'Pick the saved solve to compare with the current one', and the rows to choose from.

What Changed?: the Earlier and Later solves, the Distance, the Hold at that distance (old to new), and Why the hold moved.

Navigation: Calculate tab → results → Quick Actions → Compare with a Saved Solve

4.15 Shoot view (Compact Shoot View)

Every hold on one readable screen, titled Shoot, for the Calculator's own rifle, load, weather, and wind. From the top: any "Check this" typing-slip lines; the Elevation and Windage in large type with their hold arrows (§4.18); a grid of the hold in every unit at once (MOA, MIL, inches or centimeters at the target, and Clicks on the rifle's turret, allowing for its tracking); a data row (range, Sg, velocity, aerodynamic jump, drop, and, as your display settings allow, time of flight, energy, Mach, spin drift, Coriolis, trace, and maximum ordinate); a Range Card button that opens the Simple range card (§13.1); a range control (− and + in 25 yd or 25 m steps, or type the range); TARGET (the shot angle, with the Height Difference under it while one is set) and WIND (speed and direction, or the Near, Mid, and Far legs of a 3-leg wind); WEATHER (temperature, humidity, and pressure, or the density altitude when you entered one); and RIFLE & LOAD, which lists the inputs behind the answer. Changing a field solves again; until the new answer lands, the answer from before the change stays where it was, dimmed with a small spinner over it and at the same size, so the numbers never jump, and a spinner shows alone only for the very first solve. A refused solve never shows older numbers. Field Mode, the Simple range card, the Range Sheet and Multi-Target Scene holds, and Barrier Penetration's impact speed keep their numbers the same way. Standard View at the top right returns to the Calculator. With nothing solved it offers Calculate. The Shoot view is free; Settings → Layout → Compact Shoot View opens the Calculate tab in it, once per launch.

The Shoot view: the hold in large type, the hold in every unit, the data row, the Range Card button, the range control, Target, Wind, Weather, and Rifle & Load.

Navigation: Calculate tab → Shoot view button (top bar), or results → Quick Actions → Compact Shoot View

4.16 Send Inputs & Results

One text file, through the share sheet, with everything the Calculator is using and everything it gives back, for support: the rifle and load, every input (muzzle velocity, temperature sensitivity and reference, bullet, BC and drag model, barrel, twist, sight height, zero and its weather, optic, zero offsets, weather, target, solver), anything not saved to the rifle, then the answer (the velocity actually used, any "Check" line, the hold at the target, and the whole table) or the reason the solve was refused, and last the exact solve in a form support can run again. The file also names this phone and the app version, where the bullet and its BC came from, where each part of the weather came from and how old it is, the wind and the shot's angles, any truing saved to the bullet, the catalog versions, whether Pro is active, and the connected device; an answer solved from a second sight (§4.19) names the sight, its height and its zero, and its table gives holds, not dial settings. A screen opens first with one switch, Include my DOPE for this load (off by default, and dimmed with no load in the Calculator), which adds the load's shot log: where each shot hit, beside what this solve predicts at its range. Send then opens the share sheet. It is written in English and in yards, inches, fps, °F, and inHg, whatever your screen shows. The answer lists the same warning lines the Calculator's banner shows. It works when a solve is refused, too, and the same file goes with every report sent from the app's report form (§21.15). On both platforms.

The screen that opens first: Cancel, Send, and the Include my DOPE for this load switch (off by default).

Navigation: Calculate tab → ••• → Send Inputs & Results

4.17 What is 6DOF?

A plain-language page on the six degrees of freedom: three moves (downrange, up and down, left and right) and three rotations (roll, pitch, yaw), each in plain words with the app's own names in brackets (Zero-Yaw Drag Cd₀, Lift Force CLα, Roll Damping Clp, Pitching Moment CMα, Gyroscopic Stability, and the rest of the names the 6DOF data editor and the Calculator show), ending with what spin does for stability. It is paraphrased from McCoy's Modern Exterior Ballistics, chapter 9, and works offline. It opens from the Solver card of the Calculator (both layouts), from Settings → Solver → Default Solver, from the 6DOF data editor (§5.5), and from the Field Guide's 3DOF, 4DOF, and 6DOF entries (§3). On Android it opens as a bottom sheet.

What is 6DOF?, top: the intro, then Where the bullet is: three moves (Downrange, Up and down, Left and right), each with the app's own names in brackets. Done closes the sheet.

What is 6DOF?, bottom: How the bullet turns (Roll, Pitch, Yaw), the line on what spin does for stability, and the McCoy, Modern Exterior Ballistics, chapter 9 credit.

Navigation: Calculate tab → Solver & Advanced → What is 6DOF?

4.18 Hold arrows

Every hold on every screen is drawn the same way: an arrow in place of the sign, so no number changes. Up or down for elevation (up warm, down cool), right or left for the wind (amber either way), and no mark at all when a hold shows as zero (never -0.00). Each arrow reads in light and dark, and VoiceOver (TalkBack) says the hold in words ("up 2.60 MIL"). A drift column turns into the hold that corrects it, so it points into the wind. The arrows are on the Calculate table, the Range Card (Simple and Full), the Shoot view, the saved solves list, the DOPE Book, the Range Sheet, the Target List, the Multi-Rifle Drop Table, Field Mode, the DA Range Card, the Multi-Target Solver, Quick Solve, Competition Mode, the HUD, Quick Targets, the corrections clicks, the iPad solution pill, Kestrel Live, and the Apple Watch and Wear OS Shoot pages. Shared and exported tables keep their signs. In Competition Mode and the HUD, a hold that rounds to zero while the turret still takes clicks shows its direction with one or two more decimals (0.04 MIL reads ↑0.04 beside its clicks), so you can tell which way to turn.

Arrows on the corrections clicks: 310 clicks UP (warm red arrow) and 67 clicks RIGHT (amber arrow), then spin drift, aero jump, near zero, stability, Mach and the speed of sound.

Navigation: Calculate tab → results → Trajectory table (and each screen above)

4.19 The bench

The bench is at the top of the Calculator on every phone and tablet, above the input cards in both layouts: a picture of the rifle you are shooting with, drawn with what is fitted to it, with the rifle's name and its zero (or "not zeroed with this optic") in its corner. It is the one place to see and change what Calculate shoots with. Its parts are Rifle, Optic, Ammo, Suppressor, Night Gear, Zero, Rangefinder, Weather Meter, and Chronograph. Under the rifle you can also fit accessories and second sights (below), and with a loadout on, an Adjust button at the top right of the bench fine-tunes where each part is drawn.

The bench: the loadout row, the rifle with its optic, suppressor, and night gear, the Zero button, and the ammo.

Choosing a part. Tap a part on the bench. For the rifle, optic, ammo, suppressor, and night gear, its choices open as cards under the bench (Tap a card to fit it), and that part's own numbers open below them. The optic's choices include Iron Sights (no optic), and the suppressor's include Off (Bare muzzle). A New card on each list (New rifle, New optic, New load, New can, New night gear) opens that kind's catalog or Add page in the Armory (§5.9), and its Save puts the new part on the bench and returns there. The Zero, Rangefinder, Weather Meter, and Chronograph parts open their own section without cards. With no rifle on the bench the other parts say Choose a rifle first.

With no rifle on the bench, the Ammo part says Choose a rifle first.

The optic's choices as cards under the bench. Tap a card to fit it; Iron sights is the choice with no optic.

The numbers under a part are the range-day numbers, typed straight into the gear and saved as each box is left, so the Calculator never solves on a half-typed number:

Rifle — the barrel and twist in one line, the cold bore offset (an elevation shift and a windage shift, in your turret's unit), the twist rate when the solve still needs it, and the rifle's accessories and second sights (below).
Optic — the sight height and the turret tracking, and Remove, which takes the optic off and puts the rifle's iron sights on.
Ammo — the bullet in one line (weight, drag model, and BC), then the muzzle velocity (while it is empty, an Estimate … fps button fills a typical speed for the cartridge), the temperature sensitivity with Work It Out From Two Readings (§4.1), and the reference temperature, plus any bullet number the solve still needs.
Suppressor — where it moves the hit on this rifle (§4.12), and Take Off.
Night Gear — where it moves the hit over the day zero (§5.4).

The Optic part with Iron sights chosen: What-if and Remove, the MOA unit, the On this rifle numbers (Sight height 1.9 in, Turret tracking 100 %), and Edit in Armory.

The Night Gear part's choices: None (Day optic alone) and New night gear (Clip-on, thermal, IR).

Every part also has Edit in Armory, which opens its Armory page for everything else: a part's details are changed only there, and what you save there reaches the Calculator at once. A locked rifle's numbers are read-only.

What-if. The Rifle, Optic, and Ammo parts each have an orange What-if button. It opens the values in an orange card marked "Not saved. Used for this solve only.", with Save to Rifle (Save to Load for the ammo) and Discard. Putting another loadout, or an empty bench, in place while What-if values are open asks first.

A change not yet kept: 'Unsaved changes to AK Irons: These are used for this calculation only until you save them to the rifle', with Undo and Save to Rifle.

What the solve still needs. A number a solve cannot run without (zero distance, twist rate, ammo, muzzle velocity, BC, bullet weight, bullet diameter, or bullet length) shows under the bench as Can't calculate yet, naming what is missing; tap it to open the part that holds the first one. It only says so: you can still save, close, and swipe.

Zero. A zero is a rifle, an optic, and ammo together. The Zero part says whether this rifle and optic are zeroed ("Not zeroed with this optic yet": zero it at the range, then tap Zeroed Here, which asks Make this the zero? and, on your yes, Zeroed with this setup), whether this ammo is the one the zero was made with or where it lands against the zero and how that is known (Check and Confirm work it out from a 3-shot group, or from a number typed in; §5.3a), and, with a suppressor fitted, where the can lands against the zero. Under those are the zero distance and the weather it was zeroed in (zero temperature, altitude, pressure, and humidity) and the Zero: … ▾ row for your saved zeros (§5.3). Every hold allows for what is known. The Zero icon is green when the rifle, optic, ammo, and muzzle on the bench are all zeroed or checked, and orange when something is not.

The Zero part: Zeroed Here, the ammo that has not been checked against the zero, and where the can lands, each with a Check button.

The Make this the zero? question after tapping Zeroed Here: what the rifle, optic and ammo do at 50yd (example), that other ammo and cans keep where they hit against it, and the Zeroed with this setup button.

The Zero part once the ammo is zeroed: 'Zeroed with this ammo', the zero distance, the zero's temperature, altitude, pressure and humidity (unknown until entered), and the Zero: 100yd row.

Devices. The Rangefinder, Weather Meter, and Chronograph parts show your own device's picture, lit while it is connected, and open Kestrel Live, the Devices screen, or the chronograph session (§19).

The Rangefinder part: Connect, Not connected, and the picture strip (No picture, RAPTAR-S, Impact 4000).

The Weather Meter part (here a 5700 Elite Kestrel): Connect, Not connected, and Edit in Armory.

The Chronograph part (here a Xero C1 Pro): Connect, Not connected, Open a Session, and Edit in Armory.

Open a Session: Session Statistics (Shots, Mean, SD, ES), 'No Readings: Fire a shot to begin recording', Clear Session, and the note about devices that may have trouble connecting.

Accessories. Under the rifle's numbers (tap the rifle on the bench, or open the rifle's page in the Armory) an Accessories group holds a strip of pictures for each of Weapon light, Forward grip, Bipod, and Stock, each strip starting with No picture. A kind shows only when the app has pictures that fit this rifle's picture. A weapon light also picks its Mount position: On top, On the side, or Underneath (a rangefinder or aiming laser on the handguard picks the same three on its own part). A light starts On the side. On top, its clamp sits on the top edge of the rifle, after any rail modules; Underneath, the light hangs from the bottom of the handguard (a rifle picture with no handguard or no room under it draws the light on the side instead). A light's mount saved before version 2.0.48 stays on the side until you pick again. Tap an accessory on the bench to open these rows. They are pictures only: nothing fitted here changes a solve. A locked rifle's pictures are read-only.

The Accessories group: a strip for Weapon light and a strip for Bipod, each starting with No picture.

A weapon light fitted: the Mount position switch under the strip (On top, On the side, Underneath).

Second sights. Below the accessories, Second sights holds three strips: Stacked dot (a mini red dot on a scope or prism), Magnifier (behind a red dot), and Offset sight (a mini red dot or iron sights canted 45 degrees on the top rail, with Canted to Left or Right; with no room left on the rail it is kept but not drawn, and the screen says so). The magnifier is a picture only. A stacked dot or an offset sight can also be shot from: the row under it opens a sheet titled with the sight, where you enter its Sight Height (0 to 12 in) and Zero Range, and, if they differ from your main zero, its Zero Conditions (temperature, pressure, humidity, altitude; a box left empty uses the main zero's). Nothing is guessed: until a height and a zero are entered, the sight is not offered to solve from.

Second sights: the Stacked dot, Magnifier and Offset sight strips, each starting with No picture.

A stacked dot's own sheet: Sight Height, Zero Range, and Zero Conditions (Temperature, Pressure, Humidity, Altitude), with Cancel and Save.

Solving from a second sight. With a second sight set up, the Calculator and the Reticle Simulator's Setup tab (§9.7) show a one-line switch above the answer: the main optic (named by its kind, such as Scope or Red Dot) and each second sight that is set up. Pick one and the answer is solved from that sight's own height and zero. A line names it ("Stacked dot: solved from 3.10 in over the bore, zeroed at 50 yd."), and a second sight not set up yet shows "Stacked dot: set its sight height and zero to solve from it." — tap it to set them. A second sight has no turret, so its answer is holds only: no clicks, no turret tracking, and none of the rifle's, load's, can's or night gear's zero shifts. A stacked dot keeps the Calculator's cant; an offset sight is solved level, because you roll the rifle upright to use it. The sight an answer was solved from is saved with the calculation in History and named in Send Inputs & Results (§4.16).

A stacked dot fitted (Micro red dot) before its numbers are entered: the line 'Stacked dot: set its sight height and zero to solve from it.'

Adjust. With a loadout on, Adjust (top right of the bench) swaps the row under the rifle for fine-tuning: tap a part to pick it, then move it toward the stock or the muzzle or up or down (0.1 in a step, up to 4 in either way), make it smaller or larger (2% a step, between 75% and 133%), or drag it. A light or a handguard module also picks its Mount position there. The arrow button offers Reset this part and Reset all; Done ends Adjust. The fine-tuning is kept in that loadout for the picture shown, so another loadout is unchanged, and it travels with a shared build (§20.9).

Adjust on: the row under the rifle reads 'Tap a part to adjust it' with the reset button, and Done at the top right.

Pictures. Gear pictures download as you use them, and a picture shows the moment it arrives: no restart. The picture of any gear you open downloads right away; the rest of the library downloads in the background on Wi-Fi, or on any network when you tap Check for Updates Now. Settings → Data → Ballistic Data Updates → Download pictures over cellular (on by default) lets pictures use mobile data, and your phone's data-saving mode is respected either way. A part the app has no picture of yet (a scope, a suppressor, a light, a grip, a second sight) is drawn on the closest picture of its kind, with a small hourglass on it, and a line under the bench names it: "Similar picture for: … Its own picture is coming." A scope's picture sits on the rifle at its rings, the mount points on its tube. A scope, another optic, an offset red dot, a second sight, the iron sights, or a suppressor is never drawn as a banana. The banana ("No picture yet for: …. It's still in your build and every number uses it.", with a Tell Us button that prepares an email to support) appears only for a device (a rangefinder or night device) put on the rifle's side when the catalog has no top view of it, and, as a last resort, for a grip, bipod, or stock of a kind the phone has no picture of at all. A light is never a banana: while the phone has no light picture at all (offline, Low Data Mode, or a first launch), the light is drawn on a built-in light picture, and its own picture takes over once it arrives. Whatever the picture, the part is in your build and every number uses it.

Navigation: Calculate tab → bench

4.20 Loadouts

A loadout is a saved bench: a rifle with its optic, ammo, suppressor, and night gear on it, and the fine-tuning you set with Adjust (§4.19). Your loadouts are a row of chips above the bench, and a line under the bench says where you stand.

Put one on: tap its chip, or swipe the bench through your saved loadouts (the hint reads Swipe for loadouts); the swipe ends at an empty bench. A loadout's card on the Armory's Loadouts shelf (§5.9) puts it on too, and takes you to Calculate.
Save one: a bench that no loadout holds says Not saved with a Save button, which names it ("Saves the rifle with the optic, load, suppressor and night gear on it now") and adds its chip.
Change one: with a loadout on, the line reads Saved: "Parts you change here go into" that loadout. A part you pick on the bench goes into it, so there is no second save. Save as New keeps the bench as another loadout.
Start a new one: the dashed New chip at the end of the row empties the bench so you can pick a rifle, optic, ammo, and the rest from scratch. It waits for a rifle ("New loadout: pick a rifle to start"), and asks first when What-if values are open.

After the New chip: an empty bench that reads Choose a rifle, with the line New loadout: pick a rifle to start, and the rifle cards to pick from.

Hold a chip for Cards & History, Share Build (§20.9), Rename, and Delete. Delete removes only the saved loadout: the rifle and its optic, ammo, and can stay in the Armory.

Touch and hold a loadout chip: Cards & History, Share Build, Rename and Delete.

Cards & History. The clock button beside Saved, a chip's hold menu, and the clock on a loadout's Armory card open a page for that loadout in two halves. Cards for Today holds the Come-Up Card and the Range Card, each worked out for this loadout in today's weather: a tap puts the loadout on first, so the card stands on its rifle, optic, ammo, and suppressor, and if it will not go on, the page says Not Put On and sends you to Calculate to see why. History lists everything saved with the loadout's rifle, newest first, each with the weather it was shot in: solves, range cards, Shot Log and Shot Book entries, cold bore shots, DOPE entries, and chronograph strings, filtered All, Solves, Cards, or Shots. A record that names different ammo than the loadout's is left out, and a solve saved while a loadout was on is tagged with it, so two loadouts on one rifle each keep their own solves.

Cards & History for a loadout: Cards for Today (the Come-Up Card and the Range Card), then History, filtered All, Solves, Cards, or Shots.

Navigation: Calculate tab → loadout chips (above the bench); Armory tab → Loadouts shelf

4.21 My View

My View is a screen of your own tiles, each one a number the app already works out somewhere else for the Calculator's rifle, load, and conditions: pick the tiles you want, put them in order, and keep several layouts. It is not a free-form canvas, and a tile never works anything out a second way. It is a Basic-level tool and works on both phones.

My View on the Range Day layout: the Hold, Drop Table, Conditions, Wind, Time of Flight, Velocity, Energy, and Rifle & Load tiles. Edit and the layout menu are at the top.

Tiles (15): Hold (the elevation and windage to dial at the target range, in the scope's own unit while Match My Scope is on, §21.5), Hold in Every Unit (MOA, MIL, inches or centimeters, and clicks), Wind (the Calculator's wind on the wind dial), Time of Flight, Velocity (with Mach), Energy, Drop, Spin Drift & Coriolis (with aerodynamic jump), Sound Delay (flight time plus the sound coming back), Ethical Shot Distance (Pro), Conditions (temperature, pressure, humidity, density altitude, and where the air came from), Kestrel Live (a connected Kestrel's reading), Drop Table (five rows around the target range), Target (range and angle), and Rifle & Load.
Size: each tile is Small (one column) or Wide (two columns). Hold in Every Unit and Drop Table are always wide. The grid is two columns on a phone, four on a tablet, and one at the largest text sizes.
Layouts: the title is the open layout's name, and its menu lists your Layouts (the open one is checked), the Ready-Made Layouts (Hunter, PRS, Range Day, and LE once LE/Military access is unlocked), New Layout, Duplicate, Rename, and Delete (not offered for your only layout). A new install starts on a Range Day layout. A layout holds each tile once, up to 12 tiles on a phone and 20 on a tablet; one made on a tablet and opened on a phone shows its first 12 and says "Showing 12 of N tiles. The rest show on iPad." (on Android, "…on a tablet."). Layouts are saved on the phone and go with a backup (§21.10).

The layout menu: your Layouts (Range Day checked), the Ready-Made Layouts (Hunter, PRS, Range Day), and New Layout, Duplicate, Rename and Delete.

Open it: More → Shoot → My View, or the My View button right under Calculate on the Calculate tab (§4).
Move a tile by hand: touch and hold a tile, then drag it where you want it. The other tiles make room as it passes, and the place the tile left stays dimmed but readable until you let go. Let go without moving and the tile's menu opens, if it has one (next item). Edit still reorders too.
Tile menus: the Wind, Conditions, Target, Kestrel Live, and Rifle & Load tiles each have a small ••• button at their top right, and touching and holding the tile opens the same list. Wind: Change Wind. Conditions: the weather button's own choices (Live Weather, Phone Sensors, Kestrel Live or Connect a Weather Meter, and Presets), then Change Conditions. Target: Change Range and Angle. Kestrel Live: Apply to Calculator and Open Kestrel Live. Rifle & Load: Switch Load (with a rifle on the bench) and Switch Rifle…. A plain tap on a tile does nothing, and the other tiles have no menu. Each choice is also on the Calculator's own inputs.
Edit: the Edit button opens the layout: drag a row to reorder, swipe it to delete, pick Small or Wide, and add tiles from Add Tile ("N of 12 tiles" at the top); Done closes it.

Edit on the Range Day layout: '8 of 12 tiles', each tile with Small and Wide, a red minus and a drag handle, then Add Tile below with the tiles not yet in the layout.

Always honest about age: a tile that comes from the Calculator's answer says so when it is not current. While a solve runs it reads Updating…; once an input has changed since the last Calculate it is dimmed and reads Out of date; before the first solve it reads Not calculated yet; and a target past the end of the trajectory reads Out of Range. A bar above the tiles says why and has a Calculate button. Opening My View with nothing solved yet solves once for you. Conditions and Wind read Over 30 min old when the weather or wind they show was taken longer ago than that and is not live, and Kestrel Live shows its own live or stale state.
Free or Pro: My View follows the free plan (§24.5): the tiles work on the five sample rifles for everyone, and on your own rifle with Pro or the 7-day free trial; the Ethical Shot Distance tile is Pro. A tile held back for the free plan reads Pro.

Navigation: More → Shoot → My View

4.22 Something look off?

Something look off? checks the Calculator's inputs for the usual set-up and typing mistakes, in plain words, offline, with no account and no Pro. It runs 12 checks and reports a sentence for each one that fails: what looks off, then what to check.

Weather: the Calculator is still on standard sea-level air (it adds your phone's altitude, or says a weather meter has a reading, when it can); and a pressure that reads like a sea-level number at your altitude (checked from 2,000 ft up).
Drag Model: a BC that looks like a G1 number under G7, or the reverse, by comparing it with what the bullet catalog lists for that bullet.
Units: a range or a zero distance that is a round number in the other unit (yards typed as meters, or the reverse); a turret unit that differs from the reticle's unit.
Muzzle velocity: far from the speed typical for the cartridge (under 75 percent of the low end or over 125 percent of the high end).
Sight height: under 0.5 in or over 3.9 in, which catches millimeters typed as inches.
Temp sensitivity: outside plus or minus 3 fps per °F.
Zero weather: none saved with your zero, or the standard air left in place, when zeroing in today's air instead would move the zero by a click or more.
Turret tracking: outside the 95 to 105 percent a scope passes in the Turret Tracking Test (§8.4).
BC steps: a G1 BC that rises as the bullet slows, or two steps that start at the same velocity.

Where to find it. An entry row, Something look off?, sits on the results under the line that says what air the answer was solved in (on the iPad, in the results pane above the trajectory chart); it also leads More → Feedback, which opens the Calculator with the sheet up. The sheet lists Check these with one orange line per finding and "Tap a line to go to the field it names": the Atmosphere or Target card opens, or the bench part that holds the number. When nothing is found it says Nothing looks off, and a Checked line lists what was looked at. With no rifle on the bench it asks you to pick a rifle and its ammo first. Under the findings, the free one-on-one help offer has a Send Email button that prepares an email to support with the findings in the body, and the support address to copy. [iOS] On an iPhone with Apple's on-device AI, Explain in plain words rewords each finding; it can only reword the same sentence, and a rewording that changes a number is thrown away. The Android app has the same checks, words, and help offer, without the rewording.

Something look off? with a finding: 'Standard sea-level air, not today's weather', then Explain in plain words, the Checked list, and the free help offer with Send Email and the support address.

When nothing is found: Nothing looks off, the Checked line, and the help offer.

Navigation: Calculate tab → results → Something look off? (or More → Feedback → Something look off?)

5. Profiles — My Armory

My Armory is the primary organizational unit. The tab is labeled Armory, and on every device (iPhone, iPad, and Android phone and tablet) it is a page of picture shelves (§5.9): Loadouts, Rifles, Optics, Ammo, Suppressors, Rangefinders, Night Vision, and Devices. Tap a loadout to put it on the bench and go to Calculate; tap a rifle or any other part to open its page, and touch and hold a card for Use on Bench, Edit, Share (a rifle's reads Share Rifle), and, for a rifle, Delete Rifle. A locked rifle shows a lock and cannot be deleted. Adding rifles, ammo, optics, suppressors, and loadouts is free, as many as you like (+, Add a Rifle, §5.8); what needs Pro is calculating your own rifles (§24.5).

My Armory: picture shelves for Loadouts, Rifles, Optics, and Ammo, with search, + and ••• at the top.

Further down My Armory: the Ammo, Suppressors and Rangefinders shelves, each with its count and See All.

The last shelves: Night Vision and Devices (a weather meter and a chronograph, each marked Not connected), with the hint that a card's touch-and-hold menu uses it on the bench.

Touch and hold a rifle's card: Use on Bench, Edit, Share Rifle and Delete Rifle.

Navigation: My Armory tab

5.1 Rifle editor

A rifle's page. Tap a rifle's card in the Armory (or touch and hold it and choose Edit) to open its page, titled Rifle. At the top is the Locked / Unlocked switch with a lock beside it; a locked rifle shows a note to unlock it before changing it or the gear on it. Then come Name, Caliber (the whole row opens the caliber picker), Barrel, Twist (1 turn in) with a Direction control (Right or Left), a Cold bore offset group (Elevation shift and Windage shift), and Notes; below them are the rifle's Picture strip (with Find your model), Accessories (Weapon light and Bipod), and Second Sights (Stacked dot, Magnifier, and Offset sight). Every box saves as you leave it; Done closes the page, and Use on Bench at the bottom puts the rifle on the bench. The optic has its own page, Edit Optic, which opens from its card on the Optics shelf: Find your scope, Nickname, brand and model, Kind, Reticle (with a small Zoom In picture of it), the MOA / MIL (MRAD) switch, Click Value, Usual sight height, and the Bench picture strip, with Cancel and Save at the top and Save and Use on Bench at the bottom.

The Edit Rifle editor. The longer editor (touch and hold a rifle, or swipe it, in Rifle Profiles, the Armory Suite's Roster, §16.2) opens as Edit Rifle (a new rifle is made in the guided Add a Rifle, §5.8) with a Profile Locked/Unlocked switch, then: Rifle (name, a caliber picker, barrel length) with Auto-fill from Rifle Database; Twist; Optic (cascading brand → model → reticle pickers, sight height, turret unit MOA or MIL (MRAD), click value, turret tracking %); Zero Conditions (the rifle's own zero range and the atmosphere present when it was zeroed, with an orange note when a named zero is in use); Cold Bore Offset; Loads; and Notes. Choosing a turret unit fills in 0.25 MOA or 0.1 MRAD when no click value is set.

The rifle's page (Edit, from a card's menu): the Locked / Unlocked switch, Name, Caliber, Barrel, Twist with Right and Left, and the Cold Bore Offset (elevation and windage shift). Done closes it; Use on Bench is at the bottom.

The same page with the rifle Locked: the lock shows, and the note says to unlock it to change it or the gear on it.

Further down the rifle page: the end of the Picture strip (with Find your model), then Accessories (Weapon light and Bipod, each strip starting with No picture) and the start of Second Sights.

Second Sights: the Stacked dot, Magnifier and Offset sight strips, each starting with No picture, with the note that a stacked dot goes on a scope or prism and a magnifier behind a red dot.

The optic's own Edit Optic page: Find your scope, Nickname, brand and model, Kind (Scope), Reticle (the name, here TREMOR3, with a small Zoom In picture of it), the MOA / MIL (MRAD) switch, Cancel and Save at the top and Save and Use on Bench at the bottom.

Zoom In on the reticle: TREMOR3 drawn large on a light disc so every mark can be read. Done closes it.

The Select Reticle list: Recommended for this optic, a Show all brands switch (808 reticles), and a search box.

The lower part of Edit Optic: the MOA / MIL (MRAD) switch, Click Value, Usual sight height with its note, and the Bench picture strip (Specter DR, Mark 5HD, ACOG).

Navigation: Armory tab → tap a rifle or an optic (the Edit Rifle editor: Armory Suite → Roster → Rifle Profiles → touch and hold a rifle → Edit Rifle)

5.2 Load editor

Each rifle holds any number of loads. A load's page in the Armory (tap its card on the Ammo shelf, or touch and hold it and choose Edit) is titled Ammo and has Name and Cartridge (the full editor reached from Edit Rifle → Loads groups these two as Load Info); Bullet (Choose Bullet, which reads Change Bullet once a bullet is set, drills down caliber → brand → bullet with search on the iPhone; Bullet name, weight, diameter, length); BC (a Drag Model menu split into models with a published BC and models that need your own, plus Custom, and velocity-dependent BC steps with Add BC Step); Velocity (an Estimate … fps button that fills a typical speed for the cartridge, muzzle velocity, temperature sensitivity with Work It Out From Two Readings (§4.1), reference temperature); Cartridge Details (overall length, cartridge base to ogive, powder charge, powder type); and Notes. Every BC is saved with its drag model (G1 or G7), so a saved load keeps the right pairing. Fill from a Saved Load… fills the load from any load you already have (it asks before replacing anything you typed). A saved load also has a 6DOF Data row (it reads Entered or Not entered) that opens the bullet's 6DOF tables (§5.5). On the bench, the Ammo part's Edit in Armory opens the load's page in the Armory (§4.19).

The load's page (title Ammo): Name, Cartridge, Change Bullet, then Bullet name, weight, diameter and length, and the Drag Model menu with its BC.

The Drag Model menu on a load: under Standard, G1 (checked), G7, G2, G5, G6, G8, GI, GL and GS, then Custom.

The lower half of the load: Add BC Step, Velocity (muzzle velocity, temperature sensitivity with Work It Out From Two Readings, reference temperature), the 6DOF Data row (Not entered), Cartridge Details and Notes.

In the full load editor (reached from Edit Rifle → Loads, §5.1), a load that the rifle was not zeroed with also has its own Zero Offset card; see §5.3a for the zero check that sets it. The shorter Ammo page in the Armory does not have that card.

Navigation: My Armory → (rifle) → (load)

5.3 Multiple zeros per rifle

Each rifle supports unlimited named zeros, each storing its own label, range, atmospheric reference conditions (temperature, pressure, humidity, altitude), and notes (e.g., "100 yd summer", "200 yd winter mountain"). Picking a zero sets the zero range and the conditions it was zeroed in; live weather is left alone. Create zeros, edit them (swipe a zero to the right), and delete them (swipe to the left) in the Calculator's Zeros sheet (titled with the rifle's name), opened from the Zero: … ▾ row in the bench's Zero part (§4.19; it lists Rifle's Own Zero, Saved Zeros, and Add Zero, with Use Current Conditions). A new zero starts from the Calculator's current conditions (in density-altitude mode, from the rifle's own recorded zero), so saving one untouched records today's air. Deleting the zero in use switches to the saved zero nearest it in range. The Zero row is on the bench in both input layouts on the iPhone, and Android has the same row and sheet.

The Zeros sheet for AK Irons: the Rifle's Own Zero (checked, 100yd), the explanation, and 'No saved zeros yet. Tap Add Zero to create one.' Done and Add Zero are at the top.

The New Zero form: a name, the distance and the weather it was zeroed in, with Use Current Conditions, Cancel and Save Zero.

After saving: Saved Zeros lists '100yd Zero' with its distance and weather (59°F · 29.92 inHg · 0% RH · 0ft).

Swipe a saved zero to the left: a red Delete button.

Navigation: Calculate tab → bench → Zero → Zero: … ▾

5.3a Zeroed with a different load (the zero check)

A rifle is zeroed with one load. Another load leaves the muzzle at another speed and drops differently, so at the same zero it can hit somewhere else, and every hold with it starts off by the same amount. That amount is an angle, so it is the same at every range. The zero check finds it once for each load and remembers it, so you do not re-zero the scope or fire a box of rounds to learn it. It needs a rifle with at least two loads. Add the second one in the Armory: tap + and choose Add Ammo (a load is kept with a rifle; §5.2), or use Add Load in the full rifle editor (§5.7). The wording is the same on the iPhone and Android.

The zero line under the loadout. In the Calculator's bench, each ammo's Zero line says where that load stands:

Zeroed with this ammo (green): this rifle, optic and ammo hit the aim point at the zero distance. This is the load the rifle is zeroed with.
This ammo isn't checked against your zero (orange), with the note "Ammo you didn't zero with can hit somewhere else. Check it once and it's remembered." and a Check button. It shows for a load that was never checked, or one you answered Not Now for. Check opens the question below, or goes straight to the estimate when the app already knows which load the rifle is zeroed with.
Estimated: hits … at … (orange), "Worked out from the ammo you zeroed with. Shoot 3 shots at … to confirm.", with a Confirm button. Confirm opens the estimate page again (below), where Confirm with 3 Shots leads on to Measure with a Group.
This ammo hits … at …, "Measured with a group" or "Entered by hand", with "Every hold with it allows for this."
Zeroed with this ammo? with a Zeroed button, on a rifle's only ammo that was never tied to the zero: tap it if the rifle and optic were zeroed with that ammo.

The Zero line under the loadout, green: Zeroed with this ammo (example rifle).

The orange line for a load that was never checked: This ammo isn't checked against your zero, with its note and the Check button.

After Use the Estimate: the orange line Estimated: hits 0.06 MIL high at 50yd (an example number), with its Confirm button.

After a saved group: This ammo hits 0.44 MIL low, 0.17 MIL right at 50yd (example numbers), Measured with a group, with Every hold with it allows for this.

The question. A rifle that has just been put on the bench shows the orange line for a load that was never checked right away, with no question. The first time you switch to a load that was never checked, on a rifle that has other loads (in the Calculator, or by swapping the ammo in the loadout), the app asks Zeroed with a different load? It names the rifle and its zero distance and says a load it was not zeroed with can hit somewhere else there. Under Which load did you zero it with? pick the load itself (listed with "(this load)") or one of the others:

Picking (this load) marks it as the load the rifle is zeroed with. Nothing else changes.
Picking another load opens the estimate.
Not Now closes the question for good ("You can set it later in the load's Zero Offset."). The orange line and its Check button stay.

The question Zeroed with a different load? for the 85 gr load (example): the rifle's 50 yd zero, the list under Which load did you zero it with? with 85 gr (this load) and 110 gr V-MAX, Not Now, and the footer You can set it later in the load's Zero Offset.

The estimate. The page reads "Estimate: (load) hits (amount) at (zero distance)." It is worked out from the two loads' speeds, bullet weights and drag, with no shooting. Under it: "From the two loads' speeds and drag only. Barrel whip can move a different load more than this, so confirm with a group." If either load is missing its velocity, BC or weight, the page says "No estimate" and names what is missing. The buttons:

Confirm with 3 Shots opens Measure with a Group.
Use the Estimate saves the estimate. The Zero line then reads Estimated until you confirm it with a group.
Not Now closes the page.
I Zeroed with This Load, "For a scope you dialed onto (load). Your other loads keep where they hit against it." This load becomes the load the rifle is zeroed with, and the rifle's other loads keep where they hit against it.

The estimate page (example numbers): Estimate: 85 gr hits 0.06 MIL high at 50 yd, the caution under it, Confirm with 3 Shots, Use the Estimate, Not Now, and I Zeroed with This Load with its footer.

Measure with a Group. The page lists two steps: leave the turrets where they are and, from a solid rest, fire 3 rounds of the load at the zero distance, aimed at the point you zeroed on; then measure from the aim point to the center of the group. Under Group Center, enter Distance, pick the Unit (inches or centimeters, MOA, or MIL), then set High or Low and Right or Left, each with its number. The result line reads "(load) hits (amount)", and when the scope can be dialed it adds "Or zero the scope on this load instead: …, and leave its offset at 0." Save keeps your zero and adds the offset to every hold with this load, at every range; fire one or two more rounds to confirm. Cancel closes the page without saving (when you came from the estimate page, it returns there). When there is an estimate, a line at the top repeats it, and a back arrow sits before Cancel. A locked rifle cannot save.

Measure with a Group, empty: Cancel and Save at the top, the estimate line, the two steps, and Group Center with Distance 50 yd, the in, MOA and MIL unit choice, High or Low, and Right or Left.

Measure with a Group filled in with example numbers (50 yd, inches, 0.8 Low, 0.3 Right): the result line 85 gr hits 0.44 MIL low, 0.17 MIL right, the note about what Save keeps, and how to dial the scope instead.

In the load editor. The same two ways are in the load's own Zero Offset card (§5.2): Measure with a Group, and Estimate from the Zero Load, a menu titled Which load is the rifle zeroed with?. Its Up and Right fields (in the turret's unit; up and right are positive) take a number by hand. A line under the card's title says how the offset was set: "Not set: this load solves on the rifle's zero.", "Estimated: …", "Measured with a group: …", "Entered: …", or "The rifle is zeroed with this load." On the load the rifle is zeroed with, the card offers only Measure with a Group (there is no Estimate from the Zero Load menu), and the fields stay at 0. The menu lists the loads the rifle could be zeroed with.

The Zero Offset card in the full load editor, after a saved group: the status line Measured with a group: 0.44 MIL low, 0.17 MIL right, Measure with a Group, Estimate from the Zero Load, and the Up and Right fields in MIL.

The Estimate from the Zero Load menu: Which load is the rifle zeroed with? and its one choice, 110 gr V-MAX (example).

The Zero Offset card of the load the rifle is zeroed with: The rifle is zeroed with this load, Measure with a Group, and Up and Right at 0.

Each load keeps its own offset for that rifle. Switching back to the load the rifle is zeroed with leaves its zero untouched, and every hold with a checked load allows for its offset at every range.

Navigation: Calculate tab → bench → the ammo's Zero line → Check; or Edit Rifle (§5.1) → Loads → (load) → Zero Offset

How-to: Zero a different load without burning a box of ammo (https://zimaballistics.com/how-to/zero-a-new-load/)

5.4 Zero modes — Day / Night Vision / IR Laser

Per-rifle Zero Mode profiles for optical, NVG-equipped, and IR-illuminator/designator setups. The default is Day Optic; each mode you add has a name, a vertical and horizontal POI offset from the day zero, and notes. On the bench the modes are the Night Gear part (§4.19): tap it to pick a mode or the day optic alone, or make one with New night gear, and the corrections summary shows the holds for the selected mode. The offsets are typed and shown in your turret's unit (MIL or MOA). Android has the same part. Zero modes are Pro; phones that already had them keep them free.

The New Night Gear page (the bench's New night gear card): the rifle, a name, the Elevation shift and Windage shift in the turret's unit (MOA here), and the picture strip starting with No picture. Save stays off until it has a name.

Navigation: Calculate tab → bench → Night Gear

5.5 6DOF aero-coefficient editor

The 6DOF Aero Data screen (a What is 6DOF? link, §4.17, explains the tables) holds the eight Mach-indexed aerodynamic-coefficient tables the 6DOF solver needs (Zero-Yaw Drag, Yaw-Dependent Drag, Lift Force (CLα), Pitching Moment, Roll Damping, Pitch Damping, Magnus Force, and Magnus Moment), laid out the way published sources print them, with typical ranges shown, CSV import, and Clear Data. No bundled bullet comes with this data, so enter it from a published source (for example Appendix A of McCoy's Modern Exterior Ballistics).

6DOF Aero Data for a bullet with no data: the What is 6DOF? link, a note on where to find the tables, and Enter Manually or Import CSV.

After Enter Manually: 0/8 tables populated with Import CSV, then the first table, Cd0 Zero-Yaw Drag, with its typical range and Add Data Point.

Further down the list: Yaw-Dependent Drag, Lift Force, Pitching Moment, Roll Damping and Pitch Damping, each with a No data tag, a typical range and Add Data Point.

One table with a data point row added: a Mach value, the coefficient, and the red minus that removes the row. The tag now reads 1 pts.

Navigation: Calculate tab → choose 6DOF → Enter 6DOF Aero Data (in the Cannot Calculate card); or My Armory → (rifle) → (load) → 6DOF Data (both platforms)

5.6 Vital-zone presets

16 built-in presets (8 big game, 4 varmint, 4 steel) define target vital-zone diameters that drive the Point Blank Range, Ethical Shot Distance, Shot Placement, Danger Space, and Zero Distance Explorer tools; sizes without a published source show "(estimate)".

The Vital Zone picker: a row of presets (6" Coyote, 9" Pronghorn, 10" Whitetail Deer and more to the right), and the Vital Zone Diameter box (here 8).

After tapping a preset: Vital Zone Diameter now reads 15 (the Elk preset).

Navigation: any tool that consumes a vital-zone size → Vital Zone picker

Add Load (Edit Rifle → Loads) is a choice: New Blank Load, or Copy from a Saved Load…, which lists every load on every rifle, grouped by rifle and searchable, each row with its bullet and weight, BC and drag model, muzzle velocity, cartridge, and rifle. The copy carries every data field (bullet, BC and drag model, velocity bands, measured drag curve, muzzle velocity, temperature sensitivity, powder, overall length, CBTO, 6DOF data, and notes), not the source's logs or range cards. It keeps the source's name unless the rifle already has a load with that name, and then becomes "Name (copy)", "Name (copy 2)", and so on. In the Armory, + → Add Ammo makes a new load for a rifle too.

Edit Rifle → Loads with the Add Load menu open: New Blank Load and Copy from a Saved Load….

Long-press a load row, or swipe it to the right, for:

Duplicate — "Name (copy)" on the same rifle, saved at once and opened in the load editor.
Rename — a prompt with just the name; a name another load on that rifle already has is refused while you type. A preferred load stays preferred when renamed.
Copy to Another Rifle… — lists your other rifles (a locked one is shown locked) and says where the copy went. Offered when you have more than one rifle.
Share — sends the load as a small file (Name.bcload) with a plain-text summary (name, cartridge, bullet, BC and drag model, muzzle velocity at its temperature, temperature sensitivity, powder, and notes) in your units. Opened on another phone, iPhone or Android, the file is checked first, its summary shown in that phone's units, and you pick the rifle it goes on; a file that is not a load, comes from a newer version, or carries a damaged value is refused with the reason.

A locked rifle's loads can be copied to another rifle or shared, but not duplicated or renamed in place. The same actions are on Android.

Share on a load: the system share sheet with the file Hornady_123gr_SST (Ballistics Calculator Load, 484 bytes), then Ballistics, More, Copy and Save to Files.

Navigation: Armory Suite → Roster → Rifle Profiles → touch and hold a rifle → Edit Rifle → Loads → long-press or swipe a load

5.8 Add a Rifle (guided setup)

+ in My Armory (Add Rifle, which opens the rifle catalog first: pick a model to start the setup on it, or tap Add Your Own), and Add a Rifle in the first-rifle offer (§2), open a guided setup, one short step at a time, with "Step N of 5", the step's title, a progress bar, and Back and Next at the bottom. Next waits until the step holds what a solve needs, and every empty number box shows a gray placeholder, required or optional (the barrel length).

The rifle catalog that Add Rifle opens first: Add Your Own at the top, then makers and models (AW, AX338, AXMC and so on), each with a + to start the setup on it, and Search makers and models.

Rifle — Auto-fill from Rifle Database at the top, then a name, the caliber through the cartridge picker (the whole Caliber row opens it, and a common twist is filled in when none is set), barrel length (optional), the twist rate, and its direction (Right or Left), and a Picture strip at the bottom.

Step 1 of 5, Rifle: Auto-fill from Rifle Database, the name and caliber, barrel length (optional), twist rate (required), Right or Left, and the picture strip. Cancel is at the top left; Next waits until the step is full.

The Select Caliber list opened from the Caliber row: Enter custom caliber..., then calibers grouped as Rimfire, Pistol and so on, each with its bore and a typical twist.

Step 1 filled in (name, .308 Winchester, a twist of 10): Next is now blue.

2. Bullet — Choose from Bullet Database (the load editor's own picker, its search starting with the caliber; a bullet's published BC and drag model come with it), or Type It In Instead: name, weight, diameter, drag model (G1 or G7), and BC. A bullet more than 0.003 in off a listed caliber's diameter (a .224 bullet in a .308 Win, picked or typed) holds Next with "Bullet diameter does not match the rifle caliber."; a caliber typed by hand is never held. Choosing another caliber clears a bullet already chosen, with its velocity.

Step 2 of 5, Bullet: Choose from Bullet Database or Type It In Instead.

Choose from Bullet Database: Choose Bullet, showing .308 bullets only, with Show Every Caliber, the list of bullets, and a search box that starts with the caliber.

A chosen bullet (Sierra MatchKing, 168 gr, G7 0.218) with Choose Another Bullet and Type It In Instead; Back and Next at the bottom.

Type It In Instead: Bullet Name, weight, diameter, length, the G1 / G7 switch and the Ballistic Coefficient.

3. Muzzle Velocity — typed, or a saved chrono string's average (flagged shots left out; the newest ten are offered), or shots typed in with Use the average. A comma groups thousands only when the whole speed is plausible (at most 5,000 fps): 2,800 is 2,800 fps, while 800,810 is two shots.

Step 3 of 5, Muzzle Velocity: the velocity box (required), the note about the ammunition box, and Chronograph Shots (fps).

Shots typed in (2640 2655 2660): Use the average: 2652 fps (3 shots).

4. Zero & Scope — starts at a 100 yd (100 m) zero, a 1.5 in sight height, and a quarter-MOA or 0.1 MIL click over nothing you typed; the turret reads MOA or MIL (MRAD).

Step 4 of 5, Zero & Scope: Zero Distance 100 yd, Sight Height 1.5 in, the MOA / MIL (MRAD) switch and a click value of 0.25 MOA.

5. Review — the Calculator's Rifle and Load summaries, then Save Rifle, or Save and Open Full Editor (the first-rifle offer has no full-editor button).

Step 5 of 5, Review: the rifle and load summaries, Save Rifle and Save and Open Full Editor. Back is at the bottom left.

Nothing is stored until Save: Cancel leaves nothing behind. Save names the load after its bullet (or Default) and makes it the rifle's preferred load; there is no limit on how many rifles you add (§24.5). The old blank New Rifle form is gone; the rifle editor only edits a saved rifle. Android has the same five steps.

Navigation: Armory tab → +

5.9 Picture shelves and the + catalogs

On every device (iPhone, iPad, and Android phone and tablet) the Armory is the same page of picture shelves, top to bottom: Loadouts, Rifles, Optics, Ammo, Suppressors, Rangefinders, Night Vision, and Devices (your weather meter, your chronograph, and the devices you connect). The iPad's old rifle list beside Tap a Rifle to Load is gone; the shelves replace it. Each shelf shows its name, how many it holds, and See All, over a row of cards that scrolls sideways. A card is the part's picture, its name, one line under it, and a status line: a green dot for a part that is on a rifle, zeroed, or connected, orange when something is left to do. A part says which rifle it is on, or that it is in the safe. A rifle's card shows the rifle alone; only a loadout's card shows it dressed with its gear. An empty shelf shows a New … card where its first one is made.

Tap a card. A loadout goes on the bench and the app goes to Calculate; its clock icon, or touching and holding it, opens its Cards & History (§4.20), and holding also offers Share Build and Delete. Any other card opens its page in the Armory, and holding it lists Use on Bench, Edit, Share (Share Rifle on a rifle), and, for a rifle that is not locked, Delete Rifle.

Touch and hold an ammo card: Use on Bench, Edit and Share.

Touch and hold a loadout card: Cards & History, Share Build and Delete.

Every + opens that kind's catalog first. The + at the top of the Armory is a menu: New Loadout (an empty bench to put one together, §4.20), Add Rifle, Add Optic, Add Ammo, Add Suppressor, Add Rangefinder, Add Handheld Rangefinder, Add Night Gear (its catalog is titled Night Vision), Add Weather Meter, and Add Chronograph; below a divider, Add a Shared Build (a friend's build or part by QR code, link, or file, §20.9) and Add Gear with Your AI (§5.10). Each shelf's See All has the same + for its own kind, and so do the bench's New cards (§4.19). Pick a model in the catalog and that kind's Add page opens already filled in (for a rifle, the guided Add a Rifle, §5.8, starts on that model), or tap Add Your Own for a blank one. Ammo has no catalog, so its + opens the Add page directly. Save on an Add page puts the part in the Armory; from the bench's New card it also puts the part on the bench and returns there. Wherever the app asks you to pick a rifle (a tool's rifle list, the Calculator's rifle picker) the rifles are still a plain list.

The + menu: New Loadout, Add Rifle, Add Optic, Add Ammo, Add Suppressor, Add Rangefinder, Add Handheld Rangefinder, Add Night Gear, Add Weather Meter and Add Chronograph.

The bottom of the + menu: Add Chronograph, a divider, then Add a Shared Build and Add Gear with Your AI.

See All on the Loadouts shelf: every loadout as a wide card, with the + at the top right.

See All on the Ammo shelf: the ammo cards, a Cartridge Database row (152 cartridges, See All), then the cartridges. The + at the top right opens New Load directly.

Ammo has no catalog: its + opens the New Load page directly. It holds the rifle it goes on, a name, a bullet name, weight, the G1 / G7 switch, BC and muzzle velocity; Save stays off until the required boxes are filled.

The optic catalog: Add Your Own, then makers (AGM, then the rest) with each model and a + to add it.

The suppressor catalog: Add Your Own, then makers (A-TEC and the rest) with each model and a +.

The New Suppressor page: a name, length (optional), Elevation shift and Windage shift, and the Short can / Medium can / Large bore can picture strip.

The rangefinder catalog: Add Your Own, then makers (ATN, SIG Sauer and the rest) with each model.

The handheld rangefinder catalog: Add Your Own, then makers (Bushnell and the rest) with each model.

The Night Vision catalog (opened from Add Night Gear): Add Your Own, then makers (ACTinBlack, AGM and the rest) with each model.

Navigation: Armory tab

5.10 Add Gear with Your AI

Tell the AI assistant you already use about your exact rifle, optic, ammunition, and suppressor, and it writes a gear file; the app checks every field and adds it to My Armory as your own data. The app itself sends nothing to any AI: you carry the text both ways. It needs Pro (or the 7-day free trial, §24.5); without it, the menu item opens the upgrade screen. Both phones.

Armory → + → Add Gear with Your AI.

Add Gear with Your AI: the one-paragraph explanation, Copy Instructions under For Your AI, and under Your AI's Gear File a gray Paste (nothing to paste yet) and Choose File. Done is at the top right.

2. Under For Your AI, tap Copy Instructions (the button then reads Copied). Paste them into a new chat with your AI and answer its questions. The instructions are written in the app's language.

After Copy Instructions the button reads Copied and Paste turns blue.

3. Under Your AI's Gear File, tap Paste to paste its answer, or Choose File to pick the file it made. 4. A file that passes opens Your Gear File, marked Your Own Data: "Your AI wrote this file from what you told it. Nothing in it comes from the app's catalog. Check every number against the box, the maker's page or your chronograph before you shoot with it." Add to My Armory adds it, and the rifle, loads, suppressor, and night gear it makes carry a note in their Notes that they came from your AI and are not catalog data.

Your Gear File: marked Your Own Data with the warning to check every number, the rifle, optic, load, suppressor and zero it holds, and Add to My Armory at the bottom.

5. A file that fails is refused under Not Added in one sentence that names the field. Copy for Your AI copies a line to paste back into the same chat, so the AI fixes the file and sends it again.

A file that fails: Not Added with the one-sentence reason, and Copy for Your AI to paste back into the same chat.

A gear file is checked strictly: every value the app would otherwise fill in must be there, a field the format does not have is refused, and nothing is guessed. It is the same kind of file that Share a build uses (§20.9), marked as written by an AI.

Navigation: Armory tab → + → Add Gear with Your AI

6. Databases

The databases live in two More sections: Rifles & Gear (the Bullet, Cartridge, Pellet, and Barrel/Twist databases, the Target Library, the Reticle Library, and Custom Reticles) and Reference & Practice (Measured Drag Curves, Custom Drag Curves, and the Drag Curve Visual Editor; at the Standard App Level, §2, these three rows are not listed in More and appear only at Advanced and in search, marked "Advanced level"). The databases, the Target Library, and the Reticle Library are free to look through, and importing and editing in them need Pro; Custom Reticles and the three drag-curve tools are Pro. Catalog data is display/lookup only — it never modifies your saved profiles. Bullet, cartridge, and reticle data update over the air (§21.9).

More, Rifles & Gear section at the Advanced App Level: Armory Suite, My Armory, Bullet Database, Cartridge Database, Reticle Library, Bluetooth Devices, Chronograph Session and Ammo.

The end of the same section: Suppressor, Target Library, Pellet Database, Barrel/Twist Database and Custom Reticles.

More, Reference & Practice section at the Advanced App Level: Wind Guide, Wind Training, Range Training, Recoil Calculator, Muzzle Blast / Noise Estimate, Measured Drag Curves, Custom Drag Curves and Drag Curve Visual Editor.

The end of Reference & Practice: Measured Drag Curves, Custom Drag Curves, Drag Curve Visual Editor, DSF Library (Drop Scale Factor) and SDF Table (Speed-Dial Factor).

Search and Sort. Every catalog list and picker (the bullet, cartridge, pellet, and barrel/twist databases, the load editor's bullet picker, the caliber picker, the scope brand, model, and reticle pickers, the Reticle Library, and the Reticle Simulator's reticle picker) takes several words in any order, and every word typed must be found: "sierra 308", "175 gr sierra", "smk 175", "leupold mark 5", "mil ffp". Case and accents do not matter, a decimal comma reads as a point, a number is a whole number ("5" finds a Mark 5HD, not a 4.5-18x52), punctuation may be left out ("556", "3006", "mark5"), "mk" reads as Mark and "smk" as Sierra MatchKing, and a phrase in quotes is matched as a phrase. The bullet catalog reads a cartridge typed as words ("308 win", "300 win mag") as every maker's bullets of that diameter. Typing a maker and model into the scope Brand picker lists the matching scopes of every maker. Each of these lists except the Pellet Database has a Sort menu in the toolbar (Default, Name, Brand, Caliber, Weight, Ballistic Coefficient, Magnification, Unit, or Focal Plane, as fit the list; BC sorts G7 numbers first, then G1); Default is the list's own order, and the choice is remembered per list on this phone. Android searches and sorts the same way.

The Sort menu of the Bullet Database: Default (checked), Name, Brand, Caliber, Weight and Ballistic Coefficient.

The Sort menu of the Barrel/Twist Database: Default, Name, Brand and Caliber.

6.1 Bullet Database

A searchable reference of more than 3,700 production bullets (3,719 in the bundled data, which updates over the air) with manufacturer-published data: manufacturer, product line, caliber, weight, diameter, BC (G1 and/or G7), and sectional density. U.S. military rounds are included, and an entry with no published BC shows "No BC". Search matches maker, caliber, name, type, and weight (try "77gr" or "175"), including caliber and model aliases ("5.56" finds .224), and a decimal comma works. Caliber and Manufacturer pickers narrow the list, and a provenance dot on each entry shows where its BC came from (Manufacturer — verified green, Manufacturer — sourced blue, Your numbers yellow, or Unverified gray; the key is the BC source key row on the list and What do the colors mean? on the detail screen). Tap a row to apply the bullet's weight, drag model, and BC to the Calculator (it asks Where should this go?: Save to (the load), New Load…, or Just this solve (What-if), §4.1); the (i) button opens details (a sheet that closes by swiping down) with Apply to Calculator and Override With My Values / Edit My Values. Your overrides stay attached to the right bullet through every future update. The import button in the toolbar (a tray with an arrow; a padlock without Pro) opens Import BC Overrides (Choose CSV File, Download Template CSV, and Export My Overrides, which writes the same CSV the import reads, linked drag curves included), and you can link a custom or measured drag curve to a bullet in one step.

The Bullet Database: the Caliber and Manufacturer pickers, the BC source key row, the bullet count (3,719), a row for each bullet with its provenance dot, maker, type, weight, caliber and BC, the (i) button on each row, and the search field at the bottom. The toolbar holds Sort, the CSV import button and a menu with Show Tutorial.

Search with several words in any order: "smk 175" finds the four Sierra 175-grain MatchKing bullets. The dots show where each BC came from.

Searching "Scenar 77": an entry with no published BC shows an orange "No BC" (the third row), next to the entries that have a G7 BC.

The Caliber picker narrows the list to one bore size (.172, .204, .222 and on down the list).

Tap a row and the app asks Where should this go?: Save to (the load), New Load..., or Just this solve (What-if).

The (i) detail screen of a bullet: specifications, both ballistic coefficients, and the BC Source with its link to the maker's page.

The foot of the detail screen: Apply to Calculator and Override With My Values.

Override With My Values opens Edit Bullet: the maker's data is read-only, your G1 BC, G7 BC, weight and length go under Your Values (blank falls back to the bundled value), and Default Drag Curve has a Link button for a custom or measured curve.

The CSV import button opens Import BC Overrides: Choose CSV File, Download Template CSV and Export My Overrides, with the required bulletId column and the template headers.

Shotgun slugs (both phones). Six shotgun slugs are in the catalog: Hornady (SST in 12 and 20 gauge, Custom Lite FTX, American Whitetail InterLock) and Remington (Premier AccuTip Sabot, 12 and 20 gauge). A slug's detail screen has a Shotgun Slug section with its Construction (Sabot or Full Bore), the Maker's Test Barrel when the maker states one, a Maker's Load row for each of the maker's products that fires it (item number and muzzle speed), and a note: the BC is the maker's G1 number, checked against the maker's own table to the distance shown (200 yd or 125 yd for the six today) and not beyond, and slug speed varies a lot from barrel to barrel, so chronograph your own gun. The same note appears in the load editor when you pick a slug.

A shotgun slug's detail screen (Hornady SST Slug, 12 gauge): the Shotgun Slug section shows Construction (Sabot), the Maker's Load row with its item number and muzzle speed, and the note about the BC check distance and chronographing your own gun.

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Bullet Database

6.2 Pellet Database

A dedicated database of 671 airgun pellets and slugs: manufacturer, name, caliber (.177, .20, .22, .25, .30, .357, .45, and .50), weight, type (dome, wadcutter, pointed, hollow point, polymer, or slug), and a G1 BC. Every BC is labeled approximate and retailer-listed.

The Pellet Database: Caliber and Manufacturer pickers, pellets grouped by maker, each row with its type chip, weight, caliber and an approximate G1 BC, and the search field.

The Caliber picker lists the eight airgun calibers: .177, .20, .22, .25, .30, .357, .45 and .50.

A pellet's detail sheet: caliber, weight, type and the G1 BC, marked "Approximate, retailer-listed BC."

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Pellet Database

6.3 Cartridge Database

152 cartridges across 11 categories with bullet diameter, year introduced, parent case, maximum pressure (psi or bar), common twist rates, typical velocity, and common barrel lengths. Used for quick reference when setting up a new profile.

The Cartridge Database: 152 cartridges, each with its picture, category chip, bullet diameter, twist, typical velocity and year introduced. The Category picker, Sort button and search field sit around the list.

The Category picker: All Categories, Rimfire, Pistol, Varmint, Intermediate, Short Action, Long Action, Magnum, Long Range, Big Bore, Wildcat and Military.

A cartridge's detail sheet (6.5 SAUM): bullet diameter, year introduced, parent case, maximum pressure, common twist rates, typical velocity and common barrel lengths.

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Cartridge Database

6.4 Measured Drag Curves

Radar-measured Cd-vs-Mach curves (Lapua Doppler): 92 curves, and 89 of the catalog's bullets link to one. More accurate than any single-G-function BC approximation, particularly in the transonic zone. When a measured curve is selected as the drag model, no BC value is needed. Use in Calculator applies a curve (asking where it should go, §4.1) and Link to Bullet Override attaches it to a bullet; the bullet's detail screen has Apply Doppler Curve to Calculator. To build your own measured curve from downrange velocities, see §19.5. Pro.

Measured Drag Curves: the Lapua Doppler curves grouped by caliber, each with its point count, and a search field.

A curve's detail sheet (Scenar 77gr .224): the Cd-versus-Mach chart with the transonic band shaded, and the table of Doppler data points.

The foot of the detail sheet: Use in Calculator and Link to Bullet Override.

Use in Calculator asks Where should this go? first, the same three choices as the bullet list.

Link to Bullet Override opens Link Curve to Bullet: the bullets this curve fits, with a search field.

A bullet that has a measured curve (Lapua Scenar 90gr .243) shows a Radar-Measured Drag Curve section in the Bullet Database detail screen, with Apply Doppler Curve to Calculator.

Navigation: More → Reference & Practice → Measured Drag Curves

6.5 Custom Drag Curves

Define a bullet-specific Cd-vs-Mach drag curve instead of a G-function approximation. Give the curve a name and paste Mach, Cd pairs, one per line (at least five valid lines), then tap Import CSV. Below the import, a note reads "Have a Doppler export from another radar? Send us the file and we'll add support for it within a week," with an Email the File button. Pro.

Custom Drag Curves with no curves yet: the Import form (Curve Name, a box for Mach, Cd pairs, Import CSV) and, under it, the note about sending a Doppler export, with the Email the File button.

The form filled in: a curve name and six Mach, Cd lines; Import CSV turns blue once the lines are valid.

After Import CSV the curve appears under Imported Curves with its point count and source.

Selecting an imported curve shows its Standard Models - Form Factors (average G1 and G7 form factor), its Mach, Cd table and Use in Calculator.

Navigation: More → Reference & Practice → Custom Drag Curves

6.6 Drag Curve Visual Editor

A live chart with draggable Cd/Mach handles (More lists the tool as Drag Curve Visual Editor; the screen's own title reads Visual Drag Editor). Drag any handle to reshape the curve at that Mach number; the solver immediately uses the modified curve. Start from a G1, G7, or flat template, add points with + Point, and Save. The iPhone also has Import JSON and Export JSON here; on Android the chart editor is a switch inside Custom Drag Curves.

The Visual Drag Editor: Curve Name, the chart with a draggable handle on each point, the G1 / G7 / Flat / + Point buttons, the Mach and Cd table with a trash button on each row, Import JSON and Export JSON; Save is at the top right.

The G7 template loaded: the chart and table fill with the G7 standard curve.

The Flat template with one point added by + Point (Mach 0.400, Cd 0.3500): drag its handle or edit the numbers.

Export JSON opens the share sheet with the curve as a small JSON file: Copy and Save to Files.

After Save, the editor's curve is listed in Custom Drag Curves, marked Visual Editor, beside a CSV import.

Navigation: More → Reference & Practice → Drag Curve Visual Editor

6.7 Barrel / Twist Database

Factory-specified twist rates and barrel lengths for 151 rifles by manufacturer and model. Auto-fill into the rifle editor to populate twist rate when you know your exact rifle.

The Barrel/Twist Database: maker chips across the top, each rifle with its caliber, barrel length and twist, the Sort button, and the search field.

The same list inside the rifle editor: Auto-fill from Rifle Database (the button in Add a Rifle, step 1) opens Select Rifle, and tapping a rifle fills in its caliber, barrel and twist.

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Barrel/Twist Database

6.8 Target Library

Built-in targets for the Reticle Simulator: game animals, steel plates, humanoid silhouettes, and paper targets (IPSC cardboard, and NRA SR-1, MR-1, LR, and B-8 with scoring rings; the B-8 repair center is drawn at its true 10.5-inch size), plus your own targets: tap + to import one from a photo with its real dimensions, and the list and preview show your photo. Filter by All, Humanoid, Steel Plate, Game Animal, Paper Target, or Custom (the Custom filter shows once you have added a target of your own). A Range for Angular Size field drives the angular-size column.

The Target Library: filter chips (All, Humanoid, Steel Plate, Game Animal, Paper Target), the Range for Angular Size field, and the 32 targets, each with its size and angular size in mils at that range; the + button is at the top right.

The Paper Target filter: the NRA B-8 Repair Center (10.5 x 10.5 inches) and the SR-1, MR-1 and LR targets.

A target's page (NRA B-8 Repair Center): the preview with a Scoring Rings switch, its true size and vital zone, and the ring diameters.

The + button opens Import Custom Target: Select Target Image, a name and the real width and height in inches, notes, and Save Target.

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Target Library

7. Analysis Tools

The analysis tools are found in More's Logs & Analysis, Zero & Truing, Hunting, Reference & Practice, Reloading, and Shoot sections (each tool's path is given with it). Most read from the currently loaded profile and last solve but also accept manual input for standalone use. The Analysis Suite holds most of them (their rows are marked In Analysis Suite). Point Blank Range, Effective Range, and the Recoil Calculator are free; the rest follow the free plan (§24.5): a tool that works on a rifle is free on the sample rifles and needs Pro for your own, a tool that calculates no rifle is free, and the tools that work on numbers of your own (Ethical Shot Distance, Moving Target, Cd Measurement, Muzzle Blast, Barrel Harmonics, Load Development, Chrono String Statistics, and the drag-curve tools) need Pro. A tool that solves your Calculator load follows the Calculator's Coriolis setting: with Coriolis on and no latitude or azimuth, it refuses to run and says why.

More, Logs & Analysis section at the Advanced App Level: Analysis Suite, Shot Log, Group MOA Calculator, Shot Group Analyzer, Shot Book, Sniper / Precision DOPE Book, Rifle Data Book, Shot Analysis and Load / Trajectory Comparison.

The rest of Logs & Analysis: Shot Analysis, Load / Trajectory Comparison, Multi-Rifle Drop Table, 3D Trajectory Visualization, DOPE Trend Analysis, Hit Probability (WEZ), Danger Space Calculator and Multi-Target Solver, with a Related group below.

7.1 3D Trajectory Visualization

A three-dimensional rendered view of the bullet's flight path showing both vertical drop and lateral wind deflection in 3D space, color-coded by velocity regime, with free camera orbit, pinch-zoom, a four-way pan pad with a recenter button , auto-orbit , a play button that animates the bullet along its path , a terrain toggle (hills, trees, and deer) , and a ground plane with distance markers. Tap a point on the path to read a data card, scrub along the range, pick a rifle, press Compare to overlay a second rifle , and share a screenshot .

The 3D Trajectory screen before a solve: the rifle picker (6.5 CM Match) and the Visualize in 3D button.

The 3D view: the toolbar icons at the top right and the control row below them (play, auto-orbit, terrain, share, reset camera), the stats chips (Range, Wind, Impact Vel, Drop, TOF), the pan pad at the left, the windsock, the ground plane and the velocity-colored path with the scrubber and the Supersonic / Transonic / Subsonic key below.

Tap a point on the path or drag the scrubber and a data card opens: velocity, energy, Mach, stability, drop, wind drift and time of flight at that range (475 yd here).

The same view with the terrain toggle off: the hills, trees and deer are gone and the path and windsocks remain.

The rifle picker in the 3D toolbar lists the saved rifles; the checkmark shows the active one.

The Compare menu: No comparison, or any other saved rifle to overlay.

Compare on: the second rifle's path runs in magenta, and the data card shows both rifles' numbers (the second set in magenta with the difference).

Windsocks. Striped orange-and-white windsocks stand along the range and show the wind the trajectory was solved in: one in the middle of each Near, Mid, and Far zone, one at each wind set at a range, or three down the range for a single wind. Each points downwind, stands out further the harder the wind blows (hanging at 0, straight out at 15 mph and above), and carries its speed, or "No wind" over a hanging sock; faint streaks drift across each zone the way the wind blows. A Wind chip in the stats row, or a tap on any sock, opens a legend ("Wind 10 mph from 3 o'clock", one line per zone). Speeds follow the Metric setting.

The Wind chip opens the wind legend: Wind 10 mph from 3 o'clock, with a close button.

Navigation: More → Logs & Analysis → 3D Trajectory Visualization (also from Calculate → 3D View)

7.2 Hit Probability (WEZ)

A Monte-Carlo simulation of your active load that computes the probability your bullet hits a target of a given width and height at a given range. Inputs: the target, a baseline (muzzle velocity, wind speed, wind direction), the variation to simulate (MV SD, wind-estimation error, and range-estimation error, each at one standard deviation), and the number of iterations (500 to 5,000). Outputs: the hit probability, hits out of total, the mean miss, the 50th percentile miss radius (CEP), the 90th and 95th percentile radii, and an impact cloud.

WEZ / Hit Probability inputs: the target (Width, Height, Range), the baseline conditions (muzzle velocity, wind speed, wind direction) and the input variation at one standard deviation (MV SD, wind estimation error, range estimation error).

The Simulation chips (500, 1,000, 2,000, 5,000 iterations) and the Run Simulation button.

Results after a run: Hit Probability 99.3%, Hits / Total 993 / 1,000, and the Miss Distance Statistics (Mean Miss, 50th Percentile (CEP), 90th and 95th Percentile).

The Impact Cloud: the target in orange, one dot per simulated shot and a circle at the 90th percentile.

When to use: Comparing whether a target is realistically hittable under your real-world error budget.

Navigation: More → Logs & Analysis → Hit Probability (WEZ)

7.3 DOPE Trend Analysis

Compares predicted trajectory data against the actual impacts you log to reveal systematic drift (MV decay, scope-tracking degradation, spin-drift bias). On the iPhone it reads your DOPE Book entries (with an Open DOPE Book button if there are none); on Android it reads the Shot Log. It charts the difference between actual and predicted (in MOA) for elevation and windage, with filters for rifle, load, and time range (30 days, 90 days, or all time), an x-axis of round number or date, and a trend line; the summary gives the average differences, trends, correlations, and the number of shots logged, with a plain-language interpretation, and it warns when loads are pooled.

With no DOPE entries logged: the filters (All Rifles, All Loads, 30 Days, 90 Days, All Time, Round # / Date, Trend), the "No DOPE Entries" message and the Open DOPE Book button.

Open DOPE Book opens the empty DOPE Book, with its Min and Max range filter and the + button to add an entry.

With five sample entries logged: the Delta MOA (Actual - Predicted) chart with elevation and windage points and trend lines.

The Summary cards (average elevation and wind difference, trends, correlations, shots logged) and the plain-language Interpretation.

Navigation: More → Logs & Analysis → DOPE Trend Analysis

7.4 Terminal Ballistics

Evaluates terminal performance at a distance for 7 bullet types (FMJ pointed, FMJ round nose, soft point, hollow point, bonded, monolithic, and match/OTM). Use Calculator Load solves your Calculator's load with the app's own solver at the range you choose (1 to 2,000 yd or m) and fills in the impact speed, weight, diameter, and bullet type (taken from the loaded bullet's catalog type: soft point, hollow point, bonded, monolithic, match, pointed or round-nose FMJ; a type the catalog does not state, such as a VLD, leaves your choice alone), showing the impact speed and energy at that range; or type the bullet's weight, impact velocity, diameter, and type yourself. Results: energy and momentum; an Expansion check against the minimum expansion speed your bullet's maker publishes (type it in, or let Use Calculator Load fill it for the few bullets whose maker publishes one, with a line naming whose figure it is: Nosler's AccuBond at 1,800 fps and AccuBond Long Range at 1,300 fps, and Berger's hunting bullets at 1,800 fps, from the makers' own pages; a figure you typed is never overwritten, and a figure a fill left is cleared when the next bullet has none; the screen says whether the load is above or below it and by how much); Advanced Metrics (Taylor KO factor, sectional density, optimum game weight, and Hatcher's relative stopping power); and a wound-channel estimate by bullet type with a velocity class (high at 2,000 fps and up, moderate from 1,000 to 2,000, low below 1,000).

Terminal Ballistics before anything is typed: the Calculator Load line, Range, Use Calculator Load, and the Bullet Parameters (weight, impact velocity, diameter, bullet type).

After Use Calculator Load at 400 yd: the bullet fields are filled (140 gr, 2,147 fps, 0.264 in, Soft Point) and Energy & Momentum show.

Further down: the Expansion minimum, Advanced Metrics (Taylor KO Factor, Sectional Density, Opt. Game Weight, Hatcher's RSP) and the Wound Channel Estimate for the bullet type.

Navigation: More → Hunting → Terminal Ballistics

7.5 Load / Trajectory Comparison

Compares two loads side by side with a synchronized drop table, a color-coded delta column, and an overlay chart with transonic markers. Each side is a load you type in, or a saved rifle and load: under Load A and Load B, a Rifle A / Rifle B picker lists your rifles (Manual first, which keeps the typed form), and picking a rifle offers its loads. A saved load is compared as it is shot, through the Calculator's own loading (its sight height, zero and zero weather, cold bore, an attached suppressor's shift, and its drag curve or BC bands), under the screen's weather and wind; one that cannot be is refused with the reason. With two saved loads, spin drift and aerodynamic jump are in the windage; with a typed side, both sides go without them and the footer says so. Android compares the same way.

Load Comparison, Load A: Rifle A picker (Manual), Choose from Bullet Database, and the typed Label, Muzzle Velocity, BC, Drag Model, Bullet Weight and Zero Range. Load B follows below.

The Rifle A picker lists Manual first, then the saved rifles.

After picking a saved rifle, the Load A picker lists its loads.

Two saved loads chosen (6.5 CM Match and .308 Precision), with the Atmosphere & Target section and the Compare button.

The Table view: range, drop for each load, the color-coded difference column and the wind columns.

The same table scrolled to the right: wind, velocity for each load, velocity difference and energy for each load.

The Chart view: both drops against range, with the legend naming the two loads.

When to use: Deciding between two bullet weights, a factory load vs. a handload, or evaluating a BC change.

Navigation: More → Logs & Analysis → Load / Trajectory Comparison

7.6 Multi-Rifle Drop Table

A side-by-side trajectory comparison for 2–4 rifle/load combinations under the same atmosphere and wind. Each selection is color-coded; the table shows a shared range column with per-rifle elevation, windage, and velocity sub-columns. Each rifle uses your saved zero and cold-bore corrections the same way the Calculator does.

Multi-Rifle Drop Table with nothing selected: "No rifles selected", the Add button and the "Select 2-4 rifles to compare" hint.

Add opens Select Rifle & Load, with a checkmark on each load already picked and a Done button.

Three rifle/load combinations selected, each with its color dot and a remove button, and the Compare button.

The table: a shared Range column and, for each rifle, Elev, Wind and Vel columns.

The table scrolled right to the third rifle's columns.

Navigation: More → Logs & Analysis → Multi-Rifle Drop Table

7.7 BC Back-Calculator

Reverse-engineers ballistic coefficient from observed impacts. Enter the current projectile (BC, weight, drag model, muzzle velocity, zero range), the atmosphere (temperature, station pressure, altitude; humidity is fixed at 50%), and the observed drop at a measured range; the tool searches for the BC that produces the observed drop and shows the original BC, the corrected BC, and the difference. Standalone — nothing changes until you tap Apply to Calculator (which asks Where should this go?, §4.1; or Copy BC to Clipboard when the tool is opened on its own). Choose from Bullet Database, above the typed fields, fills the bullet's weight, diameter, length, and drag model with the BC its maker publishes for it (switching the model re-pairs to the maker's other number); the muzzle velocity and zero stay yours.

BC Back-Calculator at the start: Choose from Bullet Database, the projectile fields (BC, weight, drag model, muzzle velocity, zero range) and the atmosphere fields. The red line asks for a BC greater than 0.

Choose from Bullet Database opens the Choose Bullet list with a Cancel button.

After picking a Sierra MatchKing: the BC (0.243), weight, drag model, muzzle velocity and zero range are filled in, and the Observed Field Data follows.

The Atmospheric Conditions note, the Observed Field Data (drop 40 in at 500 yd) and the Back-Calculate BC button.

A drop that no BC can produce at that range: the orange No Result message with a Report button.

A real result (63 in at 500 yd): Original BC 0.2430, Corrected BC 0.2573, Difference +0.0143 (+5.9%), with Apply to Calculator and Copy BC to Clipboard.

Apply to Calculator asks Where should this go?: Save to the load, New Load..., or Just this solve (What-if).

When to use: Converting ladder-test impacts directly into a usable BC with no manual iteration.

Navigation: More → Zero & Truing → BC Back-Calculator

7.8 Cd Measurement (Two-Chrono BC)

A two-chronograph method for measuring a bullet's actual average drag coefficient in flight — the most accurate method short of Doppler radar. Enter the projectile (weight, diameter, drag model, reference BC) and the chronograph data (muzzle velocity, downrange velocity, and the separation distance); the tool solves for the Cd that produces the observed downrange velocity and shows the measured BC, the velocity retention, the theoretical retention, and the BC difference. Share Results Summary shares a text with the equivalent G1 and G7 BC, the Mach number, and the velocity and energy loss.

Cd Measurement: the projectile (weight, diameter, drag model, reference BC), the Chronograph Data (muzzle velocity, downrange velocity, chrono separation) and the Calculate button.

Computed BC: Measured BC (G7) 0.2015, Velocity Retention 91.5%, Theoretical Retention 93.0%, BC Difference, with Copy BC to Clipboard and Share Results Summary.

Share Results Summary opens the share sheet with the text "Drag coefficient measurement" (cancelled without sending).

Navigation: More → Zero & Truing → Cd Measurement (Two-Chrono BC)

7.9 DSF Library

The Drop Scale Factor library holds pre-computed DSF tables for your loaded bullet across density altitudes (a DA Step and Max DA you can edit; the defaults are 500 ft and 8,000 ft) for a comma-separated list of target ranges. The table has one row per density altitude (0 (std) first, then every DA Step up to Max DA) and one column per range; each cell is the scale factor alone, colored green within 5 percent of 1.0, yellow within 10 percent, and red beyond that, with N/A where the trajectory does not reach that range (a value above 1.0 means more drop than standard). Export CSV saves the table. With manual input, Choose from Bullet Database above the typed fields fills the bullet as in §7.7.

DSF Library: Manual Input off, the Profile and Load pickers, the Table Parameters (DA Step 500 ft, Max DA 8,000 ft, Target Ranges) and the Compute button.

The Drop Scale Factor table: density altitude down the side, ranges across, each cell green, yellow or red by how far it is from 1.0.

The table scrolled to the longer ranges.

The Incomplete Table notice: cells the trajectory does not reach show N/A.

Export CSV opens the share sheet with DSF Library.csv (cancelled without saving).

Manual Input on: Choose from Bullet Database and the typed BC, drag model, muzzle velocity, weight, diameter, zero range and sight height.

When to use: You've confirmed holds at one altitude and are shooting at a significantly different one — scale your dialed positions instead of re-solving.

Navigation: More → Reference & Practice → DSF Library

7.10 Effective Range Calculator

Computes the range at which a load becomes ineffective from an energy limit, an optional holdover limit, and a transonic limit (Mach 1.2) — whichever comes first. The result shows the Binding Constraint in large type. A load that already leaves the barrel below Mach 1.2 shows the transonic limit as Does not apply, with the load's muzzle Mach under it, instead of binding the answer at 0 yd. When no checked range passes, the result reads No range in red with the reason in numbers (for example "Muzzle energy 466 ft-lbs is below your 500 ft-lbs minimum."), and the energy and speed shown are the muzzle's own (Muzzle Energy, Muzzle Velocity); a range that passes shows in green. Presets are Deer (1,000 ft-lb, 30 MOA), Elk (1,500, 40), Varmint (500, 60), PRS (200, 120), and Custom; only Deer and Elk have published sources, and the screen marks the others as app defaults. Inputs include the zero range, sight height, and atmosphere. Free.

Effective Range Calculator: the Energy Threshold preset (Deer, 1000 ft-lbs / 30 MOA), Min Energy, the Max Holdover Limit switch and field, and the Load Data fields.

The Preset menu: Deer (1000 ft-lbs / 30 MOA), Elk (1500 / 40 MOA), Varmint (500 / 60 MOA), PRS (200 / 120 MOA) and Custom.

The Rifle fields (zero range, sight height), the Conditions and the Compute Effective Range button.

A result: Effective Range 600 yd in green, Binding Constraint Energy limit, Energy and Velocity at Range, and the Constraint Breakdown (energy, holdover and transonic limits).

After an input changes, an orange note says the result is out of date and to tap Compute again; the old result is dimmed.

A load below the energy limit: Effective Range shows No range in red with the reason, the muzzle energy and velocity, and the transonic limit reads Does not apply.

Navigation: More → Hunting → Effective Range Calculator

7.11 Point Blank Range (MPBR)

Answers "how far can I shoot without adjusting my hold, given a vital zone of X inches?" Under Vital Zone and Load Data it gives a Result (Max Point Blank Range, Near Zero, Far Zero) and an Explanation; there is no chart. Tap a preset chip (Coyote 6″, Pronghorn 9″, Whitetail Deer 10″, Black Bear 11″, or Elk 15″) to fill in the vital-zone size; sizes without a published source show "(estimate)". Free.

Point Blank Range: the Vital Zone presets (6" Coyote (estimate), 9" Pronghorn, 10" Whitetail Deer...), the Vital Zone Diameter, the Load Data and the Compute MPBR button.

The preset chips scrolled right: 10" Whitetail Deer, 11" Black Bear (estimate) and 15" Elk.

The Result: Max Point Blank Range 310 yd, Near Zero 19 yd, Far Zero 269 yd, and the plain-language Explanation.

Navigation: More → Hunting → Point Blank Range (MPBR)

7.12 Moving Target

Computes the required lead for a moving target from target speed, crossing angle, and bullet time of flight. Outputs lead in MOA, MIL, and linear distance.

Moving Target inputs: the speed chips, Target Speed, Crossing Angle with its slider, Range, Muzzle Velocity and Calculate Lead.

The speed chips: Walking (3 mph), Running (6), Vehicle (15) and Fast (30).

Results: Time of Flight, Target Travel, Required Lead, the Angular Lead in MOA and MIL, and the Hold text.

The Lead Diagram: the target and the hold point ahead of it.

Navigation: More → Hunting → Moving Target

7.13 Danger Space Calculator

Computes the range band over which the trajectory stays within a target's height — the Result reads Danger space (from and to, as a range) and Kill-zone depth, with a Trajectory chart and target-height band overlay.

Danger Space: the Target Height preset (Human Torso 18"), the projectile fields and the firearm fields.

The Preset menu: Human Torso (18"), Human Standing (72"), Deer Vital (10"), Prairie Dog (3") (estimate) and Custom.

The Result: Danger space 0 - 275 yd and Kill-zone depth 275 yards, and the Trajectory chart with the target-height band.

Navigation: More → Logs & Analysis → Danger Space Calculator

7.14 SDF Table

A Speed-Dial Factor table showing how dial positions change when atmospheric conditions differ from your zeroing conditions. Type a comma-separated list of ranges and your actual conditions (temperature, station pressure, humidity, altitude; the density altitude is computed); each row gives the standard drop, the actual drop, the SDF (actual divided by standard), and the difference, in MOA or MIL. Choose from Bullet Database, above the typed fields, fills the bullet as in §7.7. Exportable as CSV.

SDF Table: Choose from Bullet Database, the load data (MV, BC, drag model, bullet weight, zero range, sight height) and the Actual Conditions.

Actual Conditions (85 F, 24.90 inHg, 5,000 ft with the computed density altitude), the Ranges field and the Compute SDF Table button.

Results: range, standard MOA, actual MOA, the SDF and the difference in MOA, with status marks, and the Export CSV button.

Export CSV opens the share sheet with SDF Table.csv (cancelled without saving).

Navigation: More → Reference & Practice → SDF Table

7.15 Multi-Target Solver

Solves up to 20 targets simultaneously, each with its own label, range (−/+ 25 steps), and inclination (−90° to 90°). Tap Solve All for a concurrent solution; each row shows elevation, windage, speed, Mach, and a SUBSONIC or TRANSONIC flag, and after you edit anything the rows read "Stale — solve again". A collapsible Load & Conditions panel holds the load (use a rifle profile, or enter BC, MV, weight, diameter, length, zero, twist, barrel, and sight height by hand), the atmosphere, and the wind, and it follows the Calculator's Coriolis switch. Copy Results to Clipboard and Share / Export produce a plain-text table, and View as Picture opens the Multi-Target Scene (§7.21) on these targets with this screen's rifle, load, weather, and wind. Android has the same screen, Load & Conditions panel and export included; its Incline field stops at 89°, the steepest angle the solver takes.

Multi-Target Solver, the Load & Conditions panel: Use Rifle Profile on (the .308 Precision load), the Atmosphere and the Wind.

Use Rifle Profile off: BC Type, BC, muzzle velocity, weight, diameter, length, zero, twist, barrel length and sight height by hand. The orange note says to enter a BC before solving.

Targets (3/20): each row has its label, a range with - and + steppers, and an Incline field; then Add Target, Solve All and View as Picture.

After Solve All: each row shows elevation and windage in MIL and MOA, the speed and Mach, with Solve All, View as Picture, Copy Results to Clipboard and Share / Export below.

After a range is edited, the rows read "Stale - solve again".

A target at 1,100 yd shows the orange TRANSONIC flag.

Share / Export opens the share sheet with the text "Multi-Target Solution" (cancelled without sending).

Navigation: More → Logs & Analysis → Multi-Target Solver

7.16 Load Development Assistant

A two-mode tool for finding optimal powder charges, with a Ladder Test / Group Test switch at the top. Ladder Test builds its rows from a charge range (Generate Rows), takes each row's velocity, group (in your angular unit), and notes, marks a velocity node (three charges in a row, one charge step apart, whose speeds differ by under 15 fps; a row flagged P-Signs never counts) and flags a pressure spike (a rise of more than 50 fps over one charge step) with a red row and the words "Pressure spike near … gr". Group Test fits a quadratic curve to your charge / group pairs as you type them (it needs at least three pairs) and gives the optimal charge, only when it lies inside the charges fired, with the predicted group there; a curve that opens downward has no node and the screen says so. Android works the same way.

Load Development, Ladder Test selected: the Load Info (cartridge, bullet, powder) and Charge Range (start, end, increment) cards, and the Generate Rows button (dimmed until the range is filled).

The fields filled in (6.5 Creedmoor, 140 ELD-M, H4350, 40.0 to 42.0 grains in 0.5 steps): Generate Rows is now active.

Generate Rows builds the Shot Data table: one row per charge with its MV (fps), Group (MOA), a P-Signs switch and a Notes line.

The Velocity & Group Chart, with its Velocity, Node and Group legend, and the Export Summary button.

The Group Test mode: Load Info (Cartridge / Load) and an empty Group Data table (Charge and Group), with the hint "Enter at least three charge / group pairs to fit a curve."

Five charge / group pairs typed in; the + button adds a row.

The Group Size Chart and the answer: Optimal charge 40.96 gr (parabolic minimum), Predicted group 0.43 MOA, and the note about the quadratic least-squares fit.

Export Summary opens the share sheet with the text "Load Development - Group Test" (cancelled without sending).

Navigation: More → Reloading → Load Development Assistant

7.17 Barrel Harmonics / OCW Node

A data-driven tool for finding your barrel's optimal charge weight (OCW) node and the muzzle-exit oscillation point that yields the most consistent groups, from dwell time, group-center shift across the ladder, and chrono SD/ES data. It does not estimate barrel vibration frequency, and a node is only a candidate: it needs at least three adjacent charges inside the band, and the screen says to verify it at the range.

Barrel Harmonics: the Barrel Parameters (barrel length, bullet weight, reference MV, powder charge) and the Barrel Dwell Time (0.769 ms at 2,600 fps), with the note that the screen does not estimate vibration frequency.

The empty Velocity String (3-5 shots), the Group Center Shift vs Charge table and the Plateau Tolerance (0.25 MOA).

Five shots typed in: the screen shows Mean 2601, SD 2.1, ES 5 and "Excellent SD - suitable for node work".

Group-center shift typed for five charges (43.0 to 43.8 gr), with the Plateau Tolerance field and its note about three adjacent charges.

The Group Center Shift Chart and the answer: Flat spot from 43.40 to 43.80 gr, candidate node near 43.60 gr, marked as a candidate only to confirm at the range.

OCW Guidance: What is a barrel node?, How to find it, and the Limits of a one-axis reading, with the closing caution.

Navigation: More → Reloading → Barrel Harmonics / OCW Node

7.18 Recoil Calculator

Computes free-recoil velocity and energy from rifle weight, bullet weight, MV, and powder charge, with a subjective recoil rating and a two-load comparison mode.

Recoil Calculator: the Load fields (bullet weight, muzzle velocity, powder charge, gun weight), the Compare Two Loads switch, and the Results (Recoil Velocity 10.88 fps, Free Recoil Energy 15.6 ft-lbs, Rating Heavy).

Compare Two Loads on: the fields split into Load A and Load B.

The Comparison table: recoil velocity, energy and rating for each load, and the Delta in ft-lb.

Navigation: More → Reference & Practice → Recoil Calculator

7.19 Zero Shift Table

Re-solves the Calculator's load under today's conditions and shows, for each speed-dial or BDC setting (200 to 800 by default; add or remove settings) , the range at which that dial setting actually zeros. Columns are Dial, Actual Zero, the difference (Δ), and the drop at the dial setting; a dash means no trajectory crossed zero there.

Zero Shift Table: the Speed-Dial Settings (200 to 800 yd), a remove button on each, Add Setting and Compute Zero Shift Table.

The Results: Dial, Actual Zero, the difference (yd) and the Drop @ Dial for each setting.

A setting added (1,500 yd) and computed: it appears as one more row in the table.

Navigation: More → Zero & Truing → Zero Shift Table

7.20 Zero Distance Explorer

Answers "if I zero at X, where does each range land?" Type a zero distance (or drag the slider) and a target-style picture redraws at once: the point of aim at the center, the vital zone as a circle around it, and one green dot per range at its height above (up) or below (down) the point of aim, each labeled with its range. The dots are the band's From and To, every 25 yd (or 25 m) between them, and the zero distance itself, which is ringed and labeled Zero. With Show Group Circles on, each dot sits in a circle the size of your group at that range, so you can see how much of the group still lands inside the vital zone. The Impacts table under the picture lists every dot: the range, the impact above or below the point of aim, and whether it lands inside the target.

The target-style picture for a 100 yd zero: the vital zone as the orange circle, one green dot per range with its label, the zero ringed and marked Zero, a group circle at each range, and Share Chart below.

The Impacts table: each range, the impact above or below the point of aim, and whether it lands inside the target. The zero range is in bold.

The far zero. A short zero has a second one farther out, where the bullet comes back down through the line of sight. The picture marks it with a purple diamond on the point of aim, labeled with its range, and the line under the picture reads, for example, "Crosses the line of sight again at about 277 yd." The Impacts table carries that range as its own row, flagged with the diamond, and VoiceOver (TalkBack on Android) reads the same sentence. There is no diamond when the zero distance is itself the far crossing (the bullet has already peaked), or when the crossing lies past the farthest range the selected solver reaches.

A 25 yd zero: the purple diamond on the point of aim labeled with its range, and the line under the picture, "Crosses the line of sight again at about 242 yd." The pink hollow rings and their legend are the Compare Best Zero overlay (see below).

The Impacts table carries the far zero as its own row (242.2 yd), flagged with the purple diamond.

Share Chart, under the picture, makes a portrait image of the chart with a header: the Calculator's rifle and load, the zero distance, the range band, the vital zone, the group size, the largest miss, and the far-zero line. The image is always light on white, so it prints and reads the same on any phone, and it opens the share sheet. If the image cannot be made, the screen says so and offers Report.

Share Chart opens the share sheet with the chart image (cancelled without sending).

The inputs are the zero distance, the Range Band (From and To; 25 to 300 by default), the Target (the Coyote, Pronghorn, Whitetail Deer, Black Bear, and Elk preset chips, or a vital-zone diameter of your own), and your Group Size in your angular unit (it reads Group Size (MIL) when the unit is MIL; 2 MOA by default). Find Best Zero tries every whole-yard (or whole-meter) zero distance up to the band's end and lists the three that keep the largest miss over the band smallest, each with that largest miss; tap one to draw it. After Find Best Zero, the Compare Best Zero switch draws the best zero's own impacts as hollow pink rings behind your green dots, with the legend "Hollow rings: best zero 50 yd" and, under the table, "Largest miss: yours X, best Y"; Share Chart includes both lines. Changing anything the best zeros depend on clears the list and turns the comparison off. The answer holds only for this load, atmosphere, sight height, and range band.

The Range Band (From and To), the Target presets (6" Coyote, 9" Pronghorn, 10" Whitetail Deer and more to the right) with the Vital Zone Diameter, and the Group Size with the Show Group Circles switch.

Find Best Zero lists the three best zeros (242, 241 and 243 yd, each with its largest miss, 3.8 in); the Compare Best Zero switch is below, off.

Compare Best Zero on: the best zero's impacts are drawn as hollow pink rings behind the green dots, with the legend "Hollow rings: best zero 242 yd".

With the comparison on, the line under the table reads "Largest miss: yours 12.6", best 3.8"".

The zero distance can be anything from the shortest zero the solvers take to the farthest range the selected solver reaches. A distance outside that is refused with the exact limits, for example "Zero range must be between 1.1 and 20000 yards." (in metric, from 1 meter).

It solves the Calculator's own load and conditions with the Calculator's solver: the rifle, optic, and ammo on the bench and the Atmosphere card at the top of the Calculator are what it solves, and changing them there changes this too (the screen opens with editable Projectile, Firearm and Atmosphere cards, which are those same Calculator values, edited in place). The Calculator's zero distance is left alone, and the rifle is taken as zeroed today, in today's air, shot level, with no cant and no zero offset, so the bullet meets the point of aim at the zero distance (the screen says so when the Calculator has a cant, a shot angle, or a zero offset set); wind, spin drift, and the other corrections stay as the Calculator has them. Metric shows meters and centimeters. Free on the sample rifles and Pro on your own (§24.5); the Analysis Suite holds it.

The top of the screen: the Projectile and Firearm cards, which are the Calculator's own load and which you can edit here.

The Atmosphere card (presets, density altitude switch, altitude, temperature, pressure, humidity) that the screen solves with.

Navigation: More → Zero & Truing → Zero Distance Explorer (or More → Suites → Analysis → Zero Distance Explorer)

7.21 Multi-Target Scene

Up to 8 targets at their own ranges in one picture, each drawn at the angular size it has at its range, with your reticle over the picture and, on every target, the hold: where the reticle's aiming point goes so the shot lands on the target's center (for example "1.6 MIL up · 0.3 right", in your Angular Unit, with the clicks under it, "Clicks: 16 up · 3 left"). It shows holds only, never bullet holes. Use it for a qualification row of pop-up silhouettes, a steel line at mixed distances, or a posted range sheet.

The Multi-Target Scene (Leupold TMR at 25x, wind 10 mph from 90 degrees): three steel plates at 300, 500 and 700 yd with their holds, the reticle line at the top left, the zoom, Show All and the Labels, Hold Numbers and Wind chips below.

The Steel Line (200-600 yd) preset drawn: a 12 inch plate every 100 yd, each with its hold.

The Wind chip off: the holds show elevation only, and a note says "Wind is off: the holds show elevation only."

At a power other than the reference one, a yellow warning says subtensions are only correct at the reference magnification.

The holds come from the Calculator's current rifle, load, weather, and wind, or, when the Multi-Target Solver opened the scene with View as Picture, from that screen's. The zoom is the rifle's own scope: − and + change the power , the reticle line names the reticle, its unit, and the power, and Show All fits every target again; drag to see targets that do not fit at the lowest power. Chips switch Labels, Hold Numbers, and Wind on or off (with Wind off the holds are elevation only). Tap a target for its Hold and Turret figures and Aim Here. Targets (the toolbar) edits the list: presets (Rifle Qualification (50–300 m), the NATO E-type silhouette at 50 to 300 m; Steel Line (200–600 yd), a 12-inch plate every 100 yd; Match Stage (3 Mixed), 2/3 IPSC steel, a 10-inch and an 18-inch plate at 400, 550, and 800 yd), From a Range Sheet… (§10.6), Add Target, and for each target a short label, a range, and what hangs there (a Target Library target or a range-sheet shape at its size), listed left to right in the picture's order; a Reticle section picks the reticle. Share sends the picture once every target has its hold . The scene is kept on this phone. Free on the sample rifles and Pro on your own (§24.5); Android has the same screen.

Tap a target: its Hold (MIL, MOA), Turret (MIL, clicks), Drop, Wind Drift, Time of Flight, Velocity and Energy, and the Aim Here button.

After Aim Here: T2 is outlined and its hold label is highlighted in yellow.

The toolbar's ellipsis menu holds Report an Issue or Suggestion.

Targets: the four presets (Rifle Qualification, Steel Line, Match Stage, From a Range Sheet...), the target list (label, range, what hangs there), Add Target, and the Reticle section.

A target's type menu: head/shoulders, steel plates from 4 to 24 inches, 2/3 IPSC steel, Whitetail Deer, Mule Deer and Elk.

From a Range Sheet...: pick a sheet (1000 Yard Range) and switch on up to eight of its targets, then Use 7 Targets.

The Reticle picker: Favorites, then every reticle by group, with a search field.

Share opens the share sheet with the scene image (cancelled without sending).

Navigation: More → Shoot → Multi-Target Scene (also listed under Competition as Related; or Multi-Target Solver → View as Picture)

7.22 Wind Uncertainty

Shows how much wind a target forgives: for the Calculator's load and weather, how fast a wind from a given direction can blow before the bullet drifts off a target of the width you enter, with no wind hold dialed. Enter the Range, the Target Width, the Wind Speed, and the Wind Direction (a clock hour, with the target at 12 o'clock; it starts from the Calculator's range and first wind). The verdict reads GO (green, "Holding center, this wind still hits.") or NO-GO (red, "Holding center, this wind misses. Hold for it."), under it the Wind bracket ("0 –" and the fastest wind that still hits, or "over 50 mph" when even a wind that strong does not move the bullet off the target) and the deflection at the wind you entered. Holding center, any wind inside the bracket still hits; holding for the wind, your wind call can be off by that much and still hit. A chart, Deflection vs Wind Speed, draws the drift against wind speed over a green band for the target's half width, and Common Wind Conditions lists the safe wind for a 3 or 9 o'clock wind (full value), 2 or 10 (about 87 %), 1 or 11 (50 %), and 12 or 6 (head or tail wind). It re-solves with the Calculator's own solver as you type; with no load in the Calculator it says to set one up. Free, on both phones.

A 24 inch target at 400 yd in a 10 mph wind from 3 o'clock: the green GO verdict, the Wind bracket (0 - 12.6 mph) and the deflection at the wind entered.

A 6 inch target: the red NO-GO verdict and a bracket of 0 - 3.1 mph.

The Wind Direction menu: 1 to 12 o'clock, with 3 (full right), 6 (tailwind), 9 (full left) and 12 (headwind) named.

The Deflection vs Wind Speed chart (drift against wind speed over the green hit-zone band) and the Common Wind Conditions list with the safe wind for each clock position.

Navigation: More → Shoot → Wind Uncertainty

8. Verification & Truing

The verification and truing tools are in More's Zero & Truing section (Truing / Calibration, Chrono String Statistics, the BC Back-Calculator, Cold Bore Tracking, the Zero Shift Table, the MV Degradation Tracker, the Turret Tracking Test, the Scope Click Tracker, Cd Measurement, the Zero Distance Explorer, and the Sight-In Assistant) and in Logs & Analysis (Shot Analysis, the Shot Group Analyzer, and the Shot Book). Truing, the BC Back-Calculator, the Zero Shift Table, the MV Degradation Tracker, the Scope Click Tracker, the Zero Distance Explorer, and the Sight-In Assistant are free on the sample rifles and Pro on your own (§24.5). Chrono String Statistics and Cd Measurement are Pro. Cold Bore Tracking, the Turret Tracking Test, Shot Analysis, the Shot Group Analyzer, and the Shot Book calculate no rifle and are free. The Armory Suite holds most of them.

More, Zero & Truing section at the Advanced App Level: Sight-In Assistant, Zero Distance Explorer, Truing / Calibration, Chrono String Statistics (marked In Armory Suite), BC Back-Calculator, Cold Bore Tracking, Zero Shift Table, MV Degradation Tracker and the top of Turret Tracking Test.

The rest of Zero & Truing: MV Degradation Tracker, Turret Tracking Test, Scope Click Tracker and Cd Measurement (Two-Chrono BC, marked In Analysis Suite), then the Related group with Chronograph Session, Bluetooth Devices and Group MOA Calculator.

8.1 Truing / Calibration

Adjusts your ballistic model to match observed impacts via three methods, chosen under Truing Mode (the iPhone names them Muzzle Velocity, Ballistic Coefficient, and Drop Scale Factor; Android shows MV, BC, and DSF): MV truing (searches for the MV that produces an observed drop), BC truing (back-calculates BC when MV is chronograph-confirmed; it needs a standard drag model, so a load on a measured drag curve is refused with the reason), and Drop Scale Factor (DSF) truing (a multiplicative correction to the entire drop table). The screen shows Original, Trued, and Change; it does not change your load by itself, so apply the trued value yourself.

Truing / Calibration with Muzzle Velocity chosen: the Truing Mode card with its Method row, the Base Load Data card (drag model G7, MV 2700 fps, BC 0.315), the Observed Data card (range 500 yd, observed drop -100 in) and the Compute Trued Value button.

The Method menu under Truing Mode: Muzzle Velocity (checked), Ballistic Coefficient and Drop Scale Factor.

When no value fits the observed drop, a red message says no trued value converged and to check the range, drop sign and base load; a Report button sits under it.

Muzzle Velocity truing for a -58 in drop at 500 yd: Result shows Original MV 2700.000 fps, Trued MV 2588.975 fps and Change -4.1%.

Ballistic Coefficient truing for the same observation: Original BC 0.315, Trued BC 0.234 and Change -25.6%.

Drop Scale Factor truing for the same observation: Original DSF 1.000 x, Trued DSF 1.105 x and Change +10.5%.

Navigation: More → Zero & Truing → Truing / Calibration

8.2 Shot Analysis

Reads the shots in your Shot Log, filtered by rifle and by range (in 25 yd or 25 m buckets), and shows statistics: mean elevation and windage, elevation and windage SD, extreme spread in each direction, radial SD, CEP (all in MOA), group size, and the mean group and extreme spread across groups. Group Size shows only once a range is picked (not with the range at All), and the mean group and extreme spread under Group Size (Inches) need two or more shots that each carry a group size. It needs at least two shots with impact data, and it shows statistics only (no chart).

Shot Analysis with nothing logged: the Rifle filter (All) and the empty state, No Shots Logged, with the hint to log shots first.

Four shots logged, Rifle and Range both All: Group Statistics (4 shots) lists mean elevation and windage, elevation and windage SD, extreme spread in elevation and in windage, radial SD and CEP, all in MOA.

The Rifle filter menu: All, then each rifle that has logged shots (6.5 CM Match here).

The Range filter menu: All, then each 25 yd bucket that holds shots (100 yd here).

Range set to 100 yd: Group Statistics (2 shots) for that bucket, and a Group Size row (1.42 in) that appears once a range is chosen.

With four shots that each carry a group size: Group Size 1.42 in, then the Group Size (Inches) card with Mean Group 1.35 in and ES (groups) 0.50 in.

Navigation: More → Logs & Analysis → Shot Analysis

8.3 Shot Group Analyzer

A visual analyzer where you tap a target canvas to place shots and see real-time statistics, across 3 target styles (bullseye with scoring rings, round plate, blank grid). Stats: group size (inches/MOA/MIL), extreme-spread width/height, mean radius, CEP, SD from centroid, and centroid offset. Export Group Image shares the canvas with its stats as a picture (once two shots are placed), on both phones.

Shot Group Analyzer with the Bullseye style: the Bullseye / Plate / Grid switch, the Target Size (12 in) and Distance (100 yd) fields, the scoring-ring target, and Undo, Clear All and the shot count (0 shots) at the bottom.

Five shots tapped onto the bullseye: numbered orange dots and a green cross at the center of the group; Undo and Clear All are now active.

Group Statistics for the five shots: Group Size 1.53 in (1.46 MOA / 0.42 MIL), Extreme Spread, Mean Radius, CEP (50%), Std Dev and Centroid Offset, with the orange Export Group Image button.

Export Group Image opens the share sheet with a picture named Shot Group (closed without sending).

The Plate style: the same five shots on a round plate.

The Grid style: the same five shots on a blank grid.

Navigation: More → Logs & Analysis → Shot Group Analyzer

8.4 Turret Tracking Test

Verifies that one click actually moves the point of impact by the stated value. Set the click unit (MOA or MIL) and the click value, then add test rows: each has a distance, the clicks dialed, the expected shift (computed), and the measured shift. The tool shows each row's tracking percentage and rating (Pass is 95–105%, Marginal is 90–95% or 105–110%, Fail is below 90% or above 110%), an Overall Tracking figure, and an Expected vs. Actual chart with a 1:1 line and a best-fit line. It does not change your profile; set the tracking percentage in the rifle editor (Turret Tracking (%)).

Turret Tracking Test, Test Setup: Default Distance (100 yd), Click Unit (MOA) and Click Value (0.25 MOA), with the note that common values are 0.25 and 0.5.

The Click Unit menu: MOA (checked) or MIL (MRAD).

Test rows with measured shifts: each row shows Distance, Clicks Dialed, Expected Shift and Measured Shift, then its tracking percentage and rating (97.4% Pass, 101.2% Pass, 94.9% Marginal), with Add Test Row below.

A row below 90 percent: 79.6% with the red Fail chip.

Summary: Overall Tracking 95.1%, Rating Pass, averaged over the rated rows, with the Interpretation key (Pass 95-105%, Marginal 90-95% or 105-110%, Fail under 90% or over 110%).

Expected vs. Actual: one dot per test row, the 1:1 reference line and the best-fit line, with the Expected Shift axis along the bottom and the Actual Shift axis up the side.

Navigation: More → Zero & Truing → Turret Tracking Test

8.5 Chrono String Statistics

Checks a chronograph string before it reaches your load. The tool is listed as Chrono String Statistics (the pinned-tab label is Chrono String, and the screen is titled Chrono Stats); it is also listed under Reloading as Related and, with the Armory Suite on, marked In Armory Suite. Pro.

Finding the tool: a search in More lists Chronograph Session, Chrono String Statistics (In Armory Suite), Cd Measurement (In Analysis Suite) and Bluetooth Devices.

Capture a string offers five ways to get shots in:

The Chrono String screen before any shots: Capture a string with Live from chronograph, Import Garmin file (.fit), Import ShotView CSV, Paste shot speeds, Type shots and Bluetooth Diagnostic, then Reference MV (2600 fps) and the empty No Sessions list.

Live from chronograph — shots from a connected chronograph (More → Rifles & Gear → Bluetooth Devices); only shots fired after you start are taken. With none connected, the screen says so and offers Open Devices. A Garmin Xero C1 sends nothing per shot: when you end the session on the chronograph, the whole session (every shot, in order) reaches the Chrono String from any screen. With live capture on it joins the live string; with it off, a new live string starts with the session; if the string holds unsaved shots, the session waits behind "This string hasn't been saved." Each session is imported once.

Live from chronograph with none connected: the switch is on, the screen says No chronograph is connected, and Open Devices leads to Bluetooth Devices. Session Info and the string buttons sit below, grayed out until shots arrive.

Import Garmin file (.fit) — also opens from Files, the share sheet, or another app. The app checks the file's header and checksum, uses the chronograph's own session average as a cross-check, and refuses a damaged or incomplete file, a file that is not from a Garmin chronograph, or one over 5,000 shots or 5 MB, rather than using part of it.
Import ShotView CSV — the delimiter, header row, and speed and shot-number columns are found automatically, so lines before the data are fine. Units come from the header or a cell; if the speeds could be either, the app asks whether they are meters per second or feet per second, showing the first three values both ways. Anything not read as a shot is listed under Rows not used with its line number.
Paste shot speeds — numbers separated by new lines, commas, semicolons, tabs, or spaces. Units follow your Measurement System unless the text says fps or m/s; anything that is not a number is listed under Words not used.

The Paste shot speeds sheet, empty: Cancel and Use at the top, and the hint that speeds can be separated by new lines, commas, semicolons, tabs or spaces.

Ten speeds pasted with a stray word (abc) at the end; Use reads the numbers and sets the word aside.

Type shots — enter readings one at a time.

Type shots opens New Session: Cancel and Create at the top and Session Info (Rifle / Platform, Load / Ammo, Temperature).

On the new string, the Add Shot field takes one speed (1 to 10,000 fps); the green plus adds it.

After the first shot (2605 fps): Count 1, Average, SD, ES, CV, Min and Max, with Flag Outliers (>2 SD) and Validate MV below and shot #1 at the bottom.

A Bluetooth Diagnostic row, the last one in the Capture a string list, opens a sheet titled BLE Explorer for a chronograph whose live feed is not working (fire a shot and export the log).

The Bluetooth Diagnostic sheet, titled BLE Explorer: Scan for BLE Devices (the simulator has no Bluetooth LE), the note for LabRadar, Caldwell or Garmin, and Tell Us Which Device.

Live-check. Chronographs whose format is confirmed (FX, Caldwell, MagnetoSpeed, and the Garmin Xero C1's session hand-off) feed the string directly, though every shot still goes through the checks below. A device the app does not recognize holds its first reading and asks "Check against the chronograph: does it show N for shot M?" Tap Yes to trust the feed for that connection and release the held shots in order; tap No and the feed is turned off for the session, and you import the chronograph's file instead.

The string screen is titled New string · N shots. It shows Warnings, Statistics (Average (used), Average (all shots), Median, SD, ES, and Shots used "n of N"), the Shots (number, speed, deviation from the average used, a status chip, and an Exclude / Include button), Rows not used, Words not used, and Session Info (rifle or platform, an optional saved load, a load/ammo name, a Suppressor used switch, and temperature).

The string screen: Statistics (Average used 2610.2 fps, Average all shots 2605.2 fps, Median, SD 7.1 fps, ES 22 fps, Shots used 9 of 10) and the Shots list with each speed, its deviation, the First shot low chip on shot 1 and the Include / Exclude buttons.

Words not used lists the stray abc; below it Session Info holds Rifle / Platform, Load / Ammo, the Suppressor used switch and Temperature.

String Guard. Before a shot reaches your average, the app checks it:

The Warnings card for a short, scattered string: Only 4 shots, Spread is wide and Extreme spread is wide, each with its numbers.

Flag	When it appears
Invalid value ignored	A reading under 25 fps or over 6,000 fps
Duplicate ignored	The same shot number and speed as an earlier reading in the same file or connection
First shot low	With at least 5 shots, shot 1 is at least 1% below the median of the rest and at least 2 SD of the rest below it
Outlier	With at least 5 shots, a speed far from the median (modified z-score above 3.5) and at least 10 fps and 0.4% away from it
Only N shots	Fewer than 5 shots used: fire at least 5 (10 is better)
Speeds are climbing / dropping	With at least 6 shots, a steady drift of 0.8% of the average or more (climbing: barrel or suppressor warming up; dropping: heat or fouling)
Spread is wide / Extreme spread is wide	SD of 0.6% of the average or more; ES of 2.0% or more
Average is X away from this load's stated speed	The average differs from the linked load's stored muzzle velocity by more than 8%
These look like meters per second	The speeds were read as fps but all fall between 350 and 1,700
Shot numbers are skipped	A gap in the chronograph's own shot numbering
Chronograph's own average differs	The .fit file's session average differs from the list's by more than 1 fps

Shots flagged First shot low, Outlier, Duplicate, or Invalid are left out of the average by default; you can include any of them except an invalid one, and exclude a normal shot yourself.

Using the string. Save string saves the session (saving again updates it, unless that session was edited elsewhere, in which case a new one is saved). Use as muzzle velocity opens "Set muzzle velocity to X?" showing the average, the shots used, the SD, and every active warning; Use (or Use anyway when there is a warning) then asks Where should this go? (§4.1). Save to load asks which: the Armory load (the one the Calculator solves with, which takes the average as its muzzle velocity) or, with a saved load picked in Session Info, the Reloading recipe (which keeps the average and SD as its measured MV and SD); either asks you to confirm first. Start new string begins again, and asks first if the current string is unsaved. Saved strings list under Reference MV with the rifle, date, load, shot count, average, and SD; opening one shows count, average, SD, ES, CV, minimum, and maximum, and, for a string linked to a load, Push to Reloading Recipe. On Android, a saved string shows its statistics, Use as muzzle velocity, and Push to Load, but not the iPhone's outlier flag, Include all shots, or Validate MV, and live strings stop at 500 shots.

The action rows under the string: Save string, Use as muzzle velocity, Save to load and, in red, Start new string.

Use as muzzle velocity opens Set muzzle velocity to 2610.2 fps?, showing the average, the shots used (9) and the SD, with Cancel and Use.

Use then asks Where should this go?: Save to the Armory load (140gr Hornady ELD-M G7), New Load..., or Just this solve (What-if).

Save to load: the Armory load takes the average as its muzzle velocity; the button names the load to confirm.

Start new string on a string that is not saved asks first: This string hasn't been saved, with a red Start new string button.

Saved strings under Reference MV: a row shows the rifle, date, shot count, average and SD.

Opening a saved string: Count, Average, SD, ES, CV, Min and Max, then Flag Outliers (>2 SD), Include all shots and Validate MV.

Navigation: More → Zero & Truing → Chrono String Statistics

8.6 Shot Book

A book of your shot groups, each recorded one of five ways and kept together. The list shows a summary strip (groups, rounds, best, and average, in MOA) and rows with each group's title, size (inches or cm, with MOA), date, rifle, load, and capture mode; search the groups, filter by rifle , tap + to record a group , and swipe to delete. The five capture modes save the same record: Plot by Hand (tap each impact onto a target, at any distance), Photo of Target (photograph the target up close and the app finds the holes; drag the corners if it misses the edges), Live Auto-Detect (a phone on a tripod finds new holes at short range; a bare phone camera works to about 25 yd / 23 m), Live Spotter (tap each impact you see, at any range), and Through the Scope (the camera down a spotting scope). The editor holds a title, distance, target size, rifle, load, and notes, and computes group size, extreme spread, mean radius, CEP (50%), standard deviation, and center of group; Called Flier keeps a shot on record but outside the math.

An empty Shot Book: the Record a Group button and the Search groups field at the bottom.

The Shot Book list: the filter button at the top left, the + button at the top right, the summary strip (Groups, Rounds, Best and Average in MOA) and a row for each group.

The filter button's menu: All Rifles, or one rifle.

Swiping a row to the left shows the red Delete button.

Record a Group lists the five capture modes: Plot by Hand, Photo of Target, Live Auto-Detect, Live Spotter and Through the Scope, with the note that automatic detection needs a bullet hole to cover several camera pixels.

Plot by Hand: tap the target to add each impact (numbered red dots); the Bullseye, Plate and Grid styles sit under it.

A selected shot (Shot 5) offers the Called Flier switch, which keeps it on record but out of the group math, and Remove Shot.

The statistics the editor computes: Group Size 1.83 in (1.75 MOA, 0.51 MIL), Extreme Spread, Mean Radius, CEP (50%), Std Dev and Center of Group.

Details: title, Distance, Target Size, Rifle, Load and Notes.

The Rifle menu in the editor: None, then every saved rifle.

The Load menu: None, or a load saved on the chosen rifle.

Tapping a group opens Edit Group, with Save at the top right and the target with its plotted impacts.

Navigation: More → Logs & Analysis → Shot Book

9. Field Tools

The field tools are in More's Shoot section (HUD Mode, Competition Mode, Field Mode, Quick Solve, Target List, Virtual Turret, Spotting Correction, and the Reticle Simulator; the Range Day Suite row leads the section) and Maps & Ranging (GPS Target Ranging, the Range Planning Map, Wildfires & Public Lands, the Topo Map, the Shooting Range Finder, and, on the iPhone, LiDAR Target Capture; the section also holds the Mil Relation Range Estimator and the Sound Delay Calculator, §15); the Sight-In Assistant is under Zero & Truing. Virtual Turret and LiDAR Target Capture are Advanced-level rows (§2): at the Basic and Standard levels they are not listed in More's sections, and you reach them through More's search box, where each row says "Advanced level". HUD Mode, Competition Mode, Field Mode, Target List, and Compact Shoot View are also launchable from the Calculator's Quick Actions, which also holds the Cards menu with the Come-Up Card. Compact Shoot View is free. Opened from their own More rows, the others are free on a sample rifle and need Pro on your own (§24.5); on the iPhone, the Quick Actions buttons for HUD Mode, Competition Mode, Field Mode, and Target List open the upgrade screen when you do not have Pro, and on Android they open the tool, which follows the same sample-rifle rule. When the Calculator is solving from a second sight (§4.19), a second sight has no turret, so HUD Mode, Competition Mode, Field Mode, Target List, and Compact Shoot View show the hold without clicks, and Virtual Turret does not offer Load Elev + Wind.

The top of More's Shoot section: the Range Day Suite row first, then HUD Mode, Competition Mode, and the rows below it.

More's Shoot section, further down: the rest of the field tools.

More's Maps & Ranging section: Shooting Range Finder, Range Planning Map, GPS Target Ranging, Wildfires & Public Lands, Mil Relation Range Estimator, Sound Delay Calculator, and Topo Map.

9.1 HUD Mode

A full-screen, green-on-black night-vision-compatible display showing the current solution in large type: range, elevation and windage with click counts, velocity, and a subsonic or transonic warning (the iPad layout adds energy and time of flight). All white is eliminated to preserve dark-adapted vision; it has two colors, NVG green and red. Tap anywhere, or the X, to dismiss ; the first time the HUD opens in each launch, "Tap anywhere to close" shows at the top for a few seconds, then fades, and never takes the tap. The help (?) button opens a short tips card.

HUD Mode in NVG green: range, elevation and windage with click counts, and velocity. The X at the top closes it; the NVG and RED buttons switch the two colors.

The help (?) button on HUD Mode opens a short tips card.

Navigation: More → Shoot → HUD Mode (also from Calculate → Quick Actions)

9.2 Competition Mode

A PRS/NRL view for portrait or landscape: a range stepper (−100, −25, +25, +100), large elevation/windage corrections, wind-speed controls (−5, −1, +1, +5), the wind dial beside the WIND heading with the direction written next to it ("From 3 o'clock · 90°"; drag round it to change where the wind comes from, and it solves again when you lift your finger), and a PAR countdown timer. On a phone too short for it all, the screen scrolls instead of clipping the timer and Exit. On the iPhone the timer has presets of 60, 90, 120, and 180 seconds plus a custom time (minimum 10 seconds); the clock turns orange at 30 seconds or less and red at 10 seconds or less, and at zero it plays an alert sound and vibrates; the gear is locked while it runs . An Accent Color button (the palette icon) offers 8 swatches and a hue slider, and your choice is remembered. Android has the same PAR presets, custom time, color thresholds, and Accent Color picker (at zero it vibrates).

Competition Mode upright: the range stepper, the large elevation and windage corrections, the wind controls with the wind dial, and the PAR timer.

Competition Mode with the phone on its side.

On its side the screen scrolls, so the timer and Exit are reachable.

The wind dial beside the WIND heading, with the direction written next to it.

The PAR timer's presets (60, 90, 120, 180 seconds) and the custom time.

The clock turns orange at 30 seconds or less.

The clock turns red at 10 seconds or less.

The Accent Color sheet: 8 swatches and a hue slider.

Navigation: More → Shoot → Competition Mode (also from Calculate → Quick Actions)

9.3 Field Mode (Quick Solve)

A full-screen, dark, glove-friendly interface using large wheel pickers for range (25 to 2,500 in steps of 25; meters when metric), wind speed (0 to 40 mph, or the same speeds in m/s), and wind direction (a clock position). Giant elevation/windage readouts re-solve on every picker change, with the velocity and energy under them on a phone (a wide layout, an iPad or an Android tablet, shows velocity, time of flight, and Mach instead, and flags subsonic and transonic ranges); while a turned wheel is being solved, the answer from before stays in place, dimmed with a small spinner over it, so the numbers never vanish and the wheels never jump.

Field Mode: the range, wind speed, and wind direction wheels, with the elevation and windage readouts above them.

Quick Solve is a separate, lighter screen for one fast answer, on both platforms. Set the range with the −100, −25, +25, and +100 buttons, or tap the keyboard icon beside RANGE to open Enter Range and type a distance (up to 5,000 yd; a longer one is brought down to it). Set the wind speed with a slider (0 to 50 mph) and its direction with the clock buttons (12, 1:30, 3, 6, 9, and 10:30), then tap Solve: elevation and windage appear in MIL with MOA beneath, with a Subsonic or Transonic note when it applies. Like the Calculator, it shows the orange "Standard sea-level air, not today's weather. Get your weather or enter it for a real hold." above the hold while the weather is untouched, and the red "Check this" lines when an input looks wrong. Quick Solve is free on the sample rifles and needs Pro on your own (§24.5).

Quick Solve: the range buttons, the wind slider, the clock buttons for wind direction, and Solve.

The Enter Range sheet opened by the keyboard icon beside RANGE.

Navigation: More → Shoot → Field Mode (also from Calculate → Quick Actions); Quick Solve: More → Shoot → Quick Solve

9.4 Target List

A pre-computed hold table for multiple distances from a single solve, always sorted by distance. Pick a preset (seven are built in, such as PRS Match 300–1100 × 25), add a typed distance, swipe to remove a row, or Clear. Each row leads with its range, drawn bigger and bold, then elevation with clicks, wind with clicks, velocity, and time of flight (with the Elev MIL / Wind MIL headings and the range unit on each row), with subsonic rows in orange. It reads the Calculator's current solution; with none it shows No Solution.

Target List: a hold table by distance, with each row's range, elevation, wind, velocity, and time of flight.

The preset menu (PRS Match 300-1100 x 25 and the other built-in presets).

The first-use tips card for Target List.

Swiping a row reveals its remove button.

Navigation: More → Shoot → Target List (also from Calculate → Quick Actions)

9.5 Virtual Turret

Animated elevation and windage dials that simulate your scope's physical turrets, with ±1 and ±5 steppers, a clicks-per-revolution picker, and your rifle's turret unit and click value when a rifle is loaded. Load Elev + Wind copies the corrections for the target range; the turret position persists between launches; Reset to Zero shows exactly how many clicks to reverse. A History box lists every step, load, and reset for the session, and the toolbar copies or shares the turret state with its history.

Virtual Turret: the elevation and windage dials with the +1 and +5 steppers, Load Elev + Wind, and Reset to Zero.

The History box listing each step, load, and reset.

The share sheet for the turret state and its history.

Navigation: More → Shoot → Virtual Turret (an Advanced-level row: at the Basic and Standard levels, find it with More's search)

9.6 Spotting Correction

After a spotted miss, builds the corrected hold and a spotter call. The new hold is written as the direction to correct (up or down, left or right), while the call names where the shot landed, as a clock position (high is 12, right is 3). You type the correction you want under Observed Miss Correction (vertical, where + is up; horizontal, where + is right; in MIL or MOA), and the screen shows the current hold from the Calculator, the cumulative correction for the session, the new hold, and the spotter call (which always states the range in meters), with a Copy to Clipboard button for the call , Apply — Log This Shot, a correction history, Share Session Summary , and Reset Session. Android works the same way. The session is not kept after you leave the screen.

Spotting Correction: the Observed Miss Correction fields, the current hold, and the new hold.

The spotter call, with Copy to Clipboard.

The cumulative correction for the session.

The correction history, with Share Session Summary and Reset Session.

Navigation: More → Shoot → Spotting Correction

9.7 Reticle Simulator

An interactive renderer overlaying computed holdovers on a rendered reticle image with a selectable target. It opens on a real reticle (the first favorite on a new install, then the last one you used) against the IPSC A-Zone target at 15 yd, and choosing a rifle switches to that rifle's own reticle; if a saved reticle has left the catalog, a banner names what is showing instead. The simulator is free with every reticle and every target; without Pro its rifle list offers None and the sample rifles, and your own rifles need Pro (§24.5).

Two layouts. On a phone the Simulator opens in the chips layout: the scope picture under the readouts, four chips under it (Range, Wind, Zoom, Turret), a column of round buttons down the left edge, and a settings button at the bottom right that opens a panel with two tabs, Setup and Display (the panel starts closed). While the panel is open the same button shows a down arrow and tapping it closes the panel. The Classic layout switch at the top of the Display tab, in either layout, brings back the earlier layout: the panel starts open, it has a third tab, Controls, and the range, wind, magnification and turrets stand on the scope or in the Controls tab as Show on the scope says (see Display below). The choice is kept on that phone. An iPad keeps its sidebar in either case, with every adjuster in it.

The Reticle Simulator in the chips layout: the readouts, the scope, the round buttons down the left, and the four chips under it.

The chips. Tap a chip to open its slider in a tray over the controls. One tray is open at a time, and it tucks itself away after 8 seconds of being left alone (never while you are typing, and never with the screen reader on). Touch and hold a chip to type an exact value. Range runs from 0 to 2,000 yd (or the metric equivalent) in steps of 5 yd, with ± buttons that step 5 yd below 50 yd and 25 yd above; a typed range can be any whole yard or meter. Wind sets the speed (0 to 50 mph in whole mph, or in meters per second to a tenth) and the direction (0 to 360° in steps of 5°; typed in whole degrees). Zoom moves the magnification in half-power steps within the optic's own range; a dual-power optic shows a two-setting picker, a fixed-power optic says it is fixed, and a long press types a magnification to a tenth. Turret shows the click value of the rifle's turret, the clicks to dial, ± buttons for the elevation and for the windage, and Clear dial; the chip itself reads what is dialed, for example "+3.20 MIL". A sight with no turret, such as a second sight, has no Turret chip. A change of range or wind solves again whichever control made it.

The four chips: Range, Wind, Zoom, and Turret.

The Range tray: the slider with − and +, and the range written at the right.

The Wind tray: the speed slider and the direction slider, with the direction also written as a clock position.

The Zoom tray: the magnification slider, a magnifying glass at each end, and the power at the right.

The Turret tray: the click value at the top left, the clicks the hold needs at the top right, and − and + for the elevation and for the windage.

Touching and holding a chip opens a sheet to type an exact value (here the Range chip, 400 yd), with Cancel and Done.

The round buttons on the left. Five buttons, each the same switch as its row in the panel (filled and colored while on): Auto-Dial Turret , Trajectory Trace , Hold Overlay , Holds at Ranges , and Scope Only . Auto-Dial Turret sets the elevation turret, in whole clicks of the rifle's turret, to the dial the Range Card gives for the range on screen, again whenever the range changes or a solve lands, so the target sits on the crosshair up and down and the Trajectory Trace tags each mark with the range it hits at that dial; the windage is still yours to hold, and you can still turn the turret by hand (the next change of range dials it again). Turning it on turns the Trajectory Trace on; it is off until you turn it on, and the phone remembers the choice. Scope Only is the full-screen view: it hides the readouts, the chips, the panel, the weather badge and the bars and leaves the picture, the five buttons (dimmed), and the Pin target to hold and Lock reticle buttons (also dimmed, each with its "Pinned" or "Locked" tag beside it while on); tap Scope Only again to leave. It is never remembered, and leaving the screen ends it.

The five round buttons, top to bottom: Auto-Dial Turret, Trajectory Trace, Hold Overlay, Holds at Ranges, and Scope Only.

The five buttons while all are off: plain gray rings.

The first four switched on: each fills with its own color (Auto-Dial Turret blue, Trajectory Trace orange, Hold Overlay green, Holds at Ranges purple).

Scope Only: the picture alone, with the five buttons and the Pin target to hold and Lock reticle buttons dimmed at the edges.

On the picture. Pin target to hold (green, with a "Pinned" tag) draws the target's center on the hold dot at every range, wind, and zoom, so the drop reads on the marks beneath the target; the scope takes no drag or double-tap while pinned. Lock reticle (orange, with a "Locked" tag) keeps the aim point where it is while you drag or double-tap; a new target or Reset unlocks it. Both are round buttons at the right of the scope (at the top right with the chips layout upright, at the bottom right otherwise), they stay in Scope Only, dimmed, so you can pin the target there and read the drop on the marks, and both are session choices that are not saved. In the chips layout, touching and holding the picture also opens an Aim menu with Pin target to hold (or Unpin) and Recenter aim; a drag moves the aim point and a double-tap puts it back in the middle. Pinch to zoom (Display; on unless you turn it off) lets you pinch the whole picture, reticle and target together, from 1x to 5x about your fingers without changing the scope's power or any number; a drag pans while it is enlarged (and while it is locked or pinned), a double-tap puts it back, and a "View 2.5×" chip shows the zoom and returns to 1x when tapped. With Pinch to zoom off, a pinch turns the magnification. A line beside the chip gives the scale of the reticle's own unit at the range on screen, for example "1 MIL = 7.2 in @ 200 yd" (or "1 MIL = 20.0 cm @ 200 m" in metric). The magnification follows the rifle's own scope: a rifle whose scope model names its power range (for example "Mark 6 3-18x44") zooms only within it. For a reticle whose artwork is a crosshair, the crosshair lines always run on to the edge of the glass; this is a display aid, and the reticle and every exported image are unchanged.

At the right of the glass: help, Pin target to hold, and Lock reticle.

Pin target to hold and Lock reticle switched on: each button fills with its color and a "Pinned" or "Locked" tag shows beside it.

Touching and holding the picture opens the Aim menu: Pin target to hold and Recenter aim.

After a pinch the whole picture is enlarged and a "View" chip shows the zoom (here 2.7x); tap the chip to return to 1x.

The hold. With Hold Overlay on, a red dot marks where to hold on the reticle for the range on screen, joined by a dashed leader to a pill with the numbers, for example "↓8.2 →1.7 MOA" (elevation and windage, one decimal), in a corner of the glass that stays clear of the crosshair, the target, and the dot. The numbers are written in the Settings Angular Unit first, with the reticle's own unit beside them in smaller type when it differs. A turret that is dialed adds a "D:" figure for what is dialed, and the pill shows what is left to hold. A hold that falls off the glass shows a red arrow at the rim. With the overlay off the hold is read in the readout bar. A hold of under 0.05 prints as zero, never "-0.0".

The hold: a red dot on the reticle and a pill with the elevation and windage in your Angular Unit, then the reticle's own unit smaller.

Holds at Ranges. The Holds at Ranges button (left column), the switch in the Display tab (chips layout) or under the turret dial in the Controls tab (Classic layout), puts a labeled dot on the glass for each range you pick, at that range's elevation and wind hold, read from the same solve as the Range Card, so a dot equals that range's card row. Pick the ranges by Steps (Start, End, and Increment, each a whole yard or meter; 100 to 600 by 100 to begin with) or as a typed List (separate the ranges with semicolons, for example 100; 300; 500), up to 20, from 1 yd to the Simulator's farthest range, with a short note when one is left out. A label reads the range and its two holds in the reticle's own unit, for example "600 ↓4.2 →0.6", with the unit written once, on the picked range's label. Holding draws every dot as a hold from the zero (or from the Auto-Dial dial while Auto-Dial Turret is on). Dialing sets the turret, in whole clicks, for the one range you pick and shows the other dots relative to it ("Turret dialed for 600 yd"); a new solve or a click limit re-dials it, and editing the picked ranges re-dials a range still in the list. Tap a dot, or its row in the list under the switch, to pick its range: that range becomes the Simulator's range (the Range chip follows), and in Dialing the turret is dialed for it. Labels never overprint each other, the trace's range tags, the hold readout, or the group label; a label with no room is dropped and its dot stays. A range past the end of the solved trajectory gets no dot and the panel says so. Holds at Ranges is on the first time you open the Simulator, and its Holding or Dialing mode sets the turret as the screen opens; a phone that turned it off keeps it off. The switch, the ranges, and Holding or Dialing stay on the phone, and Reset All Settings turns the dots back on and puts the choices back. Holds at Ranges is free, like the rest of the Simulator (§24.5).

Holds at Ranges on: a labeled dot for each range you pick (100 to 600 yd here), each label giving the range and its holds. The pill above is the Hold Overlay.

Trajectory Trace. With Show Trajectory Trace on, each mark of the reticle is tagged with the range at which the bullet reaches it (matched to the nearest 25 yd, or 25 m, row), in plain numbers. A tag is drawn only where it has room, whole-unit marks first. Trace Style (shown while the trace is on) offers Classic, Ticks, Lines, and Edges to change how the tags look.

Turrets. Dial the turrets with the Turret chip, or put them on the glass: in the chips layout the Turrets selector in Display (Off, Drum, Dial; Drum to begin with on a phone that never chose, and a phone that turned it off keeps it off) and in the Classic layout the Controls tab's Show on the scope. An elevation and a windage turret then sit on the scope (under it on an upright phone and the iPad, though the Drum style on an upright phone stands the wind drum at the scope's right side, just above the elevation drum; at the left and right edges on a phone on its side). In the Drum style each is a graduated drum (a fine mark every click, a numbered mark every 10, an orange index) that rolls with your finger, one click every 10 points, with a − and a + that repeat while held; Dial draws round knobs instead. Each click is exactly one click of the selected rifle's turret (its click value and unit, with the rifle's tracking percentage applied; with no rifle chosen, the reticle's unit with 0.1 MIL or 0.25 MOA clicks), with a light tick, and stops at the end of travel (50 MIL or 170 MOA either way). The readouts show what is dialed in the turret's unit with the click count and direction (for example "ELEV +1.25 MOA", "Clicks: 5 up"), a button clears the dial, and the hold, the dot, the Holds at Ranges dots, the trace tags, and the DIALED readout all follow the dial.

Turrets set to Drum on an upright phone: the elevation drum runs under the scope and the wind drum stands at its right side.

Turrets set to Dial: a round knob for each, side by side under the scope.

The weather badge. At the bottom left, a small wind dial with the wind speed and angle ("10 mph · 90°") and, when a rifle is selected, the temperature, pressure, and altitude (when above 0). Tap it for a dial five times larger with a speed slider and Done; drag the dial to set the direction. The Simulator starts from the Calculator's weather and wind (59 °F, 29.92 inHg, 0 ft and no wind when nothing is set) and picks up the Calculator's conditions again when you return to the tab. See it in the Simulator on the Calculator's results opens the Simulator on the Calculator's exact shot: its rifle, load, range, and air, with the target pinned to the hold.

The weather badge: the wind dial with the wind written under it ("10 mph · 90°"), then the temperature and the pressure.

Tapping the weather badge opens the larger dial with the speed slider and Done.

The panel. The Setup tab has the reticle picker (a Favorites section first, then brands, with search and a star on each reticle; touching the reticle's name on the scope's title opens the same search), the target, the profile, a Second sight switch (a red dot or iron sights with their own height and zero; they have no turret and no Dialing; it shows only for a rifle with one set up on the Bench), the load (when the rifle has more than one), a What-if muzzle velocity box, the focal plane (FFP or SFP, with a REF slider for a second-focal-plane optic), illumination, and dot size for a plain red dot. The What-if box shows the load's own velocity as its placeholder and a reset arrow back to it ; a velocity typed there reads "Not saved. Used for this solve only." and is written to the load only when you tap Save to Load (a locked rifle is never changed and says so). The Display tab has, in order: the ready-made views Hunt, PRS, Range Day, and Clean; the Classic layout switch; on a phone in the Classic layout, Show on the scope with a switch for each of Range, Wind, and Magnification and the Turrets selector (what is off is adjusted in the Controls tab, so nothing is adjusted in two places), and in the chips layout the Turrets selector, Range Estimation, and Holds at Ranges; Show Hold Overlay; Show Trajectory Trace; Pinch to zoom; a folded More section with Live Shot Projection, Vital Zone Lock-On, Shot Group Tracking, and Show Wind Envelope; then Export Dope Card and Reset All Settings (back to the IPSC A-Zone at 15 yd at the optic's lowest power; which controls stand on the scope and Pinch to zoom stay as you set them). Each ready-made view is one tap that sets several switches at once. Hunt shows the hold overlay, the trace, and Vital Zone Lock-On, with the range and the wind on the scope and no turrets. PRS shows the overlay, Holds at Ranges, the wind envelope, and the turrets, with the trace off. Range Day shows the overlay, the trace, the wind envelope, and the turrets, with the magnification on the scope too. Clean turns every drawing off. The Classic layout's Controls tab holds the adjusters of any group not on the scope (magnification, with a magnifying glass at each end of the slider that steps one stop, or the other setting of a dual-power optic; a range slider (0 to 2,000 yd) with ± buttons; the wind speed and its direction), the turret dial, and Holds at Ranges. The main values can also be typed: the magnification, the range in any whole yard or meter, the wind speed, the wind direction in degrees, or either turret dial in the turret's unit (it lands on a whole click of the rifle's click value). A number outside what is allowed is set to the nearest allowed value, and the entry says the range. Three sliders are slider-only: the REF slider of a second-focal-plane optic, Scatter SD, and the Subtension slider of Range Estimation.

The reticle picker: Favorites first, then the brands, with a star on each reticle.

The Setup tab: the reticle, the target, the profile, the load, and What-if muzzle velocity.

A velocity typed in the What-if box reads "Not saved. Used for this solve only."; Save to Load writes it to the load, and the orange arrow goes back to the load's own velocity.

The Display tab, top: the ready-made views, Classic layout, Turrets, Range Estimation, and Holds at Ranges.

The Display tab, lower down: Show Trajectory Trace and its Trace Style, Pinch to zoom, and More.

The Display tab with Classic layout on: the panel has a third tab, and Show on the scope has a switch for Range, Wind, and Magnification.

The Controls tab of the Classic layout: the magnification slider, the turret dial with Clear dial, and Auto-Dial Turret.

Shots and groups. Live Shot Projection fires simulated shots around the hold: set Scatter SD (0.1 to 3.0 MOA; it is an angle, so the same setting scatters the same at every range), tap Fire, and read the shot count and the group size in MOA; the group label on the glass names its unit ("Group: 0.35 MIL" on a MIL reticle, MOA on a MOA reticle); Clear starts over. With Shot Group Tracking on, Save Group (from two shots) keeps the group just fired, and the saved groups are listed under the switch (for example "#2 · 5 shots @ 300 yd · 1.20 MOA") with a Clear; they are kept for this session only and never written to the Shot Log. Vital Zone Lock-On shows a hit probability for targets with a vital zone (N/A for the rest). Show Wind Envelope draws the band the wind's spread drifts the bullet across. With illumination off, the reticle is drawn as the unlit glass shows it; with it on, only the parts the reticle really lights glow.

Live Shot Projection on: the Scatter SD slider, Fire, and Clear.

After three shots: the shot count, the group size in MOA, and Save Group.

Vital Zone Lock-On with its hit probability, Shot Group Tracking with a saved group ("#1 · 3 shots @ 400 yd · 1.39 MOA"), and Show Wind Envelope.

On the glass: the shots with the group size, the hit probability tag, and the band the wind's spread covers.

The readout bar. Above the picture, the header names the rifle at the left (touch it to switch the rifle or the load) and the reticle at the right (touch it to open the reticle search, the same search as the Setup tab's; a second sight's name stays a plain label, because the Second sight switch picks it), with a short red word and a picture if there is no solution, the range is out of reach, or the load needs checking. Under it the readouts show the hold (elevation and windage, while the overlay is off), the click counts, the impact speed and energy at the range on screen (fps or m/s, ft-lb or joules; the speed is orange from Mach 0.8 to 1.2 and red only below Mach 0.8, as on every other screen), and the time of flight, and the magnification, the range, and the dialed amount only while their own control is not on the scope. The readouts wrap onto more rows on a narrow phone so none is cut off, dim while a new solve is in flight, and show dashes when there is no solution.

The header names the rifle at the left and the reticle at the right; under it the readout bar shows the impact speed, energy, and time of flight.

The readout bar with the Hold Overlay off: the hold in your Angular Unit and the reticle's own unit, then the impact speed, energy, and time of flight.

More. The focal plane is read from the catalog when it is known; dual-magnification optics such as the SpecterDR snap between their real powers; second-focal-plane optics have a REF slider; illumination offers only the colors the reticle really has; and red-dot optics get a Dot Size of 1, 2, 3, 3.25, 4, or 6 MOA. The Range Estimation switch (Display in the chips layout; the Range button in the Classic layout) opens range estimation: type a target size, drag the subtension, and read the estimated range. Targets are the whole Target Library, including your own target photos and the NRA B-8 repair center at its true 10.5-inch size with its real rings. The toolbar menu has Export Reticle Card… (a live preview with portrait or landscape, a white background, show/hide toggles for ten elements, and a note; Print, Save PNG, or Copy) and Share Dope Card; the "…" menu holds Settings, All Tools, and Report an Issue or Suggestion; the help (?) button opens three short tips.

Range Estimation: the target size, the subtension slider, and the estimated range.

The toolbar's share button opens Export Reticle Card... and Share Dope Card.

Export Reticle Card: a live preview, Portrait or Landscape, the White background switch, and Print, Save PNG, and Copy.

Export Reticle Card, lower down: the ten Show / Hide switches and the optional note.

The toolbar's "…" menu: Settings, All Tools, and Report an Issue or Suggestion.

The help (?) button opens the Reticle Simulator tips card.

Navigation: More → Shoot → Reticle Simulator (it is also the default fourth tab, labeled Simulator)

9.8 GPS Target Ranging

Mark your position and a target on a map (tap to place pins, with a Shooter/Target mode picker, or type coordinates and tap Apply Manual Coordinates; Use Current GPS for Shooter fills your position) to compute slant range, horizontal range, altitude delta, inclination angle, and true bearing without a laser rangefinder. Inclination needs both altitudes; otherwise only the horizontal range is shown. Send to Calculator fills the range, plus the inclination when it is known. Coordinates are entered as decimal degrees on the iPhone; Android takes typed latitude/longitude or MGRS instead of map pins.

GPS Target Ranging: the map, the Shooter/Target mode picker, and the coordinate fields.

The Shooter / Target picker for placing pins.

Typed coordinates with Apply Manual Coordinates.

The results: slant range, horizontal range, altitude delta, inclination, and true bearing, with Send to Calculator.

Navigation: More → Maps & Ranging → GPS Target Ranging

9.9 LiDAR Target Capture [iOS]

The Target Capture screen has two modes: Multi-Point Scan (LiDAR iPhones only, iPhone 12 Pro or later; up to 16 points, with Undo, Mirror, Reset, Done, and Save) and Photo Capture, which works on any device: photograph the target, adjust its corners, enter its dimensions, and save it as a custom target in the Target Library.

Target Capture, Multi-Point Scan: on a phone without LiDAR the screen says "LiDAR Scanner Required" and offers Switch to Photo Capture.

Target Capture, Photo Capture: "Take a Photo of Your Target" with Open Camera.

Navigation: More → Maps & Ranging → LiDAR Target Capture (an Advanced-level row: at the Basic and Standard levels, find it with More's search)

9.10 Sight-In Assistant

A 3-step guided zeroing wizard — Shot Group, Click Correction, and Confirm: enter your group offset from center, apply the computed click correction (the MOA or MIL per click is seeded from your loaded rifle's turret, and stays editable), then shoot a confirmation group and either confirm the zero or re-measure. It keeps an adjustment history for the session.

Step 1, Shot Group: the range, the vertical and horizontal offset in inches, the MOA / MIL picker, and Next: Calculate Clicks.

Step 2, Click Correction: the MIL per click (from the loaded rifle's turret), and the elevation and windage clicks to turn.

Step 2, lower down: Back and Mark as Zeroed.

Step 3, Confirm: fire a confirmation group, an optional zero note, then Zero Confirmed — Reset Wizard or Group Still Off — Re-measure.

After a confirmed zero the first step shows the Adjustment History for the session.

Navigation: More → Zero & Truing → Sight-In Assistant

9.11 Range Planning Map

A map for marking shooter and target positions (tap to place pins, with a Shooter/Target mode picker) and reading the range, the bearing, and the size of 1 MIL at the target. A map-style menu offers Hybrid + Elevation, Satellite, and Standard. The trash button clears both pins and starts again with the shooter , and the location arrow at the top right of the map is the system button that centers the map on your position .

Range Planning Map: pins for the shooter and the target, with the range, the bearing, and the size of 1 MIL at the target.

The map-style menu: Hybrid + Elevation, Satellite, and Standard.

Navigation: More → Maps & Ranging → Range Planning Map

9.12 Wildfires & Public Lands

A map of public-land boundaries (PAD-US: BLM, National Forest, National Park, State Land, and other) and mapped wildfire perimeters. Tap a parcel for its details and a Fire Activity section. Wildfire outlines are mapped incident areas, not legal boundaries and not restriction orders: the app carries no fire-restriction stages, closures, or bans, so always confirm with the managing agency. The map shows when its data was retrieved or cached, warns when a live feed was clipped, and falls back to coarse offline outlines (marked as not surveyed) when land data cannot load; an About Wildfire Data sheet explains the sources.

Navigation: More → Maps & Ranging → Wildfires & Public Lands

9.13 Shooting Range Finder

A directory of shooting ranges near you (the screen is titled Shooting Ranges): choose a search radius (25, 50, 100, or 250 miles; 40, 80, 160, or 400 km on a metric phone) and an All / Outdoor / Indoor filter. Nearby Ranges come from a bundled list of 1,307 U.S. ranges (agency-verified entries and others tagged Unverified), and From online maps adds live third-party results, also marked unverified. Add a Spot , or Save a found range, to keep private My Spots on your phone (the iPhone includes them in its iCloud backup). Every found range also has a star: a tap keeps it as a favorite location, in the app's saved locations (Range Day's Locations list, which CarPlay reads too), and the favorites show first in the Range Finder, nearest first, under the same All / Outdoor / Indoor filter. A range already saved by hand (same name, within 150 m) is starred in place and keeps its type, notes, and visits; a second tap takes the star off and keeps the location.

Shooting Ranges: the search radius, the All / Outdoor / Indoor filter, and the list.

The search radius choices (25, 50, 100, 250 miles).

Add a Spot: a private spot saved on the phone.

Navigation: More → Maps & Ranging → Shooting Range Finder

9.14 Topo Map

A topographic map for studying the ground and measuring a distance across it, on both phones. It opens on the whole United States. The default OpenTopo layer draws contour lines; the layers button at the top right (Map Layers) switches to OpenStreetMap, a plain street map. Tap the map to drop points: the first is Start, then Point 2, Point 3, and so on, joined by a red line, and a card shows the Distance along the whole line in meters (with the same distance in yards under it on an imperial phone) and the number of points. The hint "Tap map to measure distance" shows until your first tap, and the ✕ button clears the measurement . The map provider's credit stays along the bottom edge. The Topo Map is free and needs no rifle.

Topo Map on OpenTopo: the whole United States with the layers button at the top right.

OpenTopo draws contour lines when zoomed in.

The Map Layers menu: OpenTopo and OpenStreetMap.

A measurement: Start, Point 2, and the red line, with the Distance card.

Tiles you have viewed on OpenTopo are kept on the phone, up to about 250 MB and for up to 30 days, so those places draw again with no signal; a place you have not viewed stays blank without a connection. OpenStreetMap tiles are not kept for use without a signal. The tiles come from OpenTopoMap and OpenStreetMap, so each tile request tells them the area you are viewing, your device's IP address, and the app's name and version. Satellite imagery is in the Range Planning Map (§9.11), not here.

Navigation: More → Maps & Ranging → Topo Map

10. PRS / Competition

Competition tools are in More's Competition section (Quick Targets, Match Score Log, Session Tracker, and Stage Planner; the Competition Suite row leads it, and Range Sheet, DA Range Card, Competition Mode, Target List, Moving Target, Multi-Target Scene, and Shot Log are listed under Related) and in Shoot (Range Sheet and DA Range Card).

More's Competition section: the Competition Suite row first, then Quick Targets (Hot Ranges), Match Score Log, Session Tracker, and Stage Planner, with Range Sheet, DA Range Card, and Competition Mode under Related.

10.1 DA Range Card

Density-altitude-based range cards solve your holds across a range of density altitudes (0–8,000 ft in 500-ft steps by default; 0–2,000 m in 500-m steps in metric), for a single range or a range table (100 to 1,000 by 100), under the wind you set. Results show the rifle, load, wind, and solve time, with holds in MOA and MIL and velocity. Export / Share writes a plain-text DA RANGE CARD, and is blocked while the card is stale (after you change an input). On screen, a range-table card is one block per density altitude (for example "0 ft · 59°F · 29.92 inHg") with a line per range that gives the elevation and wind hold in MIL and MOA, and the velocity in small type at the end of the line; a single-range card is a table with one row per density altitude (DA ft, °F, inHg, EL, WD, fps) and names its range (Target Range: 600 yd). In the exported text card, a multi-range card's holds line up under their range headers. Opened from the Calculator's Cards button, the card opens on the Calculator's rifle and load (§4.11).

The DA Range Card inputs: Load Data (Use Rifle Profile and the Profile menu), Target Range (Single Range or Range Table), DA Axis (DA Low, DA High, DA Step in feet), and Wind (speed and direction).

A single-range card at 500 yd: the header names the rifle, load, wind, and solve time, then one row per density altitude with EL and WD holds in MOA and MIL, and velocity. Export / Share is at the top.

Target Range switched to Range Table: From (yd), To (yd), and Step (yd) (100 to 1000 by 100 here).

A range-table card: for each density altitude, a line per range (100 to 1000 yd) with the elevation and windage holds in MIL and MOA and the velocity.

Export / Share opens the iOS share sheet with the plain-text DA RANGE CARD (Copy, Save to Files, and the apps on the phone).

After an input changes, the card shows an orange warning ("Inputs changed since this card was generated...") and Export / Share is dimmed until Generate DA Card is pressed again.

Navigation: More → Shoot → DA Range Card

10.2 Quick Targets

Pin up to five favorite ranges for instant holdover lookups without returning to the full Calculator (the menu row is Quick Targets (Hot Ranges)). Solve All opens a wind-conditions sheet and computes holds for every pinned range at once; each card shows elevation and windage in MIL (MOA), velocity, and Mach (written like M2.04; red below 0.8, orange from 0.8 to 1.2, the one speed regime of §4.7), with a conditions line. Copy copies the hold , the pencil edits a range , and the trash can next to it removes the range.

Quick Targets with nothing pinned: "No Quick Targets" and an Add Target button.

The Add Target sheet: an optional label and the range in yards, with an Effective Range stepper.

The Profile menu at the top lists the rifle profiles; the choice decides which rifle the holds use.

Solve All opens the Wind Conditions sheet (wind speed and direction), and its Solve All Targets button computes every pinned range.

Two pinned ranges solved: each card shows the range, elevation and windage in MIL (MOA in brackets), velocity, Mach, and a conditions line, with Copy, the pencil, and the trash icon at the bottom.

Navigation: More → Competition → Quick Targets

10.3 Match Score Log

Log hit/miss results per stage (the screen is titled Match Log) and track a running match score. Match types are PRS, NRL, F-Class, Precision Rifle, and Custom, with a filter once you have more than one type. A match shows its score percentage, its points, and a whole-match hit factor (HF); each stage has a stage number, par time (10 to 600 s), targets (1 to 50), points possible, points scored, and a DNF targets count, plus an optional Elapsed Time that turns the stage into a timed hit-factor stage (points divided by seconds, USPSA / time-plus style). A Stage Score Chart shows a bar per stage. The log summarizes matches logged, best score, average score, and a trend line from two or more matches. On the iPhone, Export CSV writes a per-match file.

Match Log with no matches: "No Matches" and the + button at the top right.

The New Match sheet: Match Name, Date, Match Type (PRS here), optional Rifle, and Notes.

The Match Type menu: PRS, NRL, F-Class, Precision Rifle, and Custom.

The New Stage sheet: Stage number, par time, targets, points possible, Points Scored (with the 0% to 100% shortcuts), and the DNF targets stepper.

Typing an Elapsed Time (s) makes the stage a timed hit-factor stage: the Hit Factor row shows points divided by seconds (37 points in 20 s is 1.85).

A match: the score percentage and ring, points and whole-match hit factor (HF), and the stage list with its score, targets, par time, and HF, plus Add Stage.

The Match Log list with one match: the Summary block (Matches Logged, Best Score, Average Score) and the match grouped under its type with its score and points.

With two matches the Summary adds a trend line, and a Filter by Type row appears above the list, which is grouped by match type.

The Filter by Type menu: All, and each type that has a match (NRL and PRS here).

The Stage Score Chart (a bar per stage) with the Export CSV button below it.

Navigation: More → Competition → Match Score Log

10.4 Session Tracker

Track overall training and competition sessions over time — date, rifle (a session saved without a rifle shows as Unnamed Rifle in the list), rounds fired, elevation and windage click totals, a location name with Use Current Location (the GPS point is saved), an optional Record Conditions block (temperature, pressure, humidity, wind speed and direction), and notes. The detail screen shows the overview, location, atmosphere, corrections applied, notes, and short condition notes you can add. On the iPhone the list has Export CSV .

Session Tracker with no sessions: "No Sessions" and Tap + to log your first shooting session.

The New Session sheet: Session Info (Date, the Rifle menu, Rifle Name), Stats (Rounds Fired, Elevation Clicks, Windage Clicks), Location (Location Name and Use Current Location), Record Conditions (off), and Notes.

Record Conditions on: Temperature, Pressure, Humidity, Wind Speed, and Wind Direction fields appear.

The session list: each row shows the rifle, date, rounds, temperature, and wind, with Edit and + at the top.

A session's detail screen: Overview, Atmosphere, Corrections Applied, and the Add Condition Note button.

Add Condition Note opens a small Add Note alert with a text field, Cancel, and Add.

After Add, the note appears under Condition Notes with its time.

Navigation: More → Competition → Session Tracker

10.5 Stage Planner

Plan a stage before the buzzer: a name, the Class position (prone, kneeling, standing, or barricade), the par time, and up to 20 targets, each with range, size, 1 to 5 engagements, and a Bearing (°) (0° is straight ahead). In the New Stage sheet a target row holds its range and size side by side with the engagements stepper, and the bearing on the next line; the field names show only while a field is empty. Solve All Targets (pick a rifle) fills each target's hold; the holds go stale when the rifle or load changes. The detail screen shows a top-down stage map (the section is headed Range Card (top-down view); a polar plot by bearing and range, with the shooter at the center), a target card list, Start Par Timer, and Share Stage Card (PDF). Named plans are saved and restorable. Android's stage has a name, a time limit in seconds, and up to 20 targets, each with a range, a size, and an Azimuth (its name for the bearing); it has the same Solve All Targets, stage map, and Start Par Timer, but no shooting position, no engagements count, and no PDF stage card, which are iPhone only for now.

Stage Planner with no stages: "No Stages. Tap + to plan a PRS stage."

The New Stage sheet: Stage Info (Stage Name, Class position, Par Time in seconds) and Targets (0/20) with Add Target.

The position menu: Prone, Kneeling, Standing, and Barricade.

Two targets added: each row has the range, the size, the engagements stepper (x1, x2), and the bearing in degrees (-20 is left of straight ahead, 25 is right).

The saved stage in the list: name, position, par time, and target count.

The stage's detail sheet: Stage (name, position, par time, targets, total shots) and Solve Targets with the Rifle menu and Solve All Targets. Close and Edit are at the top.

The Rifle menu: Select Rifle and the rifles in the Armory.

After Solve All Targets with the 6.5 CM Match rifle: a line says which rifle solved the holds and when.

The top-down stage map (headed Range Card (top-down view)): the shooter at the center and a dot for each target by bearing and range.

The Target Card list (T1, T2 with range, size, shots, and the hold in MOA and MIL), then Start Par Timer and Share Stage Card (PDF).

Start Par Timer opens the Par Timer sheet: the stage's par time (30.0 seconds) in a ring with Start and Reset.

Share Stage Card (PDF) opens the iOS share sheet for the PDF (Copy, Markup, Print, Save to Files).

Navigation: More → Competition → Stage Planner

10.6 Range Sheet

For a range that posts a sheet of steel shapes by distance: pick a distance and a shape in two taps and read what to hold. The built-in 1000 Yard Range sheet holds 35 targets: seven distances (400 to 1,000 yd, every 100) with five shapes at each, from the sheet's printed sizes (triangle 8 in, square 10 in, hexagon 12 in, diamond 14 in, circle 16 in, octagon 18 in, large square 20 in). The sheet's name at the top is a menu: switch sheets, New Range Sheet, Duplicate to Edit (for the built-in sheet) or Duplicate, Edit, and Delete Range Sheet. In the editor each target has a distance (yd), a size (in), and a shape, and Add Target adds one; posted sheets use yards and inches, so the editor does too.

The built-in 1000 Yard Range sheet: the name menu and Near first menu at the top, the Score card with Reset Scores, and each distance with its EL and WD hold and its shapes (octagon, circle, hexagon, square, triangle).

The sheet's name menu: switch sheets, New Range Sheet, and Duplicate to Edit (the built-in sheet cannot be edited).

The order menu: Near first or Far first.

The New Range Sheet editor: Sheet name, Notes, Targets (distance in yd, size in inches, Shape menu) with Add Target, and the yards-and-inches note.

Each distance (Near first or Far first) shows the elevation (EL) and windage (WD) hold that the Calculator's current rifle, load, weather, and wind solve to, and each shape its size in the scope. Tap a shape for its target card: the size in the scope in MIL and MOA, the hold, the speed and energy there (with TRANSONIC or SUBSONIC when it is), big Hit and Miss buttons, its tally, and Undo. While a new solve runs, the sheet says Solving… instead of showing the earlier hold. A score card at the top totals the sheet ("12 of 15 hits"), and Reset Scores starts it over; the newest 3,000 shots per sheet are kept. Distances past where the load's trajectory ends, or past 5,000 yd, show no hold and say so. Sheets and scores are saved on the phone and ride the backup. Free on the sample rifles and Pro on your own (§24.5); it is also the first row of the Range Day Suite, and Android has it too.

A shape's target card: size in the scope (MIL and MOA), the elevation and windage hold, speed, time of flight, energy, big Hit and Miss buttons, and the tally with Undo.

After one Hit the score card reads 1 of 1 hits (100%) and the shape shows 1/1.

Navigation: More → Shoot → Range Sheet (or More → Suites → Range Day → Range Sheet)

11. Hunting

Hunting tools live under More → Hunting, which the Hunting Suite row leads; the section also holds Point Blank Range, Effective Range, Terminal Ballistics, and Moving Target, and its Related list adds the Range Planning Map, GPS Target Ranging, Wildfires & Public Lands, the Sight-In Assistant, the Come-Up Card / Scope Cap, the Danger Space Calculator (an Advanced-level row, §2, so at the Basic and Standard levels it turns up only through More's search), the Target Library, the Sound Delay Calculator, and Muzzle Blast / Noise Estimate.

More's Hunting section: the Hunting Suite row first, then Ethical Shot Distance, Shooting Light / Legal Hours, Shot Placement Reference, Shot & Recovery, Point Blank Range (MPBR), Effective Range Calculator, and Terminal Ballistics.

The same section further down: Moving Target, then the Related list (Range Planning Map, GPS Target Ranging, Wildfires & Public Lands, Sight-In Assistant, Come-Up Card / Scope Cap, Target Library).

The end of the Related list: Sound Delay Calculator and Muzzle Blast / Noise Estimate.

11.1 Ethical Shot Distance

Computes the maximum ethical shot range as the most restrictive of its limits: the energy limit (default 1,000 ft-lb; under Min Terminal Energy the screen says where it comes from: 1,000 ft-lbs is a typical legal minimum for deer, measured at the muzzle, while this tool checks energy at the target), MPBR with an optimized zero, and Wind + Accuracy (your group size at that range and the wind drift from your wind-read uncertainty, a slider of ±0 to 10 mph with a default of 5, combined as a root-sum-square and compared with half the vital-zone diameter), plus how far the trajectory solve reached. Choose a vital zone from the 16 presets (12 animals and 4 steel targets) or a custom diameter, and a Skill Level: Expert (0.5 MOA), Proficient (1.0 MOA, the default), Novice (2.0 MOA), or Custom (your measured group). Compute Ethical Max Range stays dimmed, with a note, until the vital zone, group size, muzzle velocity, BC, bullet weight, and minimum energy all hold positive values. The result is the Ethical Maximum with its limiting factor, and the breakdown marks the binding row. When no checked range passes, it reads No range with the reason in numbers instead of a bare 0 yd, and when nothing limits the range it says No limiting factor within the checked range. A trajectory that stopped short of 2,000 yd never counts as covering it. The screen calls the result the app's guideline, not a published standard, and dims it with an Outdated notice if you change an input.

The Ethical Shot Distance inputs: Vital Zone / Target (Custom Diameter switch, Preset menu, the zone's diameter), Shooter Capability (Skill Level, Group Size, Wind Uncertainty slider), and the start of Load Data.

The Preset menu: Whitetail Deer, Mule Deer, Elk, Moose, Black Bear, Pronghorn, Mountain Goat, Wild Boar, Coyote, Prairie Dog, Groundhog, and Fox.

The end of the Preset menu (scrolled): the last animals, then the four steel targets: IPSC/USPSA A-Zone, 8" Steel Plate, 12" Steel Plate, and PRS Mini (3").

Custom Diameter on: the Preset row is replaced by a Diameter (inches) field.

The Skill Level menu: Expert (0.5 MOA), Proficient (1.0 MOA, the default), Novice (2.0 MOA), and Custom (measured group).

Load Data: BC, Weight, Drag Model, and Min Terminal Energy (1000 ft-lb), with the note that 1,000 ft-lbs is a typical legal minimum measured at the muzzle while this tool checks energy at the target.

Conditions (temperature, pressure, humidity, altitude) and the Compute Ethical Max Range button.

Until positive values are entered, the Compute button is dimmed and a note lists what is missing.

The result: Ethical Maximum (310 yd) with the limiting factor, the line calling it the app's guideline, and the Breakdown (Energy limit, MPBR (optimized zero) marked as the binding row, Wind + Accuracy, Trajectory Coverage).

After an input changes (altitude here), the result dims and an orange Outdated notice asks for a recompute.

Navigation: More → Hunting → Ethical Shot Distance

11.2 Shooting Light / Legal Hours

The screen is titled Shooting Light. It calculates solar times for your GPS location (or typed coordinates and a time zone) using a pure-software solar algorithm (no network): a Civil Twilight Window with a countdown (Starts in…, Active — Ends in…, Ended … ago), a timeline, and Today and Tomorrow lists of astronomical, nautical, and civil dawn, sunrise, sunset, and civil, nautical, and astronomical dusk. These are astronomical times, not legal ones: legal shooting hours vary by state, species, and method, and are often a fixed offset from sunrise and sunset, so check your wildlife agency's regulations. Free.

With location access denied the Location block explains it and offers Try Again and Use Manual Coordinates, with a Time Zone menu.

With manual coordinates: the Civil Twilight Window (civil dawn to civil dusk, with the status countdown "Starts in 4h 25m"), the not-a-legal-window note, and the Timeline (night, civil twilight, daylight, and now).

The Today list: astronomical, nautical, and civil dawn, sunrise, sunset, and civil, nautical, and astronomical dusk. The Tomorrow list follows below it.

Navigation: More → Hunting → Shooting Light / Legal Hours

11.3 Shot Placement Reference

The screen is titled Shot Placement. It holds vital-zone references for 10 animals, on both phones, filed under Big Game and Varmint with a search box: whitetail deer, mule deer, elk, black bear, moose, wild boar / feral hog, pronghorn, mountain goat, coyote, and prairie dog. A Disclaimer at the bottom of the list says the data is a general educational reference. Each animal shows an "Image coming soon" tile where an illustration will go (the old drawings were removed until sourced illustrations are in); its requirements (vital-zone height, and minimum caliber and minimum energy where a source exists, marked "(estimate)" where it does not); the recommended shot angles, each with a vital-zone window, a minimum-energy floor checked live against the bullet energy you enter, and a success-rate note; the angles that are not recommended; field warnings; and a range slider (50 to 1,500 yd) giving the vital zone's MIL and MOA subtension at that distance.

The Shot Placement list (the screen title): Big Game animals with their vital-zone size and recommended caliber, and the Search animals box at the bottom.

The Varmint group (Coyote, Prairie Dog) and the Disclaimer at the bottom of the list.

Typing "Bear" in the search box narrows the list to Black Bear.

The search field with text typed: a clear (x) button inside the field and a close (X) button beside it.

An animal's page (Moose): the "Image coming soon" tile, Requirements (vital-zone height, minimum caliber, minimum energy), and the Muzzle Energy field you type into.

With 1,400 ft-lb entered, each angle's minimum-energy floor (1,500 ft-lb) shows a red mark. Below: Recommended Shot Angles, Other Angles (Not Recommended), and Field Warnings.

The Range Calculator (Vital Zone Angular Size): a Distance slider and box (300 yd) with the zone's subtension in MIL and MOA.

Navigation: More → Hunting → Shot Placement Reference

11.4 Shot & Recovery

Mark where the animal stood when you shot, mark where it went from wherever you are now, see it all on a map, and walk back to any mark with an arrow, even with no cell signal.

Mark the Shot. Laze the animal where it stood, then tap Mark Shot. Your position is the phone's GPS (a fix worse than ±30 m is refused: "GPS is ±…. A mark needs ±… or better", with Retry). The distance, angle, and bearing come from a connected Bluetooth rangefinder's latest reading when it sends its own bearing and is under two minutes old (Use Rangefinder Distance); otherwise type the laser's Distance (up to 3,000 yd or 2,743 m) and Angle (−89° to 89°), point the top of the phone where you lazed, and tap Capture Bearing (the phone's compass, with its accuracy; a low-accuracy compass asks for a figure-8). The pin lands at the level distance (range × cos(angle)) along that bearing.

Mark the Shot: Distance (yd), Angle, Capture Bearing (this Simulator has no compass, and says so), and the Mark Shot button.

Mark Drop / Last Seen. Add Mark places more pins of a chosen Type (Last Seen, Dropped, First Blood, Blood, Recovered), each measured from where you stand now; each is drawn with a line from the Shot and a note such as "Ran 200 yd NE (47°)". The Marks list shows each with its distance and bearing from the shooter, and a swipe deletes one (deleting the Shot deletes every mark, since they are measured from it). The map (Hybrid + Elevation, Satellite, or Standard) opens on the shooter, the pins, the lines, and your walked track.

Walk to It. Tap a pin for a big arrow pointing to it (the bearing from your GPS position, turned by the compass), the distance and bearing, live, with the GPS and compass accuracy. Hold the phone flat with its top pointing ahead. "You're at the mark" shows within 10 m (or the GPS accuracy, if larger). Your track is recorded and drawn on the map. It uses GPS and the compass only; map pictures may not load offline.

Everything is saved on a Hunt Log entry and stays on the phone (it rides the backup): opened from the More menu or the Hunting Suite, the first mark starts a new entry (outcome "Wounded — Not Recovered" until a Recovered mark makes it "Harvested"; an outcome you set yourself is never changed), and a saved Hunt Log entry has Map this shot. Location access is needed: without it the screen says so in a red message at the top, with an Open Settings button. Free; Android has the same screen.

Navigation: More → Hunting → Shot & Recovery (or More → Suites → Hunting → Field → Shot & Recovery, or a Hunt Log entry → Map this shot)

12. LE / Military / TAK

These tools live under More → LE / Military / TAK, which the Military / LE Suite row leads. They are Pro, apart from the DA Form 5517 Range Card (free on the sample rifles, §24.5) and the MGRS / Coordinate Converter and Machine Gun Range Card (no Pro needed), and their numbers are gated by an LE/Military access code (§12.10): the screens open to their layout and labels, with the values faded or replaced by placeholders and a banner reading "LE/Military Credentials Required" until a code is verified, and on the iPhone a locked row in More (every row of the section shows a padlock until a code is verified) opens the code-entry sheet first . Anti-Materiel (both platforms), and Glass Deflection and Barrier Penetration (Android), also show a Professional Use Notice first. Related tools listed under this section: Terminal Ballistics, Shooting Light / Legal Hours, and GPS Target Ranging, and the Danger Space Calculator, an Advanced-level row (§2) that at the Basic and Standard levels turns up only through More's search.

More's LE / Military / TAK section: the Military / LE Suite row (Advanced level), Glass Deflection Calculator, Precision Offset / Hold-Off, Barrier Penetration Data, Anti-Materiel Reference, DA Form 5517 Range Card, MGRS / Coordinate Converter, and Machine Gun Range Card. Every row carries a padlock.

The rest of the section: Machine Gun Range Card, TAK Server Connection, TAK Data Packages, TAK Missions (all locked), and the Related list (Terminal Ballistics, Shooting Light / Legal Hours, GPS Target Ranging).

Tapping any locked row opens the LE/Military Access sheet: an Access Code field with an eye button, a Verify button (dimmed until something is typed), and Request Access Code. Cancel closes it.

12.1 Glass Deflection Calculator

Estimates how much a glass pane deflects a bullet and where it lands, from deflection bands found in forensic studies rather than a single formula. Choose the glass (Automotive Windshield (Laminated), Side Window (Tempered), Plate Glass (Float), Polycarbonate / Lexan, or Plexiglass / Acrylic), the angle of incidence (0° to 75°, default 30°), the distance from the glass to the target (measured from the glass, not from you), and the bullet's weight and velocity at the glass. Outputs: an estimated deflection (1° to 5° for the three common glass types, with extreme cases up to about 26°), the offset past the glass as a band in inches or cm, the estimated energy loss, a penetration probability (High, Medium, Low, or Unlikely), and tactical notes. Polycarbonate and acrylic show no quantitative deflection range. The energy-loss and penetration cutoffs are the app's own estimates, and the screen says so.

The Glass Deflection Calculator row in More, with its padlock (the tool's screen is behind the LE/Military access code).

Navigation: More → LE / Military / TAK → Glass Deflection Calculator

12.2 Precision Offset / Hold-Off

Computes the hold needed to keep the projectile path clear of a non-threat, the same on both phones. Choose the hold direction (left, right, high, or low), the offset distance, and the range (up to 5,000 yd or 4,572 m), or tap a preset: Head 1.5″, Body edge 3″, Barrier 4″, or Window frame 6″. The Hold-Off result is the hold in MIL and MOA with its direction, with the size of that angle at 100 yd (or 100 m) and at the target, and a Formula section that ends "Aim this amount in the opposite direction of the obstacle to place the round at the offset distance."

The Precision Offset / Hold-Off row in More, with its padlock.

Navigation: More → LE / Military / TAK → Precision Offset / Hold-Off

12.3 Barrier Penetration Data

Rates how published tests treat a reference round against a barrier. It does not estimate residual energy, because no source gives it. Pick a Round (Calculator load or one of 12 reference rounds: 9 mm 124 gr FMJ, .357 Magnum 158 gr JSP, .44 Magnum 240 gr JHP, 5.56 mm M193 ball, 5.56 mm M855 ball, 5.56 mm armor-piercing, 7.62×39 mm mild-steel core, 7.62 mm M80 ball, 7.62 mm armor-piercing, .30-06 M2 armor-piercing, .50 caliber ball, and .50 caliber armor-piercing) and a range (0 to 500 yd or m). The screen lists 24 barriers in four groups: walls and buildings (13), vehicles and glass (2), field fortifications such as sandbags (4), and the NIJ body-armor levels HG1, HG2, RF1, RF2, and RF3 (5). Each row carries a verdict (Defeats: the round goes through; Marginal: it may; Stopped: a single round is stopped; Indeterminate: no published rating for this round) and a note quoting the source. Several ratings depend on range (for example, many walls stop 5.56 mm only under 50 m, and a single sandbag row is Marginal against 7.62 mm under 200 m and Defeats from 200 m), and notes for thicker barriers give the published number of rounds needed to breach. Armor rows list the rounds each level was tested with, and a reference round that is one of a level's test rounds reads Stopped. The Calculator load is rated against no barrier, because no published test covers it: every barrier reads Indeterminate, and the screen shows the load's impact speed and energy at the range you pick from the app's own solver. Custom Stack (View → Custom Stack, then Add Barrier) rates layers in order; the verdict comes from the front layer, and behind a layer that lets the round through, any other rating makes the stack Indeterminate. Sources, as printed on the screen: ATP 3-06.11 (September 2024) Appendix B, FM 3-06.11 (February 2002) Chapter 7, and NIJ Standard 0123.00 (October 2023).

The Barrier Penetration Data row in More, with its padlock.

Navigation: More → LE / Military / TAK → Barrier Penetration Data

12.4 Anti-Materiel Reference

Engagement reference for anti-materiel work across 11 target classes on both phones: light wheeled and armored vehicles, parked aircraft, helicopters, heavy trucks, APCs, radar and communications equipment, a communications / C2 node, fuel storage, industrial equipment, and small watercraft. Each class lists its vulnerable points with effective calibers and a maximum effective range marked as an estimate, a suggested minimum caliber, a minimum energy (marked "(estimate)" unless a published source is attached), and notes; a card also shows your own energy at that range from the Calculator's solution. Every screen carries a REFERENCE ONLY banner, and a Professional Use Notice appears first.

The Anti-Materiel Reference row in More, with its padlock.

Navigation: More → LE / Military / TAK → Anti-Materiel Reference

12.5 DA Form 5517 Range Card

A DA Form 5517 range card you fill in: Position Data (position ID, unit, weapon, MGRS grid with Use Current Location, altitude, magnetic north), Sector of Fire (left and right limits in mils, minimum and maximum range in meters), Ammunition, and Target Reference Points (number, description, azimuth, range, elevation and deflection in mils, and MGRS grid), with Add TRP for more. Generate DA 5517 Range Card builds a monospaced text card and Share / Export sends it through the share sheet. The Military / LE hub's Military Range Card row opens this same screen (on Android the hub's row opens this form, but the More row opens a separate screen with a header, sector limits, a tap-to-add sector-sketch canvas, a reference-points table, and a PDF share). (The Shoot section's "DA Range Card" is a different tool, §10.1.)

The DA Form 5517 Range Card row in More, with its padlock.

Navigation: More → LE / Military / TAK → DA Form 5517 Range Card

12.6 MGRS / Coordinate Converter

Converts between MGRS, decimal degrees, and degrees-minutes-seconds (DMS) on both phones: pick the Input Format, enter an MGRS grid or a latitude and longitude, choose the MGRS Precision (100 km down to 1 m; the default is 10 m), and tap Convert to see the MGRS, Decimal Degrees, and DMS results. MGRS is produced only between 80°S and 84°N. It does not need Pro, but it does need an LE/Military access code.

The MGRS / Coordinate Converter row in More, with its padlock.

Navigation: More → LE / Military / TAK → MGRS / Coordinate Converter

12.7 TAK Server Connection

Configure and connect to a TAK server (the screen is titled TAK Integration): server address and port over TCP or TLS, username and password, an API key, an optional .p12 client certificate (with expiry warnings) for mutual TLS, and server-certificate validation. Set your identity (callsign, team color, and role: Team Member, Team Lead, Sniper, Forward Observer, Medic, RTO, or HQ), the data you share (your position at 10-second to 5-minute intervals, ballistic solutions, and range cards), and the coordinate format (DD, DMS, MGRS, or UTM). Send Target Marker and Send Impact Marker broadcast markers. The status block shows connection status, last connected, messages sent and received, latency, and a Connected Users count, with a Live Contacts roster (callsign, team color, role) once you have LE/Military access. Received Events lists incoming CoT events with Total, SA, GeoChat, and Other counts, a filter, and a Clear button. Auto-reconnect backs off from 5 seconds up to 60. Over unencrypted TCP the app warns you each time position, solutions, or range cards would be sent. On the iPhone, received events are stored with Complete File Protection (unreadable while the phone is locked); Android encrypts them with AES-256-GCM. Secure Wipe erases TAK credentials, certificates, events, and packages, and stays reachable from More even after LE/Military access has lapsed.

The TAK Server Connection row in More, with its padlock.

Navigation: More → LE / Military / TAK → TAK Server Connection

12.8 TAK Data Packages

Export the CoT events this app has received as a .cotpkg file (Export N Event(s)), import a .cotpkg file exported by this app (Import .cotpkg File), and keep a list of Saved Packages (swipe to delete). Files are shared through Files or AirDrop. On the iPhone, a Settings switch lets package contents ride in the iCloud backup (package names always do). On Android the Data Packages row opens Received Events, which has the import and export.

The TAK Data Packages row in More, with its padlock.

Navigation: More → LE / Military / TAK → TAK Data Packages

12.9 TAK Missions

Browse the missions on your TAK server (each shows its name, description, and creator), Join or Leave one, and once joined tap Upload Package (with a confirmation; packages are limited to 50 MB). Missions need a username and password under TAK Integration, not only an API key; without them the screen reads "Mission Packages disabled". Without LE/Military access the screen is faded and no missions are fetched.

The TAK Missions row in More, with its padlock.

Navigation: More → LE / Military / TAK → TAK Missions

12.10 LE/Military access codes

The LE/Military tools open fully only with an access code. Enter it at Settings → LE/Military Access (on the iPhone you can also tap a locked row in More, or Enter Code on a banner; on Android, codes are entered only in Settings): type the code, tap Verify, and read the result — Access Granted, Invalid Code, Connection Error, or Code In Use. Request Access Code opens an email to support, and Revoke Access removes access from the phone. The code field hides what you type; the eye button shows it , and it hides again when you leave the app. New codes are short: eight characters, where case, dashes, and spaces do not matter and an O reads as 0 and an I or L as 1. A short code is checked only by the validation service, so its first use needs a connection. Version-2 codes (ZM2- and four groups of four characters) and older codes keep working, and a phone that was already verified stays unlocked when you update. Each code works for one person at a time: if another person or device already holds it, you see "This code is already in use by another person or on another device. If it's yours and you changed phones or added a device, email support@zima-logistics.com and we'll move it." The app re-checks a code you hold about once a day; if it now belongs to someone else, or the code has been withdrawn, access is removed and the next visit to the LE/Military area says why. With no signal, access you already hold stays. Delete All Data clears access.

Settings > LE/Military Access: the row shows its state (Not Verified).

The LE/Military Access screen in Settings: the Access Code field with the eye button, Verify (dimmed until a code is typed), and Need a Code? with Request Access Code.

The same entry sheet, as it opens from a locked row in More, with Cancel at the top.

Navigation: Settings → LE/Military Access

12.11 Machine Gun Range Card

A range card for a crew-served machine gun on its tripod, laid out like the data section of the DA Form 5517 and built only from public Army field manuals (ATP 3-21.8, TC 3-22.240, TC 3-22.249, and TC 3-22.50, with the older FM 3-22.68 used only where the current manuals are silent; their links are under Sources at the bottom of the screen). Pick the Weapon: M240, M249, or M2. The screen then shows the Mount (the M122A1 tripod with T&E for the M240 and M249, the M3 for the M2), the Cartridge (M80A1 ball for the M240, M855 ball for the M249, M33 ball or M8 API for the M2), the Muzzle velocity, the Tracer (burns out at about 900 m on the M240 and M249; seen from 91 to 1,460 m on the M2), the Beaten Zone (the manual's table rows from 500 to 2,000 m for the M240; "No public table" for the M249 and M2), and the Max Effective Range (1,800 m, 1,000 m, and 1,829 m).

The Machine Gun Range Card row in More, with its padlock.

Fill in a Position ID; the Sector of Fire (left and right limits in magnetic mils, the sector running clockwise from the left limit; Bar 0 on (mils), where the traversing bar's 0 points, which is the middle of the sector when you leave it empty; and the Max Engagement Line in meters, which starts at the gun's maximum effective range); and the Targets. Tap Add TRP for each target and give it a description, an azimuth (mils), a range (1 to 3,000 m), and a vertical angle (mils above or below the gun, up to 400), then choose the Elevation Reference, the target you lay the gun on and read the T&E. A target outside the sector is allowed but flagged "Outside the sector of fire." Generate Range Card is available once every field is valid, and Share / Export sends the card as text.

The card has the columns NO., AZ, DEFL, ELEV, RANGE, AMMO, and DESCRIPTION, with the left and right limits (LL, RL) first, then the targets. DEFL is the direction reading on the T&E, written L or R and the mils from the bar's 0 (the slide on a 5-mil mark of the bar plus 0 to 4 handwheel clicks, 1 mil each). ELEV counts elevating-handwheel clicks, 1 mil each, up or down from the reference target (REF, REF+12, REF-3). The remarks give the beaten zone at each range (the listed row, or the two rows either side, never a value in between), whether the tracer still shows there, and flag a target past the max engagement line, outside the sector (#), or off the traversing bar (*). The card leaves a blank for the reference target's T&E reading and is always in English, like the DA Form 5517 card. Nothing is saved: the card is made, shared, and printed from this screen.

The elevations come from the app's own solver in standard air at sea level with no wind, flying the bullet from the bullet catalog at the manual's muzzle velocity. Spin drift, Coriolis, and aerodynamic jump are left out on purpose, and the card says to confirm by fire. It also leaves out what no public manual gives: the size of the cone of fire, the M249 and M2 beaten zones, and readings on the T&E's elevation scales.

No Pro is needed (it uses catalog cartridges, not your rifle), but like the other LE/Military screens it needs an access code (§12.10): without one the form shows faded. It is on both phones, and it has its own switch under Forms in the Military / LE Suite's settings, on by default (§16.5).

Navigation: More → LE / Military / TAK → Machine Gun Range Card (or More → Suites → Military/LE → Forms)

13. Logging & Tracking

These tools are found in More's Shoot (Range Card), Logs & Analysis (Shot Log, the Sniper / Precision DOPE Book, and the Rifle Data Book), and Zero & Truing (Cold Bore Tracking, the Scope Click Tracker, and the MV Degradation Tracker) sections. Range Card is a default tab, and Shot Log can be pinned to the tab bar. The Range Card, the Sniper / Precision DOPE Book, the Scope Click Tracker, and the MV Degradation Tracker are free on the sample rifles and Pro on your own (§24.5); the Shot Log, Cold Bore Tracking, and the Rifle Data Book calculate no rifle and are free.

13.1 Range Card

The Range Card tab opens with a Simple / Full switch at the top, remembered on the phone (Simple until you pick Full).

The Range Card tab on Simple: the Simple / Full switch at the top, the rifle and load line, the collapsed Details row, and the table with Range, Velocity, Elevation in inches, Elevation in MIL, and Windage in MIL, with Share as Text and Share as Image below.

Simple is the card for the Calculator's own rifle, load, weather, and wind (what the Shoot view is solving): the rifle and load in one line, a collapsed Details with every input it was solved for and the Increment (10, 25, 50, or 100) and End Range (300 to 2,000; 100 and 1,000 by default, in yards or meters), then one table in large digits with every other row shaded and the headings kept in view as it scrolls: Range, Velocity, Elevation in inches or centimeters, Elevation in the turret's unit (allowing for its tracking), and Windage in the turret's unit whenever a row needs a windage correction, with hold arrows instead of signs (§4.18). It shows the same "Check this" lines as the Calculator, says where a short trajectory ends, and shares as text or as an image. With nothing solved it solves once to show the card. It is also one tap from the Shoot view (§4.15).

Details opened: the Increment and End Range choices, then every input the card was solved for (zero, sight height, click value, bullet, muzzle velocity, atmosphere, wind, and solver).

The Increment menu: 10, 25, 50, or 100 yd.

Share as Text opens the share sheet with the card as text.

Share as Image opens the share sheet with the card as a picture.

Full is the range card generator: pick a Profile and Load, set Start, End, and Increment, Atmosphere, Wind, and Options, and tap Generate Range Card. It applies your saved zero and cold-bore corrections the same way the Calculator does, and its tables carry the same hold arrows and range units. Opened from the Cards button, it starts from the Calculator's air and single wind (§4.11). The iPhone saves the card or shares it as text or PDF; Android's ⋮ menu has Export PDF, Export CSV, Export XLS, and Print (§20.1). With Hear the Hit switched on in the Columns editor (§4.8), the Full card gets a HEAR column after the time of flight, on screen and in its text and PDF versions: the seconds from the shot until you hear the hit. The Simple card does not carry it. Android has the same Simple card.

The Full side: the Profile picker, then the Range (Start, End, Increment), Atmosphere, and Wind cards.

The Profile menu: None and each saved rifle.

The Wind and Options cards (Solver, Spin Drift, Aerodynamic Jump, Coriolis) and the Generate Range Card button.

A generated Full card in MOA, with hold arrows and the Rng, MOA, VEL, NRG, and TOF columns.

The same Full card in MIL, with the elevation and windage holds as arrows.

Below the card: the Conditions line, then Save Range Card, Share as Text, Generate PDF, and Share PDF.

Share PDF opens the share sheet with the card's PDF.

After Save Range Card, the row reads Saved.

Navigation: Range Card tab → Simple / Full (or More → Shoot → Range Card)

13.2 Shot Log

A range-session log: date, range, shot count, elevation and windage clicks, a Cold Bore toggle, impact data and group size, conditions (temperature, pressure, humidity, altitude) and wind, location (Save Current Location, then Confirm This Location, or Replace With This Location once one is saved), and notes. A new fix within 100 m of the saved location counts as the same shooting spot and keeps the weather and altitude already on the entry; a fix farther away puts them back to unrecorded. Conditions you leave unchanged save blank rather than as standard air. For weather, the iPhone's Auto-fill from WeatherKit fetches the hourly reading nearest the shot's date and time at a saved location, and Android's Auto-fill from OpenMeteo fetches current conditions. The fill sets the wind speed and leaves the wind Direction as it was: the form's direction is against your line of fire (90° = from the right), and the weather service gives a compass bearing, so the bearing is written under the field ("Weather: wind from 270° on the compass…") for you to set the direction from. A fill that turns Record Wind on leaves Direction blank (unrecorded) until you type one, so saving at once records the speed without a default 90 degrees. For predicted-versus-actual tracking, the iPhone form shows the Calculator's predicted drop, windage, velocity, and energy (when the Calculator has a solution) beside your actual impact; Android saves the predicted values with the shot and lets you edit a saved entry. The iPhone adds Training Academy skill flags to a shot's read-only detail (§17).

The Shot Log with nothing logged yet, with the + button at the top right.

New Shot: Shot Data (Date, Range, Shot Count, the Cold Bore switch), Adjustments Applied, and the Predicted Solver Values.

Further down: the predicted velocity and energy, Impact (from POA) switches, and Conditions with Auto-fill from WeatherKit.

Conditions, Wind with the Record Wind switch, Location with Save Current Location, and Notes.

Record Wind switched on: Speed and Direction.

Auto-fill from WeatherKit before a location is saved: the form says to tap Save Current Location first.

Record Impact Data and Record Group Size switched on: the Vertical, Horizontal, and Group Size fields.

A saved shot in the list: the range, a CB tag for a cold-bore shot, the date, the group size, and the shot count.

A shot's detail screen: Shot Info, Adjustments, and Impact (from POA).

Further down the shot's detail: Conditions and the Training Academy Calibration card.

Swiping a row left shows its Delete button.

Navigation: Shot Log tab (or More → Logs & Analysis → Shot Log)

13.3 Sniper / Precision DOPE Book

A data book for recording confirmed firing solutions — date, location, rifle, range, target, atmosphere, a free-text Load / Ammo line, the holds dialed (elevation and windage), and the point-of-impact offset (POI V and POI H), with Hit, Miss, or No-shoot results and group size. On both phones you can start an entry from the last solve (the arrow button beside + ; it records the wind that solve used, the near leg with Multi-Segment Wind), filter by range, and search by location, rifle, or range. Each row's holds carry the hold arrows, so a come-down no longer reads as a come-up. The share button exports the whole book as a PDF (a ten-column table headed SNIPER / PRECISION RIFLE DOPE BOOK) or as CSV.

The DOPE Book before any entry: the Filter by Range row, the empty message, and the share, from-last-solve, and + buttons.

The new-entry form: Identification, Target, and Atmosphere.

Further down the form: Scope Settings, Point of Impact, Result, and Notes.

The Outcome menu: Hit, Miss, or No-shoot.

A saved entry in the list: the Hit tag, date, location, range, rifle, and the elevation and windage holds as arrows.

The DOPE Entry screen: Engagement and Atmosphere, with the Edit button at the top right.

Further down the entry: Scope Settings, Point of Impact, and Result.

Edit opens the same fields in an Edit Entry sheet with a Save button.

Filter by Range with Min and Max set to 300 and 500 yd, and the Clear Filter button.

The search field at the bottom: Search by location, rifle, range.

The share button's menu: Export as PDF and Export as CSV.

The PDF export: a table headed SNIPER / PRECISION RIFLE DOPE BOOK with ten columns (Date, Location, Rifle, Range, Elevation, Windage, POI V, POI H, Result, Notes).

Export as CSV opens the share sheet with a dope-book text file.

Navigation: More → Logs & Analysis → Sniper / Precision DOPE Book

13.4 Cold Bore Tracking

Builds a statistical model of your cold-bore (first-shot) behavior over time. Pick a rifle, then log each cold-bore shot's range , vertical and horizontal offset, temperature, and notes (the date is stamped for you); the Rolling Average card shows the mean offset on each axis from the first shot, adds the SD and a 95% confidence interval for each axis (V SD / 95% CI and H SD / 95% CI) from the second, and the tool plots the scatter. On the iPhone, Apply as Zero Offset (three or more shots) sets the Calculator's cold-bore zero base when that rifle is loaded; Android's Copy as Zero Offset copies the figures.

Cold Bore Tracking before any shot: the Rifle picker and the Log Cold Bore Shot form (Range, Vertical Offset, Horizontal Offset, Temperature, Computed MIL, Notes, Save Shot).

The Rifle menu lists the saved rifles; the averages, plot, and Apply use only the rifle picked.

A shot filled in: 100 yd, 0.4 in high, 0.2 in left, with the Computed MIL shown beside it.

The + button at the top right opens the Log Cold Bore Shot sheet with the same fields.

With three shots: the Rolling Average card with Mean Vertical and Horizontal Offset, V SD / 95% CI, H SD / 95% CI, and Apply as Zero Offset.

The Scatter Plot in MIL: each shot as a dot and the mean as dashed crosshair lines.

Shot History: each shot with its date, range, temperature, and offsets in MIL.

Navigation: More → Zero & Truing → Cold Bore Tracking

13.5 Scope Click Tracker

A per-rifle turret-session log (titled Scope Clicks): Log Session records up, down, right, and left clicks (and notes), and Cumulative Adjustments totals them as Net Elevation, Net Windage, and Total Travel. Turret Health shows the estimated travel in your angular unit against a fixed typical life of 50,000 MOA and rates it Good condition, Normal wear, Monitor closely, or Consider service / replacement; that life is an estimate, not manufacturer data. On the iPhone a session also records the rounds fired, and a Barrel Rounds section with a Rounds Fired bar compares the total with about 3,000 rounds (the Barrel Life tool tracks each barrel against its own caliber); on Android a session records its range instead, and there is no rounds count or barrel bar. Useful for warranty documentation and end-of-life prediction.

The Scope Clicks screen: the Rifle card, Cumulative Adjustments (Up, Down, Right, Left, Net Elevation, Net Windage, Total Travel, Total Rounds Fired), Turret Health, and Barrel Rounds.

The Log Session sheet: Elevation (Up and Down), Windage (Right and Left), Rounds Fired This Session, and Notes.

After one session: the Cumulative Adjustments totals and the Net Elevation, Net Windage, and Total Travel lines.

Turret Health: Estimated Travel against the 50000 MOA typical life with its Good condition rating, and the Barrel Rounds bar.

Session History: a logged session with its date, rounds, and click counts.

Navigation: More → Zero & Truing → Scope Click Tracker

13.6 MV Degradation Tracker

Tracks muzzle-velocity decline over a barrel's life. Set the Original MV with its slider (a second slider, Project at Rounds, picks the round count the projection is made for) and add (round count, MV) measurements — at least two; the tool plots MV against round count, fits a line, and reports the projected MV, the rate per 100 rounds, and the change from the original, and both phones flag MV Shift Detected when the projection is more than 25 fps from the original. Apply sends the projected muzzle velocity (500 to 5,000 fps) to the Calculator, after asking where it should go (§4.1). On the iPhone the measurements are not kept when you leave the screen; Android saves them per barrel.

The MV Degradation screen before any measurement: Parameters (Original MV and Project at Rounds), the Add Measurement button, and the Not Enough Data message.

The Add Measurement sheet: Round Count and Measured MV, with the allowed ranges under them.

Two measurements entered: Estimated MV with the Projected MV, and Degradation Statistics (Rate and Delta from Original).

The MV vs. Round Count chart with the fitted line and the original MV.

The Apply button, which sends the projected MV to the Calculator.

Apply first asks Where should this go?: Save to the load, New Load, or Just this solve (What-if).

Navigation: More → Zero & Truing → MV Degradation Tracker

13.7 Rifle Data Book

A structured training journal (titled Data Book) that records each range session, on both phones. Entries are grouped by month, with a search box (location, rifle, load, date), a + button to log a session , and a confirmation before a swipe deletes one. An entry holds the date, location, rifle, load / ammo, the atmosphere (density altitude, temperature, pressure, humidity, elevation, wind speed, and a wind direction as a clock position), hits and misses, and notes; its detail screen shows the session, conditions, and results with a hit rate, then an Export Range Card PDF button on the iPhone, and a DOPE card when the entry carries a stored DOPE table (a session logged with the + form has none). The iPhone entry has one range and exports the whole book as a PDF (the menu's Export PDF) and one entry's range card as a PDF; on Android a session takes several rows, each with its own range, an elevation and wind in MOA, and its hits and misses, and the book exports as CSV.

The Data Book with no entries: the + and ... buttons at the top right.

The search field: Search by location, rifle, load, date.

The New Entry sheet: Session, Atmospheric Conditions (with the wind clock position), Hits / Misses, and Notes.

A saved session under its month heading, with the rifle, location, range, load, date, and hits and misses.

An entry's detail sheet: Session and Conditions, with Close and Edit at the top.

Results with the hit rate, and the Export Range Card PDF button.

Export Range Card PDF, and the ... menu's Export PDF, open the share sheet with a PDF.

Delete asks Delete session? before it removes the session.

Navigation: More → Logs & Analysis → Rifle Data Book

14. Reticle Tools

The reticle tools are in More's Rifles & Gear section (the Reticle Library and Custom Reticles) and Shoot (the Reticle Simulator); the Target Library and the Sight-In Assistant sit in Rifles & Gear and Zero & Truing, and the Mil Relation Range Estimator is under Maps & Ranging.

Typing Reticle in More's search box lists Reticle Simulator, Reticle Library, Custom Reticles, Multi-Target Scene, and Mil Relation Range Estimator.

14.1 Reticle Library

A visual reference library with rendered artwork and quality tiers. The Reticles count above the list is the number of reticles the library lists (808 in this build with no filter on); the catalog behind it ships with the app and holds 1,152 optic listings from 22 brands, and several listings can share one reticle. The catalog updates over the air (§21.9), so both numbers can change. The artwork downloads the first time a reticle is drawn and is cached, and the artwork for the reticles on your saved rifles is fetched ahead on Wi-Fi so they draw with no signal. Each list row shows the reticle's name, its maker and scope line, a unit tag, and its grid spacing; opening one shows the rendered preview with a data-quality badge, a Specifications card (Manufacturer, Unit, Grid Spacing, Category), Key Features, a Range Estimation Formula, and a MOA / MIL Reference card (the subtension numbers themselves are listed in the Correct This Reticle's Data sheet, §14.3). The badge reads: Manufacturer artwork · exact holds, Manufacturer artwork · partial hold data, Manufacturer artwork, or Representative render · holdover data; entries still waiting for artwork say so and sort after the ones that have it. Search the list by name, sort it (Default, Name, Brand, Unit, Focal Plane, or Magnification) , and filter by unit (All, MIL, MOA) or manufacturer; a MOA / MIL converter and a range estimator sit at the bottom of the list. Use it to identify an unknown reticle, verify subtensions, or pick a reticle for the Reticle Simulator.

The Reticle Library: the Unit chips (All, MIL (MRAD), MOA), the Manufacturer chips, the Reticles (808) count, and each row with its picture, name, maker and scopes, grid spacing, and a MIL or MOA tag; the sort button is at the top right and the Search reticles field floats at the bottom.

The sort menu: Default, Name, Brand, Unit, Focal Plane, and Magnification.

The Unit chip set to MIL (MRAD): the count drops to Reticles (307).

MIL (MRAD) and the Vortex manufacturer chip together: Reticles (26).

Typing Horus in the Search reticles field: the list narrows to the 20 matching reticles.

A reticle's detail screen (EBR-2C): the rendered reticle, its quality badge, the Specifications card, the Correct This Reticle's Data row, and Key Features.

The quality badge under the picture reads Manufacturer artwork · partial hold data.

The quality badge on another reticle (Leupold TMR) reads Manufacturer artwork · exact holds.

The Specifications card: Manufacturer, Unit, Grid Spacing, and Category.

Further down the detail screen: Key Features and the Range Estimation Formula.

Further down the detail screen: the MOA / MIL Reference card (1 MIL at 100 yd, 1 MOA at 100 yd, 1 MIL = MOA, 1 MOA = MIL).

At the bottom of the list: the MOA / MIL Converter and the Range Estimator.

The MOA / MIL Converter: a Value field, a MIL (MRAD) / MOA switch, and the 1 MIL and 1 MOA equivalents.

The Range Estimator before anything is typed: Target Size (in), a MIL (MRAD) / MOA switch, Subtension, and the two formulas.

The Range Estimator with an 18 in target at 1.5 MIL: Estimated Range 333 yards (305 m).

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Reticle Library

14.2 Custom Reticles

Design a reticle on your computer in Reticle Studio (zimaballistics.com/reticle-studio), choose Export for App, and import the file here with Import Reticle File. Imported designs list under Imported Reticles (swipe to delete) and appear in the Reticle Simulator's picker like any other reticle. The in-app canvas editor was retired in favor of Reticle Studio. Pro.

Custom Reticles: the Design on your computer card with Open Reticle Studio and Import Reticle File, and the Imported Reticles list.

The Design on your computer card: Open Reticle Studio link and the Import Reticle File button.

Import Reticle File opens the iOS file picker (Recents, Shared, Browse); here it has no recent files.

Imported Reticles before anything is imported: No imported reticles yet.

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Custom Reticles

14.3 Correct a Reticle

If you spot a wrong number in a catalog reticle, you can correct it on your phone. Open the reticle in the Reticle Library and tap Correct This Reticle's Data under Specifications. You can edit its brand, name, units, focal plane, magnification range (base, minimum, and maximum), illumination, illumination colors, BDC calibration load, and each subtension; Where is this from? takes a source note, such as a page in the manual. Saving applies the correction at once: the reticle shows a pencil badge and "Your correction · not verified," a Your Correction section lists each changed field with the catalog's value beside it, and a reticle that was marked Exact drops to Strong. The correction is also sent anonymously to the Ballistics team so the catalog can improve for everyone (the status reads Sending…, Will send when you're online, or Sent); nothing that identifies you is sent. Restore Catalog Values removes your correction, and an unsent one is then not sent. Only catalog reticles can be corrected.

Correct This Reticle's Data sits under the Specifications card on a reticle's detail screen.

The Correct This Reticle's Data sheet: Cancel and Save at the top, the Reticle card (Brand, Name, Units, Focal Plane), Magnification (Base, Minimum, and Maximum Zoom), the Illuminated switch with BDC Calibration Load, and the first Subtensions.

The Reticle and Magnification cards: Brand, Name, Units, Focal Plane, and the three zoom values.

Illuminated switched on: the catalog's value is shown under it (Catalog: No), and the Red, Green, Amber, and White color switches appear.

The Subtensions list: each catalog number with its name, such as Subtension 4 (fineLineWidth10x), is an editable field.

At the bottom: the note about the catalog's order, the Where is this from? field (Manual page, maker's website...), and the line saying the correction is sent to the Ballistics team with nothing that identifies you.

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Reticle Library → (reticle) → Correct This Reticle's Data

15. Tools

Standalone utilities are found in More's Logs & Analysis (Group MOA Calculator), Maps & Ranging (Mil Relation Range Estimator and Sound Delay Calculator), Reference & Practice (Recoil Calculator, Muzzle Blast / Noise Estimate, and Wind Guide), and Shoot (Come-Up Card / Scope Cap) sections. Group MOA, Mil Relation, and Sound Delay (like Recoil) are free; the Come-Up Card is free on the sample rifles and Pro on your own (§24.5), and Muzzle Blast needs Pro.

15.1 Group MOA Calculator

Converts a measured group size and range to MOA, MIL (MRAD), inches at 100 yd, and cm at 100 m. Pick Inches / Yards or cm / Meters with the Unit System switch (numbers you have typed are converted, not erased), enter the Group Size (inches or cm) and the Range (yards or meters), and read the Results, an Equivalency (the group in MOA at your range, and how big 1 MOA is at that range), and a Reference list (1 MOA at 100 yd, 1 MIL at 100 m = 10 cm, and 1 MIL in MOA).

The Group MOA Calculator before anything is typed: the Unit System switch (Inches / Yards, cm / Meters), the Group Size (inches) and Range (yards) fields, a line reading Enter group size and range to see results, and the Reference list.

The Unit System switch set to cm / Meters (the other half is Inches / Yards).

A 1.5 in group at 300 yd: the Results card (MOA, MIL (MRAD), Inches @ 100 yd, cm @ 100 m) and the Equivalency card.

Results: 0.477 MOA, 0.139 MIL, 0.500" at 100 yd, and 1.39 cm at 100 m.

Equivalency: This group at 300 yd = 0.477 MOA, and At 300 yd, 1 MOA = 3.142".

Reference: 1 MOA at 100 yd (1.047"), 1 MIL at 100 m (10 cm), and 1 MIL = MOA (3.438 MOA).

After switching to cm / Meters the typed numbers are converted (3.81 cm at 274.32 m) and the results are the same.

Navigation: More → Logs & Analysis → Group MOA Calculator

15.2 Mil Relation Range Estimator

Estimates range from a known target size and its measured subtension via the mil-relation formula (Range = Target height × 1000 / MILs), with presets for common targets (or a custom height in meters) and a MIL / MOA choice. It shows the Estimated Range in meters and yards, an Inverse Check (the size that range gives back), and the Formula; a range past what the screen reports reads Out of Range. The screen itself is titled Mil Relation.

The Mil Relation screen before a measurement: the Angular Unit switch (MIL (MRAD), MOA), the Target Height Preset (Human standing (1.8 m / 72")) and Height, the Mils Measured field, a prompt line, and the Formula.

The Preset menu: Human standing (1.8 m / 72"), Human kneeling (0.9 m / 36"), Vehicle (2.5 m), Standard door (2.1 m), and Custom.

Preset set to Custom: a Height (meters) field appears.

A Vehicle (2.5 m) target measured at 2.5 mils: Estimated Range 1000 m and 1094 yd, and the Inverse Check.

Estimated Range in meters and yards, the Inverse Check (At 1000 m, a 2.50 m target subtends 2.500 MIL), and the Formula.

Angular Unit set to MOA: the field becomes MOA Measured and the Formula changes to Range (yd) = Target height (in) ÷ MOA × 95.493.

A measurement past what the screen reports: Estimated Range reads Out of Range in red.

Navigation: More → Maps & Ranging → Mil Relation Range Estimator

15.3 Sound Delay Calculator

Computes the total time from shot break to audible impact sound reaching the shooter — time of flight plus the return sound-travel time at the current temperature. Enter the Range and the ambient Temperature at the firing point (it starts from the Calculator's temperature; no altitude correction is applied on top of it), with a Metric display switch. With a load in the Calculator the Results show Speed of sound, Sound delay back, TOF to target, and Total wait time; without one, only the sound-return leg. The screen itself is titled Sound Delay.

The Sound Delay screen with a load in the Calculator: the Inputs card (Range (yd), Temperature (°F), and the Metric display switch), Time-of-Flight, Results, and the note under them.

Inputs: Range 1000 yd, Temperature 59 °F, and Metric display off.

Metric display switched on: Range (m) 914.4 and Temperature (°C) 15, the same numbers converted.

Results at 1,000 yd: Speed of sound 1116 fps (340.3 m/s), Sound delay back 2.7 s, TOF to target 1.521 s, and Total wait time 4.2 s.

The note under the results: expect to hear impact about 4.2 s after the shot, the speed of sound comes from the temperature as entered, and no altitude correction is applied on top of it.

The whole screen in metric: TOF at 914 m, and the same Results in meters per second.

Navigation: More → Maps & Ranging → Sound Delay Calculator

15.4 Come-Up Card / Scope Cap

Builds a compact printable PDF come-up card in three sizes (Scope Cap, 2.5″ × 1.5″; Arm Board, 3″ × 5″; and Letter, landscape) from a start, end, and step range, with column choices (drop in MOA, drop in MIL, clicks, velocity), a monospaced print font, a header line (rifle, load, density altitude or conditions), and a second line with the zero, click value, and date. Generate Card builds it and shows the finished card under the button, at its shape, with its printed width ruled above it and its height beside it (inches, or centimeters on a metric phone), and scrolls to it; only then does Share, Save or Print appear. Changing any input withdraws the card until you generate it again. The scope-cap card ends under its last row; the arm-board and letter cards keep their page. With a rifle loaded, the sight height and barrel length show the rifle's values, read-only, with Change in rifle opening the rifle's own editor; a change made there (or in the Armory) comes straight back to the card, which withdraws a card made for the old values. With no rifle loaded both are typed in. Android builds the same card. When the Calculator is solving from a second sight (§4.19), the Clicks option is not offered and the card prints holds only. Free on the sample rifles and Pro on your own (§24.5).

The Come-Up Card screen: Card Size (Arm Board (3" × 5")), the Range card (Start Range, End Range, Range Step), the Columns card (Drop (MOA), Drop (MIL), Clicks, Velocity), the Header card (Rifle, Load, DA / Conditions), and the start of Projectile.

The Card Size menu: Scope Cap (2.5" × 1.5"), Arm Board (3" × 5"), and Letter (landscape).

The Range card: Start Range 100 yd, End Range 1000 yd, and Range Step 100 yd.

The Columns card with only Drop (MIL) switched on; Drop (MOA), Clicks, and Velocity are off.

All four columns on: Clicks adds a MOA / MIL (MRAD) choice and a line reading 0.1 MIL per click · from rifle profile.

The Header card: Rifle (Name), Load (Description), and DA / Conditions (e.g. 5200 ft DA), the text for the first line of the card.

The drag model chip (G7), Muzzle Velocity (fps) 2700, Temp Sensitivity (fps/°F) with Work It Out From Two Readings, and Reference Temp (°F) 59.

The Firearm card with a rifle loaded: Barrel Length (in) and Sight Height (in) are the rifle's values with a Change in rifle link under each, then Twist Rate (1:) with its direction, Zero Distance (yd), and Turret Tracking (%).

The Atmosphere card: Presets, the Use Density Altitude switch, Altitude (ft ASL, optional), Temperature (°F), Pressure (inHg), Humidity (%), and the Density Altitude and Air Density read-outs.

A range that does not fit the card size: A Scope Cap (2.5" × 1.5") card fits 6 rows, but 10 were requested. Increase the step to about 180 yd, shorten the range, or pick a larger card size.

Generate Card on the Arm Board size: the finished card appears under the button at its shape, 3" wide and 5" high, with the Zero and Date line and a YD / MIL table.

The finished Arm Board card up close, with its printed width (3") ruled above it and its height (5") beside it.

The Scope Cap card: 2.5" wide and 1.1" high, ending under its last row, with the MOA and MIL columns at a 200 yd step.

The Scope Cap card up close: five rows (100, 300, 500, 700, and 900 yd) with MOA and MIL columns.

Letter (landscape): the finished card is 11" wide and 8.5" high, with the header line (rifle and load), the Zero, click value, and Date line, and the YD column with all four choices (MOA, MIL, CLK, VEL).

Share, Save or Print, which appears once the card has been generated.

Share, Save or Print opens the iOS share sheet with the card as a PDF Document (13 KB): Preview, More, Copy, Markup, Print, and Save to Files.

Changing any input withdraws the card and shows Inputs changed — generate the card again.

Change in rifle opens the rifle's own Edit Rifle sheet (Done at the top right): Rifle, Twist, and Optic cards.

Navigation: More → Shoot → Come-Up Card / Scope Cap (also from Calculate → Quick Actions)

15.5 Muzzle Blast / Noise Estimate

Estimates the muzzle-blast sound level (dB) from bore area, barrel length, and cartridge energy, with a suppressor attenuation field (default 25 dB), a hearing-protection recommendation (NRR 22+, 25+, or double protection, by level), an explanation of OSHA's 140 dB peak limit, and a table of peak levels at the ear for common cartridges. Levels with no published source are marked "(estimate)". It does not give a permissible shot count, because none exists for unprotected ears.

The Muzzle Blast screen: Estimated Muzzle Blast 163 dB (Unsuppressed), the Hearing Protection card, and the start of Firearm Setup (Caliber .308 Win).

The estimate card: 163 dB, Unsuppressed, with the line Estimate from a simple model of bore size, barrel length and muzzle energy. Not a measurement.

Hearing Protection at 163 dB: Extreme risk, double protection (plugs + muffs) required, the note that OSHA treats 140 dB peak as a ceiling, and the line that the 150 and 160 dB bands are this app's own, not from a published standard.

Firearm Setup: Caliber .308 Win, the Custom Bore Diameter switch, and Barrel Length (in) 24.

The Suppressor card: the Suppressed switch on and Attenuation (dB) 25, with the line that published suppressor reductions run from about 7 to 32 dB (NHCA, 2017).

Suppressed with the 25 dB default: the estimate drops to 138 dB (shown in yellow).

At 138 dB the Hearing Protection card reads: hearing protection required, plugs or muffs (NRR 22+) for every shot.

A suppressed estimate of 148 dB, shown in orange.

At 148 dB the Hearing Protection card reads: NRR 25+ plugs or muffs, and double protection for sustained strings.

Common Caliber Reference (Unsuppressed): .22 LR at about 142 dB, then .223 Rem, .308 Win, 6.5 CM, .300 Win Mag, .338 LM, and .50 BMG, each marked (estimate) where no published figure exists.

Navigation: More → Reference & Practice → Muzzle Blast / Noise Estimate

15.6 Wind Guide

A free reference card for estimating wind: the Beaufort scale, mirage, flag and vegetation angle, and the clock method for turning a wind value into a hold. It is a row in More's Reference & Practice section (Wind Guide), and also opens from Training Academy → Field Practice → Wind Estimation Guide, from Range Day Suite → Wind Estimation, from global search ("Wind Guide"), or pinned to the tab bar. Wind Training and Range Training sit beside it in Reference & Practice.

Typing Wind Guide in More's search box lists Wind Guide (Wind estimation reference).

The Wind Guide: the Beaufort Scale table (force 0 Calm to 6 Strong+, with mph and field indicators) and Mirage Reading (Spotting Scope) bands from Boiling, no drift (0-2 mph) to Too flat to read (12+ mph).

Flag / Vegetation Angle: a flag at 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, and 90° means about 4, 8, 11, 15, and 22+ mph, with the rule of thumb (wind speed ≈ flag angle ÷ 4).

Clock / Wind Value Method: Full Value (×1.0), Near-Full Value (×0.87), Half Value (×0.5), and No Value (×0.0), with the Apply line (wind hold = speed × range factor × value multiplier).

The same Wind Guide opens from the Range Day hub: the Wind Estimation row (Read flags / mirage).

And from the Training Academy's Field Practice: the Wind Estimation Training and Wind Estimation Guide rows, where Wind Estimation Guide opens the same Wind Guide.

Navigation: More → Reference & Practice → Wind Guide (or Training Academy → Field Practice → Wind Estimation Guide)

16. Suites

Domain suites live under More → Suites, the first section after Settings. All suites are on in this version, and every hub is Pro. Most hubs open on a strip of counts and then a menu of their own sections (AI Insights is the exception, below). The More rows read Range Day Suite, Armory Suite, Hunting Suite, Competition Suite, Analysis Suite, and Reloading Suite, but each hub's own title drops the word Suite (Range Day, Armory, Hunting, Competition, Analysis, Reloading). The slider icon at the top right opens the hub's own settings screen , where you switch sections and rows on or off and choose a one-tap preset. The Pro tools a suite holds also stay listed in their own More sections, marked with the suite's name (for example In Hunting Suite, §3); a tool a free shooter can open keeps its plain entry. A hub's Training section links to the Training Academy: the iPhone lists the pillars that fit the hub above an All Training row, and Android has the single All Training row. The Analysis and AI Insights hubs have no Training section. The Suite Picker in onboarding (§2) quiets the suites you did not pick: on the iPhone it sets those hubs to their Minimal preset, and on Android it hides those hubs from the Suites list. The Armory, Military / LE, Analysis, and AI Insights hubs are never touched by it.

More's Suites section, the first section after Settings: Training Academy, Range Day Suite, Armory Suite, Hunting Suite, Competition Suite, Military / LE Suite (with its lock), Analysis Suite, and AI Insights.

The rest of the Suites section after scrolling: Hunting Suite, Competition Suite, Military / LE Suite (locked), Analysis Suite, AI Insights, and Reloading Suite.

16.1 Range Day Suite

A range-session workflow hub bundling the day's planning, logging, and analysis surfaces: Range Sheet as its first row, always shown and not behind a switch (§10.6); a This Year strip (trips Planned and Done this year, All Locations saved, and Rounds YTD); Plan (Pre-Trip Planner, Saved Locations, Range Planning Map, Wildfires & Public Lands, Find a Range); Shoot (Quick Solve, Field Mode, HUD, Range Card, DA Range Card, DOPE Book, Cold Bore, Sight-In Assistant, Multi-Target Solver, Rapid Engagement (Quick Targets), Stage Planner, Wind Estimation, Shooting Light); Record (Range Trips, Session Tracker, Match Log); Analyze (Shooting History); Reference (a 40-term glossary); and Training. The presets are Show everything, Planning only (Plan and Reference), At the range (the strip, Shoot, and Record), and Minimal. Android also lists My Spots under Plan, with Saved Locations.

The Range Day hub: the Range Sheet row first, then the This Year strip and the Plan and Shoot sections, with the slider icon at the top right.

Range Sheet (Posted shapes by distance), the first row, with no switch behind it.

The This Year strip: Planned, Done, All Locations, and Rounds YTD, all zero on the test phone.

Plan: Pre-Trip Planner, Saved Locations, Range Planning Map, Wildfires & Public Lands, and Find a Range.

Shoot, first part: Quick Solve, Field Mode, HUD, Range Card, DA Range Card, DOPE Book, Cold Bore, and Sight-In Assistant.

Shoot, second part: Multi-Target Solver, Rapid Engagement, Stage Planner, Wind Estimation, and Shooting Light.

Record: Range Trips, Session Tracker, and Match Log.

Analyze: Shooting History (Rounds, cost, locations, time).

Reference: Glossary (Range-day terminology).

Training: The Field, The Air, The Math, and the All Training row at the bottom, which opens the Training Academy.

The slider icon opens Range Day Settings (Done at the top right): the Presets list, the Hub Header switch, and a switch for every section and row.

The four presets: Show everything, Planning only, At the range, and Minimal, with the line Presets are a starting point, tweak individual toggles below to taste.

Hub Header: the Show this-year glance row switch, which turns the This Year strip on or off.

The Shoot section's own switch (Show 'Shoot' section) and a switch for each row under it.

The end of the settings screen: Record, Analyze, Reference, and Training each have a section switch, and a note says hidden features are paused, not deleted.

After choosing the At the range preset the hub shows Range Sheet, This Year, and Shoot, and the Plan section is gone (the preset was changed back to Show everything afterward).

Navigation: More → Suites → Range Day Suite

16.2 Armory Suite

A deepened gun-room hub for managing rifles, loads, optics, and equipment: a Quick Glance strip (Rifles, Service entries, Active brls for active barrels, and Invested); Roster (Rifle Profiles, and Optics, where you move an optic between rifles and each keeps its zero); Inventory (Ammo Inventory, where ammo lots can be edited and a quantity below the rounds already fired is refused); Service (Service Log, Zero Verifications, Optic History, Barrel Timeline, and Documents, a file picker and viewer for receipts, FFL transfers, manuals, warranties, appraisals, photos, and serial number records); Track (Barrel Life, Suppressors, Scope Click Tracker, MV Degradation, Cold Bore); Tune (Truing, Virtual Turret, Turret Test, DOPE Trend); Verify, the "Truing Fold" of calibration and proof tools that confirm the rifle, scope, ammo, and solver are doing what you said (Truing, Shot Analysis, Shot Group Analyzer, Shot Book, Turret Tracking Test, Chrono String Stats, and a Rifle Trust Score from 0 to 100 built from zero stability, turret tracking, cold-bore consistency, chronograph SD, and service freshness, on the app's own scale; a part you have not measured is left out rather than counted against you, and a rifle with too little measured shows Not scored); Analyze (Value & Investment, Accuracy History); Reference (a 54-term domain glossary); and Training. The presets are Show everything, Service-focused, Tune-focused, Verify-focused, and Minimal. Android also keeps a Tools section (Sight-In Assistant and Drag Coefficient) that no switch hides.

The Armory hub: the Quick Glance strip, then Roster, Inventory, and Service, with the slider icon at the top right.

The Quick Glance strip: Rifles (5), Service, Active brls, and Invested ($0).

Roster: Rifle Profiles (Your rifle roster) and Optics (Move an optic between rifles; each keeps its zero).

Inventory: Ammo Inventory (Track ammunition stock by lot and type).

Service: Service Log, Zero Verifications, Optic History, Barrel Timeline, and Documents (Receipts, FFL, manual, warranty).

Track: Barrel Life, Suppressors, Scope Click Tracker, MV Degradation, and Cold Bore.

Tune: Truing, Virtual Turret, Turret Test, and DOPE Trend Analysis.

Verify, with its line about the Truing Fold (calibration and proof tools that confirm the rifle, scope, ammo, and solver): Truing, Shot Analysis, Shot Group Analyzer, and Shot Book.

The rest of Verify: Turret Tracking Test, Chrono String Stats, and Rifle Trust Score (Composite per-rifle reliability).

The Rifle Trust Score screen: the Summary card (Fleet average, Not scored, 0 of 5 rifles scored) and a Roster of the five rifles, each Not scored with its missing parts listed.

The Summary card: Fleet average, Not scored, 0 of 5 rifles scored.

The Roster: every rifle shows a dash ring and Not scored, with notes such as Zero stability: not verified yet and Turret tracking: not verified yet.

The notes under the roster: Trust Score is a guideline that weights five proofs from your own data, a part you have not measured is left out (it neither helps nor hurts), and until half the scale is measured the rifle shows Not scored. It is the app's own scale, not a standard.

Tapping a rifle opens its Trust Breakdown: .308 Precision reads Not scored, measure at least 2 more components.

The five components, each Not scored for want of data: Zero stability, Turret tracking, Cold bore consistency, Chrono SD, and Service freshness.

Analyze: Value & Investment and Accuracy History.

Reference: Glossary (Armory terminology).

Training: The Optic, Fundamentals, and the All Training row.

Armory Settings: the Presets list, the Hub Header switch, and the section and row switches.

The five presets: Show everything, Service-focused, Tune-focused, Verify-focused, and Minimal.

Navigation: More → Suites → Armory Suite

16.3 Hunting Suite

A hunt-planning and record hub: a This Season strip (Active Tags, Harvests YTD, Scouting, and Planned, all counted for the current calendar year); Plan (Hunt Planner, Tag Tracker, State DNR Links for all 50 states); Scout (Scouting Journal); Field (Ethical Shot Distance, Shot Placement, Legal Hours / Light, Shot & Recovery (§11.4), which has its own switch in the hub's settings and is on in the "Show everything" and "Active hunt" presets); Record (Hunt Log, Season Summary); Reference (Hunting Reference, with caliber-suitability notes, shot-placement fundamentals, ethics, and links to agency sites, and a 55-term glossary); and Training. The presets are Show everything, Season prep, Active hunt, and Minimal (legacy view). The Hunt form records live, dressed, and hanging weight.

The Hunting hub: the This Season strip, then Plan, Scout, and Field, with the slider icon at the top right.

The This Season strip: Active Tags, Harvests YTD, Scouting, and Planned, with the note that counts cover the current season.

Plan: Hunt Planner, Tag Tracker, and State DNR Links.

Scout: Scouting Journal (Trail cam, sign, glassing).

Field: Ethical Shot Distance, Shot Placement, Legal Hours / Light, and Shot & Recovery.

Reference: Hunting Reference (Caliber suitability, shot placement, ethics) and Glossary.

Training: The Hunt, The Field, and the All Training row.

Hunting Settings: the Presets list, the Hub Header switch (Show season counts row), and the section and row switches.

The four presets: Show everything, Season prep, Active hunt, and Minimal (legacy view).

The Field section's switches, including the one for Shot & Recovery (last in the list).

Navigation: More → Suites → Hunting Suite

16.4 Competition Suite

A match-planning and analytics hub: a This Year strip (Matches, the Next match, Stages, and Loadouts); Plan (Match Calendar, Stage Builder, Equipment Loadouts); Match Day (Match Day Workflow, Stage Planner, Competition Mode); Record (Match Log); Analyze (Match Career, with finish percentiles worked out from your finish position and the size of the field. On the iPhone it shows lifetime results with average and best finish percentile; investment as entry fees, travel, lodging, total spent, cost per completed match, and cost per percentile point; results by year and by division; and your three best and three worst matches by points percentage. Android shows lifetime results with average and best finish and average points; investment as total spent, average per match, and cost per percentile point; results by discipline; and a finish trend of your recent matches); Reference (a disciplines reference covering PRS, NRL, NRL Hunter, ELR, King of 2 Miles, F-Class, and Bench Rest, and a 43-term glossary); and Training. The presets are Show everything, Planning only, Match-day workflow, and Minimal (legacy view).

The Competition hub: the This Year strip, then Plan and Match Day, with the slider icon at the top right.

The This Year strip: Matches, Next (None), Stages, and Loadouts.

Plan: Match Calendar, Stage Builder, and Equipment Loadouts.

Match Day: Match Day Workflow, Stage Planner, and Competition Mode.

Record: Match Log (All-time match results).

Analyze: Match Career (Lifetime trends + ROI).

Match Career with no matches logged: a Lifetime card (Total matches, Completed matches, Total rounds fired) and an Investment card (Entry fees, Travel, Lodging, Total spent), all zero.

Reference: Disciplines (PRS, NRL, ELR, F-Class, etc.) and Glossary.

Training: The Field, The Math, and the All Training row.

Competition Settings: the Presets list, the Hub Header switch (Show season summary row), and the section and row switches.

The four presets: Show everything, Planning only, Match-day workflow, and Minimal (legacy view).

Navigation: More → Suites → Competition Suite

16.5 Military/LE Suite

A professional hub (titled Military / LE) that bundles the LE/Military tools: an Activity strip (Missions YTD, the date of the Last mission, Rounds, and your TAK status); Comms (TAK Server, Data Packages, and Missions; on the iPhone the Missions row also holds Marker Send and reads Missions + Marker Send, and on Android Marker Send is its own row); Forms (the Military Range Card, which is the DA Form 5517 screen, §12.5; the Machine Gun Range Card, §12.11; and the MGRS Converter, §12.6), each with its own switch in the suite's settings; Ballistic Add-ons (Glass Deflection, Precision Offset, Barrier Penetration, Anti-Materiel, Muzzle Blast, Sound Delay); Mission (Mission Planner and Mission Log); Reference (an Operations Reference of five short articles on calling for fire, reading MGRS, land navigation, range-estimation methods, and the 9-line MEDEVAC structure, and a 41-term glossary); and Training. The presets are Show everything, TAK ops, Field only, and Minimal. The Mission Log records each mission's type (Training, Operations, Demo / Exhibit, Qualification, Planned), classification (Unclassified, Sensitive, Restricted), location, shots and hits, and notes. On the iPhone, Sensitive and Restricted entries are withheld from every export, share, and transmission unless you switch on Include Sensitive or Include Restricted under Allowed to leave this device, and they are never in an iCloud backup. The Military / LE Suite row shows a lock on both phones until an LE / Military access code is verified, and the iPhone asks for the code when you open it (§12.10).

The Military / LE Suite row in More: a lock sits at the right edge until an LE / Military access code has been verified.

Navigation: More → Suites → Military / LE Suite

16.6 Analysis Suite

A hub for the analysis tools: an At a Glance strip (Snapshots, Rifles, and average confidence); Trajectory (3D Trajectory, Multi-Rifle Drop Table, Multi-Target Solver); Probability & Ranges (WEZ, Effective Range, Point Blank Range, Danger Space, Zero Distance Explorer, Moving Target); Curves & Cd (SDF Table, Zero Shift Table, Custom Drag Curves, Drag Curve Editor, Cd Measurement, BC Back-Calc, DSF Library); Comparisons (Load Comparison, DOPE Trend Analysis, Terminal Ballistics); and Diagnostics (the Confidence Index and a 33-term glossary). The Confidence Index scores each rifle from 0 to 100 from up to four measured parts (the Breakdown's Group MOA, Turret tracking, DOPE stability for zero drift, and Chrono consistency rows; a fifth row, Validation score, only sums up group size, turret tracking, and zero stability as a summary and is not counted again) and labels it Excellent (85 and up), Good (70 to 85), Caution (50 to 70), or Rebuild (below 50); with only one measured part it never rates above Caution, and with two it is never Excellent. It is the app's own scale, not a published standard. The presets are Show everything, Trajectory focus, Probability focus, Curves focus, and Minimal (hide Suite).

The Analysis hub: the At a Glance strip, then Trajectory and Probability & Ranges, with the slider icon at the top right.

The At a Glance strip: Snapshots (0), Rifles (5), and Avg Conf (a dash, with nothing scored yet).

Trajectory: 3D Trajectory, Multi-Rifle Drop Table, and Multi-Target Solver.

Probability & Ranges: WEZ Analysis, Effective Range, Point Blank Range, Danger Space, Zero Distance Explorer, and Moving Target.

Curves & Cd: SDF Table, Zero Shift Table, Custom Drag Curves, Drag Curve Editor, Cd Measurement, BC Back-Calc, and DSF Library.

Comparisons: Load Comparison, DOPE Trend Analysis, and Terminal Ballistics.

Diagnostics: Confidence Index (with a New badge) and Glossary.

The Confidence Index: one row per rifle, each reading Not scored yet, with the note that this is the app's own score and scale, not a standard.

A rifle's Confidence Index: .308 Precision reads Not scored yet, with a Breakdown card and a History card that says to tap Save Snapshot above.

The breakdown rows, each Not measured: Validation score, Turret tracking, DOPE stability, Group MOA, and Chrono consistency.

Analysis Settings: the Presets list, the Hub Header switch (Show at-a-glance row), and the section and row switches.

The five presets: Show everything, Trajectory focus, Probability focus, Curves focus, and Minimal (hide Suite).

Navigation: More → Suites → Analysis Suite

16.7 AI Insights

An on-device, rule-based insights engine on both platforms. Its screen opens with an On-device only card and a Powered by line naming the engine in use, then three parts. Load Recommendation, for each rifle: pick Target, Hunting, or Competition under Input, and it uses the loads tied to that rifle's caliber plus your last 90 days of chronograph and shot-log data. Zero Drift Prediction, for each rifle: enter the current and the expected temperature and tap Run insight; it fits a straight line through your zero verifications and needs at least three of them with conditions recorded, spanning at least 5 °F. Harvest Potential, for each active hunt plan: choose the moon phase, type a forecast (temperature, wind, chance of precipitation, and sky), and tap Run insight; the result reads as a percent potential with a confidence badge, built from your scouting density, how recent your sightings are, the moon phase, the forecast, and a small bonus for mature or trophy animals in your scouting notes. A Recent Inferences list shows the 10 most recent predictions, and the app keeps the newest 200. The slider icon opens its settings: Log inferences locally (on by default), Delete all inference logs, and, on the iPhone, a Use Foundation Models when available switch. On the iPhone a prediction can be handed to Apple's on-device Foundation Models on iOS 26 or later with Apple Intelligence available, that switch on, and a language the model supports; otherwise the rule-based engine runs. Android is rule-based only. Every prediction is worked out on the phone and no server sees your inputs; the saved log of past predictions goes into your backups (the iCloud backup on the iPhone, and backups and exports you create yourself on Android).

The AI Insights screen: the On-device only card, the Powered by line, then a section per rifle with Load Recommendation and Zero Drift Prediction rows, and the slider icon at the top right.

The On-device only card: every prediction runs on the phone, no server computes or sees your inputs or the model outputs, and the saved record of each inference stays on the device and may sync to your iCloud backup.

The Powered by line names the engine in use: On-device Foundation Model.

Each rifle has its own two rows: Load Recommendation (Best load for what you've actually shot) and Zero Drift Prediction (Expected POI shift for tomorrow's conditions).

Load Recommendation for one rifle: the rifle card, the Input choice (Target, Hunting, Competition), the Run insight button, and the Recommendation card.

The Input choice: Target, Hunting, or Competition, with the line that the insight uses the loads tied to this rifle's caliber, plus the last 90 days of chrono and shot-log data.

The Recommendation card with too little data: Not enough data yet, log at least one chronograph session or shot group, then check back.

Zero Drift Prediction for one rifle: the Temperature (°F) card (Current conditions and Expected conditions), the Run insight button, and the on-device note.

Current conditions 60 °F and Expected conditions 60 °F, with the line that the prediction is a linear fit across your logged Zero Verifications and needs at least 3 entries with a 5 °F temperature spread.

AI Insights Settings (Done at the top right): Use Foundation Models when available, Log inferences locally, Delete all inference logs, and the All inference is on-device note.

Insight engine: the Use Foundation Models when available switch (On-device Foundation Model), with the note that on iOS 26 and later inference can go to Apple's on-device Foundation Models, and otherwise a rule-based engine runs.

Logging: the Log inferences locally switch, on by default.

The Delete all inference logs button (shown, not pressed).

The note at the bottom: all inference is on-device, nothing about your loads, rifle, hunts, or shooting history goes to any server, and the saved log may sync to your iCloud backup, encrypted in transit.

Navigation: More → Suites → AI Insights

16.8 Reloading Suite

A full reloading hub: an On Hand strip (Powders, Primers, Bullets, and Brass lots), Develop (Load Development, Charge Ladder Regression, My Load Library), Track (Component Inventory, Brass Life, Case Prep Log, Powder Storage, Pressure Sign Log), Test (Chronograph Session, MV Degradation Tracker, Barrel Life, Charge SD Tracker), Records (Reload Sessions, Cost Per Round), Reference (Component Compatibility, Load Data & Standards links, and a 62-term glossary), and Training, with cross-referenced load/chrono data. Component Inventory has a toolbar menu on its Powder, Primer, Bullet, and Brass tabs with Import CSV…, Export CSV…, and Download Blank Template: export your inventory, edit it in a spreadsheet, and import it back. A row with the same id updates that lot, and a blank id adds a new one; a row with a bad cell is rejected and reported, lines starting with # are ignored, dates are yyyy-MM-dd, and files can hold up to 20,000 rows and 4 MB (about 5 MB on Android). Ammo lots can be edited afterward. Every reloading page ends with a "Missing something you want to track?" link for requesting a field, and the hub's settings screen has section and row toggles and four layout presets: Show everything, Essentials only, Bench workflow, and Minimal (legacy view).

The Reloading hub: the On Hand strip, then Develop and Track, with the slider icon at the top right.

The On Hand strip: Powders, Primers, Bullets, and Brass, all zero on the test phone.

Develop: Load Development, Charge Ladder Regression, and My Load Library.

Track: Component Inventory, Brass Life, Case Prep Log, Powder Storage, and Pressure Sign Log.

Test: Chronograph Session, MV Degradation Tracker, Barrel Life, and Charge SD Tracker.

Records: Reload Sessions and Cost Per Round.

Reference: Component Compatibility, Load Data & Standards, and Glossary.

Training: The Math and the All Training row.

Component Inventory: the Powder, Primer, Bullet, and Brass tabs, the + button, and the share-style button that holds the CSV menu.

The CSV menu: Import CSV..., Export CSV..., and Download Blank Template.

The Brass tab with no lots: No Brass Lots, Tap + to log your first batch of brass, with the Missing something you want to track? link under it.

The Missing something you want to track? link that ends every reloading page (Tell us the section, setting, or field you need and we'll add it). It was not opened.

Reloading Settings: the Presets list, the Hub Header switch (Show on-hand counts row), and the section and row switches.

The four presets: Show everything, Essentials only, Bench workflow, and Minimal (legacy view).

Navigation: More → Suites → Reloading Suite

17. Training Academy

The Training Academy delivers structured precision-rifle instruction: 60 drills across 6 pillars (Fundamentals, The Optic, The Air, The Math, The Field, The Hunt), a 299-term glossary, 14 concept lessons, 2 training plans (First 30 Days as a Precision Shooter; PRS Prep — 12 Weeks to a Match), a 5-question glossary quiz, calibrated skills with proficiency tiers (28 on the iPhone, 27 on Android), daily-range drills, streaks, and shot-log skill flags (iPhone). The Academy is part of Ballistics Pro (§24): without Pro or the 7-day trial, opening it shows the upgrade screen.

The hub on the iPhone leads with coursework: tiles for your day streak, drills logged, and best streak; Training Plans; the Knowledge Layer (Concept Lessons, which opens a screen titled Concepts; Quiz Mode; Glossary); the six pillars (each tile shows its lesson and drill counts); Daily Range; Field Practice (Range Estimation Training, Wind Estimation Training, and the Wind Estimation Guide); and a card saying every lesson, drill, and plan in the Academy is included with Ballistics Pro. On Android the hub shows one streak card (your current streak and your longest), then Concept Lessons, Training Plans, Quiz Mode, Glossary, the pillars, Daily Range, and Field Practice. On both phones a chart icon at the top opens Skill Calibration .

The top of the Training Academy hub: the day streak, drills logged, and best streak tiles, then Training Plans (First 30 Days as a Precision Shooter, PRS Prep). The chart icon at the top right opens Skill Calibration.

The hub further down: the Knowledge Layer (Concept Lessons, Quiz Mode, Glossary) and the six pillars (Fundamentals, The Optic, The Air, The Math, The Field, The Hunt).

The bottom of the hub: Daily Range, Field Practice (Range Estimation Training, Wind Estimation Training, Wind Estimation Guide), and the card saying everything in the Academy is included with Ballistics Pro.

Concept Lessons opens a list titled Concepts, grouped by topic (Setup & Zero, Units & Optics, and more), with a search box for the 14 lessons.

One concept lesson (Sight-In, Zero & Zero Range): a short summary, then the lesson text in sections.

A pillar page (The Field): what the pillar covers, then its Pillar Overview lessons.

Lower on the pillar page: a quiz drawn from that pillar's terms only, then the Skills & Quizzes list, one row per drill.

One skill (Position Selection): the concept, the Difficulty switch (Beginner, Practiced, Expert), and the Start Drill button.

The first round of a drill: a scenario and four answers, with Cancel at the top left.

Quiz Mode asks five random glossary terms with four options each, for Mixed or one of seven categories. Skill Calibration rates each skill Untested (fewer than five attempts), Struggling, Developing, Competent, Proficient, or Mastery from your recent drills (a drill passes at 60). Daily Range gives three drills a day, the same all day, changing at local midnight. A day counts toward your streak when you complete a drill (the iPhone counts any completed drill; Android counts passed drills). Wind Estimation Training grades the wind direction as well as the speed on the scenes that have a direction to read (the mirage scenes). In a language where less of the coursework is translated, a note at the top says the lessons, drills, and quizzes are in English for now while the rest of the app is in your language.

Navigation: More → Suites → Training Academy (both phones)

18. Sensors

The app reads device sensors directly into the Calculator. No manufacturer companion app is required.

18.1 Device barometer

Reads the device's built-in barometric pressure sensor directly into the Pressure field. It is a one-time read and is hidden on phones with no barometer. In the card layout, the header Sensors button fills pressure from the barometer and altitude from GPS together.

The Atmosphere card in the card layout: the header row has Presets, Live Weather, and Sensors. Touching and holding Live Weather lists the phone's sensors and presets.

The Atmosphere card in the standard layout (Settings → Layout → Card-Style Inputs off): Presets and Fetch Weather, then the Pressure (inHg) row. On this test phone, which has no barometer, the Pressure row shows no barometer icon.

Navigation: Calculate tab → Atmosphere → barometer icon

18.2 Camera inclinometer

Measures incline to target using the camera plus motion sensors, with a live preview so you confirm you're pointing at the target. The icon beside Angle (°) (a square viewfinder with a dot) opens the Inclinometer screen. Freeze holds the reading and Use This Angle sends it to the Angle field. Available on both platforms.

The Target card in the standard layout. The icon at the right end of the Angle (°) row opens the inclinometer.

The first time it opens, iOS asks for camera access.

Navigation: Calculate tab → Target card → viewfinder icon beside Angle (°)

18.3 GPS latitude & azimuth

Auto-fills latitude (for Coriolis/Eötvös) and your shot azimuth (the phone's compass heading, so point the phone at the target) from device location. The location icon appears once Coriolis is switched on. A map picker (on the iPhone , in the standard input layout; Android has one too) lets you tap any point on Earth to set latitude.

With Coriolis Effect switched on, the Latitude (°) row appears with a location arrow and a map icon, and an Azimuth (°) row below it.

The map icon opens Set Coriolis Latitude: tap anywhere on the map to set the shooter's latitude, then Use This Location.

After a tap on the map, a readout shows the latitude and longitude and which way spin drift goes (here, Northern Hemisphere, spin drift right).

Navigation: Calculate tab → Solver & Advanced → Coriolis → location icon

18.4 Auto-cant from IMU

Captures the live cant angle from the device's motion sensors when the phone is rail-mounted — more accurate than estimating cant visually. A phone icon beside Cant Angle (°) opens the Cant Angle sheet (Reading Rifle Cant), which shows the roll live, with Use This Value and Zero / Level (if the phone is not square on the rifle, level the rifle with a bubble level, then tap Zero / Level). The Auto (live IMU) switch under the Cant Angle row keeps the value updating. On the iPhone this is in the standard input layout (Settings → Layout). Android has the same controls in the Calculator.

Solver & Advanced in the standard layout: the Cant Angle (°) row with the phone icon at its right end, and the Auto (live IMU) switch under it.

Navigation: Calculate tab → Solver & Advanced → Cant Angle → phone icon (iPhone: standard input layout)

18.5 Live weather

Fetches current temperature, pressure, and humidity for your GPS location (WeatherKit on iOS, Open-Meteo on Android). Wind is not fetched: enter it yourself, or apply it from a connected weather meter. With Auto-Fetch Weather on (the default; Settings → Data) the Calculator fills conditions when it first opens and never overwrites values you edited. When you are offline the app falls back to the last cached reading, and the standard input layout says so ("Using cached weather from …"). With nothing cached, it says Apple Weather is unavailable offline until its attribution mark has been downloaded once, and the air notice reads "Standard sea-level air: not your weather". The Atmosphere card and the answer then name the source and time ("Live Weather · 3:41 PM", §4.3).

The standard-layout Atmosphere card with Fetch Weather. This test phone is offline, so the card says Apple Weather is unavailable until its attribution mark has been downloaded once.

Touching and holding Fetch Weather in the standard layout. On this test phone the menu lists Live Weather, Connect a Weather Meter, and Presets (Phone Sensors is not listed).

Settings → Data: the Auto-Fetch Weather switch, on by default, with a note that it sends your coordinates to Apple WeatherKit.

Navigation: Calculate tab → Atmosphere → Fetch Weather (named Live Weather in the card layout's header)

19. Bluetooth Devices

Scan for nearby Bluetooth LE devices, connect , and view live chronograph, weather-meter, and rangefinder panels, a BLE Explorer for diagnostics, and a Doppler drag-curve builder. Uses the OS Bluetooth stack directly — no manufacturer app required. Bluetooth Devices lists every device for everyone and needs Pro only to connect; the Chronograph Session is Pro.

The Devices screen: the Connection card, Scan for Devices, the "trouble connecting" note with Tell Us Which Device, and Drag Curve Tools. On this test phone, which has no Bluetooth, the Connection card reads Disconnected and Bluetooth not supported.

Lower on the Devices screen: the BLE Explorer (Diagnostics) row and the start of the Catalog (Weather Meter, 41 models, with See All).

The Catalog's Rangefinders row (54 models, with See All) and the top of the Supported Devices list.

The Devices screen, from the top: the Connection card, Scan for Devices, the Drag Curve Tools group (Build Drag Curve from Doppler), BLE Explorer (Diagnostics), a Catalog of weather meter and rangefinder models (each row has See All), and the Supported Devices list.

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Bluetooth Devices

Supported devices:

Weather: Kestrel 5700 Elite / 5500 (over Kestrel LiNK), Kestrel DROP D1 / D2 / D3
Rangefinders: SIG KILO BDX (2400, 3K, 5K, 10K), Leica Rangemaster CRF, Vortex Fury HD, ATN Auxiliary Laser Rangefinder, Bushnell CONX
Chronographs: Garmin Xero C1 / C1 Pro, MagnetoSpeed V3 / Sporter, Caldwell G2 (an FX Pocket chronograph also connects)

Tap a device in the list to open its Device Info page (capabilities, the data it sends to the app, and a manufacturer link), in your language. In scan results, some devices, such as LabRadar and Athlon Rangecraft, are listed as "Unsupported protocol — not confirmed against hardware" and cannot connect yet; use CSV import or manual entry for them.

The Supported Devices list: the three chronographs (green), the two Kestrel meters, and the five rangefinders (orange). A tap on a row opens its Device Info page.

A Device Info page (Garmin Xero C1 / C1 Pro): the device's kind, then Capabilities and Data Sent to App.

A device that will not connect. The Devices screen, each device's info page, the Chronograph Session (while no shot has arrived), Kestrel Live (while it is not live), and the BLE Explorer carry a small note: "Some devices may have trouble connecting. A fix is coming in the next release. If a specific device won't connect, tell us which one and we'll fast-track it." Its Tell Us Which Device button prepares an email to support that names the device on screen, or the kind of device when none is, with the app version and phone model; you read it, add what happens, and send it yourself. Nothing about your rifles, loads, or location is in it. It works the same on both phones.

The bottom of a Device Info page: App Integration, Connection Info, the "trouble connecting" note with its Tell Us Which Device button, and the Manufacturer link.

Kestrel 5700 / 5500. A Kestrel with LiNK sends temperature, station pressure, humidity, altitude, density altitude, wind speed, and its compass heading. Apply to Calculator writes the temperature, pressure, humidity, and altitude as the meter shows them, and the wind speed; the wind's direction comes from Kestrel Live (§19.6), which reads it against a target direction taken from the meter's own compass. The meter's density altitude is shown, not written into the Calculator.

Garmin Xero C1. The C1 sends nothing per shot. When you end a session on the chronograph, it hands the whole session file to the app: every shot, in order, with the session's average, SD, and ES. Its card on the Devices screen says "Shots arrive when you end the session on the chronograph.", shows a pairing tip (it pairs with one phone at a time; check that the code on the chronograph matches the one on your phone), where a download stands, and "Last session: 5 shots · avg … · SD … · ES …". The shots go straight into the Chrono String (§8.5); a session already in the app is never taken twice. Importing the chronograph's .fit file still works too.

19.1 Chronograph Session

A live-capture screen for a connected chronograph (titled Chronograph). It shows Session Statistics (shots, mean, SD, and ES, plus Min and Max once a shot has arrived) and a per-shot list with each shot's deviation from the mean (red beyond 2 SD), plus Clear Session, which asks "Clear Session?" before it deletes the shots ("This will delete all N shots from the current session. This cannot be undone.") on both phones. It does not change the Calculator. To check a string and use it as your muzzle velocity, use Chrono String → Capture a string → Live from chronograph (§8.5).

The Chronograph screen with no shots yet: Session Statistics at zero, No Readings ("Fire a shot to begin recording"), a greyed Clear Session, and the "trouble connecting" note with Tell Us Which Device.

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Chronograph Session

19.2 Weather meters and rangefinders

A connected weather meter shows a Weather Meter — Live panel (with Live View at the top for a Kestrel, §19.6) and a rangefinder a Rangefinder — Live panel. Apply to Calculator sets temperature, pressure, humidity, altitude (when the meter reports it), and wind speed from a meter (not density altitude; a field the meter does not report reads "Not reported", and a reading with an out-of-range value is refused) and slant range and incline from a rangefinder. The Atmosphere card then names the meter and the time it was applied (§4.3).

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Bluetooth Devices

19.3 Set Aim Direction

When a connected weather meter reports a wind bearing, Set Aim Direction appears under Weather Meter — Live (a Kestrel sends its compass heading instead, which Kestrel Live uses, §19.6). Face the way you aim and tap it: the app reads your compass heading ("Aim direction set: 274° (W)"), so the meter's compass bearing becomes a wind direction relative to where you aim (0° is a headwind, 90° is from your right), and Apply to Calculator then fills wind direction as well as speed. Without it, direction stays manual. It lasts for the session and resets when the app restarts, so set it again at each new firing position. If the compass accuracy is low, move the phone in a figure-8 and try again. The iPhone asks for Location access to read the heading.

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Bluetooth Devices → Weather Meter — Live → Set Aim Direction

19.4 BLE Explorer (diagnostics)

Scan for any Bluetooth LE device, connect, browse its services and characteristics, and keep a notification log you can export or clear. It is read-only: it never writes to a device. It can also be opened from Chrono String → Capture a string → Bluetooth Diagnostic.

The BLE Explorer: Scan for BLE Devices, a note on capturing a chronograph, and the "trouble connecting" note. On this test phone, which has no Bluetooth, it says "This device doesn't support Bluetooth LE."

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Bluetooth Devices → BLE Explorer (Diagnostics)

19.5 Doppler Drag Curve builder

Turn downrange velocity measurements into a measured Cd-vs-Mach curve for your exact bullet and load. Enter the bullet's weight and diameter and the atmosphere (it defaults to standard air; Use Connected Weather Meter fills it from a meter), then import a radar's Series CSV (distance and velocity) or enter at least two gates by hand. The iPhone offers Import CSV and Manual; Android also shows a Live source. Derive Drag Curve plots the measured curve against a G7 reference; then Save to Drag Curve Library and Link to a Bullet so it applies automatically. Where a radar's file is imported, a note reads "Have a Doppler export from another radar? Send us the file and we'll add support for it within a week," with an Email the File button that prepares the message. Pro.

The Doppler Drag Curve screen on Import CSV: Import CSV File, the distance and velocity rows, Email the File, then the Bullet section.

The Manual tab: Manual Gates with distance (yd) and velocity (fps) rows, Add Gate, and the note that at least two rows are needed.

Lower on the screen: Bullet (Weight, Diameter, Choose from Database), Atmosphere at Measurement (standard air by default), and the Derive Drag Curve button.

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Bluetooth Devices → Build Drag Curve from Doppler

19.6 Kestrel Live

The connected Kestrel's data, one to one, as it streams: the shared wind dial (§4.4) with the target at 12 o'clock, the wind's arrow coming in from the side it blows from and the wind speed written with it, and the meter's air readings (temperature, humidity, density altitude, station pressure, and heading) under the dial. The ring turns by the saved target direction, so the ring and the arrow agree whichever way the phone points. Point the Kestrel at the target and tap Set Target Direction (it takes the meter's heading, so it needs a live reading); the screen then reads the wind's clock direction against it ("Target direction: 274°"). Distance and Angle (°) start from the Calculator's target and can be changed here, and the Hold below is the Calculator's rifle and load at that distance in the meter's air (and its wind, once a target direction is set), in MOA, MIL, inches or centimeters, and clicks, from the Calculator's own solver. The screen says Live and how old the data is, turns to Stale after 10 seconds without a reading, and says when the meter has disconnected (a hold from an older reading is dimmed and says when that reading was). Apply to Calculator writes the meter's temperature, pressure, humidity, and altitude, and its wind speed and, once a target direction is set, wind direction ("Applied — …"). Pro; Android has the same screen.

Navigation: More → Rifles & Gear → Bluetooth Devices → Weather Meter — Live → Live View (or Calculate tab → the air-source line → Kestrel Live)

Exports sit on the screen they belong to; there is no single share button. To send a whole build, or one rifle, optic, or suppressor, to a friend's phone as a file, a link, or a QR code, see §20.9.

20.1 PDF / CSV / XLS range cards

Calculate results end with an Export section: Export CSV and Export XLS (Excel) (free). Under each button the screen says what it exports: Export CSV is the drop table only, as a CSV file for any spreadsheet, with the rifle, date, and weather at the top; Export XLS (Excel) is the drop table only, as an Excel workbook, with the rifle, weather, muzzle velocity, zero, and solver on a second sheet; and a last line points to Send Inputs & Results in the menu at the top of the Calculator for every input and result in one file. With a Table Start set (§4.6), both files begin at it. On both platforms the CSV starts with comment lines (rifle, date, units, conditions, turret unit, click value, turret tracking) followed by the trajectory columns; the XLS has a Trajectory sheet and a Conditions sheet, with subsonic rows shaded light red and transonic rows light yellow, and it keeps numeric types for use in formulas. The Range Card tab (§13.1) offers Save Range Card, Share as Text, and Generate PDF then Share PDF — an A4 PDF with a conditions line (including the solver and the spin drift, jump, and Coriolis settings) and the transonic and subsonic rows highlighted. On Android the Range Card's ⋮ menu has Export PDF, Export CSV, Export XLS (Excel), and Print.

Export CSV opens the share sheet with the file (here 6.5_CM_Match_trajectory, a 4 KB text document). Nothing is sent until you choose where it goes.

Export XLS (Excel) opens the share sheet with the workbook (here an Office Spreadsheet of about 50 KB).

Navigation: Calculate tab → results → Export, or Range Card tab → Generate PDF

20.2 Come-Up Card

A compact printable PDF card in scope-cap, arm-board, and letter sizes, on both platforms. See §15.4.

Navigation: Calculate tab → Quick Actions → Come-Up Card

20.3 DA Form 5517 card

The DA Form 5517 range card. On the iPhone it is a monospaced text card shared through the share sheet; on Android it is a PDF with a sector sketch. See §12.5.

Navigation: More → LE / Military / TAK → DA Form 5517 Range Card → share

20.4 TAK / CoT export

Broadcast ballistic solutions and position markers to connected TAK networks, and export .cotpkg data packages. See §12.

Navigation: More → LE / Military / TAK → TAK Server Connection / TAK Data Packages

20.5 Profile QR code

Export a rifle profile (the rifle and all its loads) as a QR code or as JSON text: tap a rifle, then Share, Copy to Clipboard, or Share as QR Code. A QR code is offered only while the profile fits in one (about 2.3 KB); otherwise use JSON. The receiving person scans the code with the phone's camera, pastes the text into Import Profile, and taps Import. The in-app scanner (§20.9) reads build codes only, not these profile codes. To send a rifle, or a whole build with its optic, suppressor, and Bench pictures, as a QR code, use Share Rifle or Share Build (§20.9).

The Exported Data card for a rifle profile: the JSON text, then Share, Copy to Clipboard, and Share as QR Code.

Share as QR Code: the code with "Scan with another device running Ballistics Calculator to import this profile" and a Share QR Code button.

Navigation: Settings → Share Profile / Export Shot Log CSV (iPhone; the screen it opens is titled Export / Import) / Settings → Manual Export & Import (Android) → (rifle)

20.6 JSON profile export / import

Export a versioned JSON file of a complete profile (all fields, loads, zeros). Import adds to your data and reports what it added; it does not show a preview first.

The top of the Export / Import screen: Export Profiles (one row per rifle, each with a share button), Export Shot Logs, and the start of Import Profile.

The bottom of Export / Import: Export Shot Logs ("No shot logs to export" on this test phone), the Import Profile box with its Import button, and Import Build from Files.

Settings → Manual Export & Import (the screen is titled Data Backup & Restore): Manual Backup with Export Backup, the current data counts, and Import Backup.

Export Backup opens the share sheet with the dated JSON file (ballistics_backup_2026-10-28, 32 KB).

Navigation: Settings → Share Profile / Export Shot Log CSV (iPhone; the screen it opens is titled Export / Import) / Settings → Manual Export & Import (Android; on the iPhone the same row opens Data Backup & Restore, which exports and imports a backup file of your rifles, loads, shot logs, and other records; it is a partial backup, not the complete one)

20.7 Cloud backup

iPhone: an automatic backup to your own iCloud Drive — not live sync, and nothing goes to Zima's servers. The app writes a backup file about every five minutes when something has changed. Settings → iCloud Backup shows the status and has Back Up Now, Restore (it replaces local data after a confirmation), and Choose an older backup to restore…; a new install that finds a backup offers Restore from iCloud at launch. The backup carries your rifles and loads, logs, and the rest of your records and settings. A few things can be left out for size or safety; when that happens, Settings shows an orange notice (for example Pencil drawings, TAK package content, and rifle-document files over 8 MB) and nothing is deleted. A separate manual export (Settings → Manual Export & Import) saves a JSON file with rifles, loads, the shot log, saved calculations, ammo, barrels, atmosphere presets, and DOPE entries.

Android: Settings → Manual Export & Import has a Cloud Backup section with Backup to Cloud / File and Restore from Cloud / File through the system file picker (Google Drive, Dropbox, OneDrive, or local), an Auto-Backup switch (it saves a local backup when the app closes), Backup Now, Export Complete Backup, and Export Current Data. The Cloud Backup row beside it opens a screen with Backup Status, Export Backup, Import Backup, and Share Backup. Restoring replaces your existing data after a preview. A banner appears when your data is larger than Android's own automatic backup can hold.

Navigation: Settings → iCloud Backup (iPhone) / Settings → Manual Export & Import and Settings → Cloud Backup (Android)

20.8 Other exports and shares

Calculator: ••• → Send Inputs & Results, one text file with every input and result, for support (§4.16).
Simple range card: Share as Text or Share as Image (§13.1). Zero Distance Explorer: Share Chart (§7.20). Multi-Target Scene: Share the picture (§7.21).
Loads: Share a single load as a .bcload file another phone can open (§5.7).
DOPE Book: Export as PDF or CSV. Rifle Data Book: a PDF of the whole book or of one entry's range card (iPhone only for now).
Match Log: a per-match Export CSV with stage points, hit percentage, elapsed seconds, and hit factor (on Android it leaves out the par time and target columns). Session Tracker: Export CSV (iPhone only for now). Stage Planner: Share Stage Card (PDF) (iPhone only for now).
Multi-Target Solver: Copy Results to Clipboard and Share / Export a text table.
Reticle Simulator: Export Reticle Card… (portrait or landscape, white background, ten show/hide elements, a note; Print, Save PNG, or Copy) and Share Dope Card.
DSF Library and SDF Table: Export CSV. Cd Measurement: Share Results Summary. Virtual Turret and Spotting Correction: share the turret state or the session summary with its history. 3D Trajectory: share a screenshot. Shot Group Analyzer: Export Group Image. Load Development: Export Summary. Visual Drag Editor: Import JSON / Export JSON (iPhone only for now).
Reloading Suite: Import CSV, Export CSV, and a blank template for each component list (§16.8).
Bullet Database: Import CSV → Import BC Overrides, with Export My Overrides (the same CSV the import reads back, linked drag curves included) and a template (§6.1).
Shot Log: Settings → Share Profile / Export Shot Log CSV → Export All Shot Logs (iPhone) / Settings → Manual Export & Import → Export All Shot Logs (Android), a CSV file.

Export Shot Logs on the Export / Import screen. On this test phone it says "No shot logs to export".

Support: the Diagnostic Logs and the BLE Explorer notification log can be shared.
A whole build, or one rifle, optic, or suppressor: as a file, a link, or a QR code (§20.9).

Send a whole build, or one rifle, optic, or suppressor, to another phone (iPhone or Android) as a file, a link, or a QR code. No account is needed, and the build is inside the file or the link itself.

What you can share.

Action	What goes
Share Build	A saved loadout: its rifle with the load it shoots, the optic and its zero on that rifle, the suppressor, the night gear, the Bench's pictures of them, and where each part sits on the Bench (the positions you set with Adjust).
Share Rifle	One rifle with its loads and zero.
Share Optic	One optic, with the scope values it has on the rifle it is on now.
Share Suppressor	One suppressor.

For a build or a rifle, the sheet that opens first has an Include ballistics & zero switch, on by default. Switched off, only the gear and pictures go: no loads and no zero, and the build arrives not zeroed with the note "Gear only: add your load and zero before shooting it." An optic or a suppressor has no such switch. Then choose one of three ways to send it.

The Share Build sheet: the Include ballistics & zero switch (on), then Share, Show QR Code, and Copy Link.

The same switch turned off: only the gear and pictures go.

The Share Rifle sheet has the same switch and the same three buttons.

The Share Optic sheet: no switch, just Share, Show QR Code, and Copy Link.

The Share Suppressor sheet is the same as the optic's.

Share opens the phone's share sheet with the file (it ends in .ballisticsbuild), a short message naming the rifle, optic, load, suppressor, and night gear, and, for a build or a rifle, a picture of it on the Bench. The message tells a friend who does not have the app where to get it free.

Share opens the phone's share sheet with the build file (M4_Patrol_Day, a Ballistics Calculator Build of about 3 KB). Save Image saves the picture of the build on the Bench.

Show QR Code opens a page (titled QR Code) with a big black-on-white code, the build's name, and a Share button, and holds the screen at full brightness while it is up so another phone can read it. It says "Scan it with a phone's camera, or in the app: My Armory, +, Add a Shared Build." A build too big for one QR code says "Too Big for One QR Code" and offers Share (the file) instead.

Show QR Code: the code, the build's name, the line "Scan it with a phone's camera, or in the app: My Armory, +, Add a Shared Build.", and a Share button.

Copy Link puts a link (zimaballistics.com/b#…) on the clipboard and the button reads Copied. A build too big for a link says "This build is too big to share as a link. Share it as a file instead."

After Copy Link, the row reads Copied with a check mark.

Where to start it. In My Armory, the ••• menu lists Share Build, Share Rifle, Share Optic, and Share Suppressor (each opens a list of yours to pick from, and each shows only when you have something of that kind to share). Touching and holding a card in My Armory offers the same for that loadout, rifle, optic, or suppressor. On the Calculate tab, touching and holding a loadout's name above the Bench offers Share Build, and so does a loadout's Cards & History page (top right). Both phones have all of these.

My Armory's ••• menu: Settings, All Tools, Report an Issue or Suggestion, then Share Build, Share Rifle, Share Optic, and Share Suppressor.

Share Build opens a list of your loadouts to pick from.

Touching and holding an optic card: Use on Bench, Edit, and Share Optic.

Adding what a friend sent. Open My Armory, tap + , and choose Add a Shared Build (an empty Armory has the same button). Settings → Share Profile / Export Shot Log CSV → Import Build on the iPhone, or Settings → Manual Export & Import → Import Build on Android, opens the same screen. It offers three ways:

The Add a Shared Build screen: Scan QR Code, Paste Link (Paste, the Link field, Open Link), and Import Build from Files.

Scan QR Code opens the camera, reads QR codes only, and closes on the first one it reads. If camera access is off it says "Camera access is off. Turn it on in Settings to scan a QR code." with an Open Settings button; on a device that cannot scan it says to paste the link or import the file instead.

On a phone that cannot scan (this test phone), a note under Scan QR Code says: "This device can't scan QR codes. Paste the link or import the file instead."

Paste Link has a Paste button, which reads a link from the clipboard and opens it at once, and a Link field with Open Link for a link you type in.
Import Build from Files picks a .ballisticsbuild file.

Opening a build file from Messages, Mail, or Files, or a build link on a phone that has the app, opens the same preview directly. If a link opens in the browser instead, copy it and use Paste Link.

The Shared Build screen shows the build on the Bench with rows for Rifle, Optic, Load, Suppressor, Night Gear (only when the build has night gear), and Zero ("Zeroed at 100 yd" or "Not zeroed here"). A part with no picture on your phone is drawn with its kind's picture and named in a note under it. Add to My Armory adds everything in one step, and a name you already have gets a number after it, for example "(2)". A rifle, optic, or suppressor shared on its own opens its own preview (Shared Rifle, Shared Optic, Shared Suppressor) with the same button. Adding is free. If a file cannot be added, Not Added says why (it is not a build, it is damaged, or it was made by a newer version of the app, in which case update the app and open it again), and nothing is imported.

The Shared Build screen: the build on the Bench, then Rifle, Optic, Load, Suppressor, and Zero rows, and Add to My Armory. (This build has no night gear, so there is no Night Gear row.)

A suppressor shared on its own opens Shared Suppressor, with its details and the same Add to My Armory button.

When a link cannot be added, Not Added says why (here: "This build link is damaged or incomplete. Nothing was imported.").

21. Settings

The Settings screen (pinned at the top of More, and in every tab's ••• menu on the iPhone) holds app-wide preferences. On the iPhone it runs, top to bottom: Upgrade to Pro and Tip Jar; LE/Military Access; App Level; Tab Bar (Customize Tabs); Unit Settings; Privacy (what the app sends); System (Measurement System, Angular Unit) and Decimal Mark; Turret (click value); Layout; Display Columns; Solver; Data; iCloud Backup (with Manual Export & Import and Share Profile / Export Shot Log CSV); Delete All Data; Appearance; Haptics & Sound; Diagnostics; Tutorials; Feedback; About; Legal; Privacy Details; the Anonymous Usage Analytics switch; and the privacy badges, with the app version at the foot. Android's Settings runs in nearly the same order; where it differs, the section below says so (its backup rows sit in their own Cloud Backup group, and its theme picker is under Appearance).

The top of Settings on the iPhone: Upgrade to Pro, Tip Jar, LE/Military Access, App Level, Tab Bar, and Unit Settings. Android's runs in nearly the same order.

Navigation: More → Settings

21.1 Upgrade to Pro / Tip Jar

The Pro upgrade screen and the optional Tip Jar. On the Pro screen the two prices come first and largest: Lifetime (one payment, Pro forever) and 6 Months (one payment, ends after 6 months, never renews). Below them, a smaller Start 7-day free trial button carries its terms under it (§24.5). From version 2.0.38, while a six-month Pro Pass runs, Settings shows Pro pass ends with its end date (§24.3); while the free trial runs, it shows Trial: N days left.

Navigation: Settings → Upgrade to Pro

21.2 LE / Military Access

Where you enter your LE/Military access code (Verify is enabled at 8 or more characters) to unlock the gated LE/Military/TAK features, and where you revoke it. The row shows Active or Not Verified. See §12.10.

Navigation: Settings → LE/Military Access

21.3 Customize Tabs

Add, remove, and reorder the tabs of the tab bar, Calculate included (up to eleven before More on the iPhone; Reset returns the defaults). See §3.

Navigation: Settings → Tab Bar → Customize Tabs

21.4 Unit Settings

Two rows on the iPhone: Wind Reference (how wind direction is measured) and Bullet Weight (grains or grams). Every other display unit follows the Measurement System in §21.5.

Navigation: Settings → Unit Settings

21.5 System & angular units

Measurement System: Imperial or Metric (the iPhone also lists Mixed, which keeps the imperial display). Metric puts every screen in meters, m/s, °C, and hPa and lets you type metric values on the Calculate tab and in the rifle and ammo editors; they read back exactly as you typed them, and a new metric calculator opens on 100 m with a drop table to 1000 m in 25 m steps. New installs outside the US start in metric. Angular Unit: MOA, MIL (MRAD), or IPHY: the unit with no rifle loaded, and the unit holds always show in while Match My Scope is off. Match My Scope (on for a new install) shows the holds in the Drop Table, the Calculator's reticle holds, My View, and the iPad's dope pill in the unit of the scope on your rifle, so a MIL scope reads MIL and an MOA scope reads MOA. A line under the two rows says which: "Holds show in the unit of the scope on your rifle, or MOA with no rifle loaded." or "Holds always show in MOA, whatever the scope." Turning the switch off, or picking another unit on the Drop Table's unit switch, shows that unit whatever the scope; the Drop Table's Match My Scope button turns it back on. Only what you read changes: the clicks still follow your optic, and a reticle keeps its own unit. A phone that already had a unit chosen keeps showing it until the first rifle loads; Match My Scope then turns on if that rifle's scope is in that unit, and stays off if it is not. Decimal Mark: Automatic (follows your region), Period (6.8), or Comma (6,8); every number on screen, every number field, the Watch, widgets, and Live Activities follow it, while files and shared data always use a period. Whatever you choose, a number you type or search can use a comma or a period (6,5 reads the same as 6.5).

System (Measurement System and Angular Unit), Decimal Mark, and the Turret click value.

Navigation: Settings → System

21.6 Turret click value

The default click value for the angular unit you chose, typed into Click Value (MOA), Click Value (MIL/MRAD), or Click Value (IPHY) (the field follows the Angular Unit above it). Common values are listed under it: for MOA, 0.25 (¼ MOA), 0.5, or 0.125; for MIL, 0.1 or 0.05; for IPHY, the increment marked on your turret. A loaded rifle's own turret unit and click value take over wherever a screen has a rifle.

Navigation: Settings → Turret → Click Value

21.7 Display columns

Choose which trajectory-table columns appear (Customize Columns) and save reusable view presets (View Presets).

Layout, Display Columns, and Solver in Settings.

Navigation: Settings → Display Columns → Customize Columns / View Presets

21.8 Default solver

Set the default solver for all new calculations (3DOF / 4DOF / 6DOF / Pejsa); still overridable per-solve. A What is 6DOF? link (§4.17) sits in this section.

Navigation: Settings → Solver → Default Solver

21.9 Data — weather & ballistic-data updates

Auto-Fetch Weather is on by default: the Calculator looks up current conditions when it first opens and never overwrites atmosphere you edited. Ballistic Data Updates opens the Ballistic Data screen, which shows when the app last checked, the installed versions of the five data sets (bullets, cartridges, search aliases, reticles, and gear), and Check for Updates Now. Updates are checked before they are used, and an update that arrives while the app is open is put in place at once, with no restart: new optics, lights, bullets, cartridges, and reticles show up in the lists as soon as it lands. While a bullet, cartridge, barrel, scope, reticle, or bench-model picker is open, the update waits and goes in when the last one closes, so a list never changes while you pick from it. Nothing you already picked changes. The copy built into the app is always the offline fallback.

The Gear Pictures group on that screen holds the Download pictures over cellular switch, on by default. The picture of any gear you open downloads right away, and shows the moment it arrives (there is nothing to restart). The rest of the picture library downloads in the background on Wi-Fi, or on any network when you tap Check for Updates Now. The switch is your choice about mobile data for the picture you open: with it off, that picture waits for Wi-Fi. Otherwise your phone's data-saving mode (Low Data Mode on the iPhone, Data Saver on Android) is respected.

Navigation: Settings → Data

21.10 Backup

iCloud (iOS) / Cloud Backup (Android). See §20.7.

Navigation: Settings → iCloud Backup (iPhone) / Settings → Cloud Backup (Android). Both phones also list Manual Export & Import in that group (§20.6, §20.7).

21.11 Delete all data

Wipes all on-device app data after confirmation. On the iPhone a progress screen shows each step; it also clears Siri's cached solve, a pending Shortcuts action, and a running Live Activity, and it keeps your unit and display preferences. It removes LE/Military access and TAK settings too; the one thing kept is a random holder ID used by the access-code check.

Navigation: Settings → Delete All Data

21.12 Appearance

A theme picker on both platforms: Tactical Dark, Modern Minimal, Military HUD, and Vibrant Modern (the default is Tactical Dark on both phones). On Android the picker is a row of four swatches labeled Theme.

Haptics & Sound (the next group) has two switches: Haptics, the taps you feel when you pick, save, or swap something, and Click when gear is swapped, a click sound when gear changes. On the iPhone the click is the keyboard's sound, so the silent switch mutes it.

Navigation: Settings → Appearance

21.13 Diagnostics

iPhone: Diagnostic Logs opens a day-by-day summary (peak memory, CPU time, hangs, unexpected exits, crash reports) read from the files listed below it (nothing leaves the phone), and the log files themselves, which you can share. Android: a Diagnostics screen shows device info, any pending error report, and recent events, with a Share button. On both phones the group also holds Offer to send a report after an unexpected close, on by default: it asks once, at the next launch, whether to send a report with your last Calculator inputs and results, and nothing is sent unless you send it.

Navigation: Settings → Diagnostics

21.14 Tutorials

Reset All Tutorials brings the help cards back and Hide All Tutorials hides them (every help card also has Hide all tips). The Welcome Tour replays from More → Tour on both phones.

Navigation: Settings → Tutorials

21.15 Feedback

Report a Bug, Suggest an Improvement, and Rate the App. Reports and suggestions open an email to support@zima-logistics.com that you read and send yourself, and you can choose whether to include diagnostic info. Every email the app prepares says which app and version it came from. On the iPhone, More → Feedback → Report a Bug opens a form (category, description, optional screenshot) that you can send by email or save on the phone. When something fails, the error message has a Report button that opens a ready-to-send email with the error, the screen it happened on, the app version, the device model and system version, and an optional line about what you were doing. It holds no rifle, load, shot, or location data, and nothing is sent until you send it. The report form (Report Bug / Request Feature, also Report an Issue or Suggestion in the Calculator's ••• menu) is different on one point: it always carries the Calculator's file, the same one Send Inputs & Results makes (§4.16), with no switch to leave it out. A Calculator Data line says "Includes a text file with your Calculator's inputs, results and app version, and no location except your latitude when Coriolis is on." (or, before anything has been calculated, that there is nothing to attach yet). It goes as a text attachment on the email and is kept beside a report you save on the phone; a refused solve still sends its inputs and the reason.

Rate the App opens the app's page in the App Store (iPhone) or Google Play (Android). Separately, from version 2.0.45 the app can ask for a rating on its own, using Apple's or Google's own rating card, at a good moment and never at a bad one. A good moment is a tool doing its job: a shot log entry saved, a DOPE book entry saved, a truing run that found a trued value, a BC back-calculation that found a BC, or a range card generated to its full range. The app asks about a second and a half later, so you can read the result first, and only after good moments on three different days, at least 7 days after you first opened the app, never in the first session, at most once per app version, and at least 120 days after the last ask. It stays quiet in a session that showed an error or offered a crash report, and while a sheet, alert, paywall, or the trial banner is on screen. Apple and Google decide whether the card actually appears. Delete All Data forgets the good days but not when the app last asked, so a reset never makes it ask sooner.

Navigation: Settings → Feedback (iPhone: also More → Feedback)

21.16 About

App version, build number, and credits. On the iPhone, More → About also states what is independently verified (three solvers, nine drag models, and the correction factors; Pejsa is described as a fast analytical approximation) and carries the trademark and TAK/CoT notices.

Navigation: Settings → About

21.17 Legal

Navigation: Settings → Legal

21.18 Privacy details & analytics

The privacy disclosure (what stays on your device and what the optional features send) and the Anonymous Usage Analytics switch. Anonymous, aggregated usage diagnostics are on by default worldwide, carry no personal data, and can be turned off, or back on, at any time. Nothing is ever sold or used for tracking or advertising.

The Privacy group at the top of Settings says plainly what is counted, in the same words on both phones: besides the diagnostics, "It also counts how the app is used: which tools you open and about how long you stay, which tabs you pinned, which tools you starred, your App Level, and how many rifles, loads, optics, suppressors and loadouts you keep (none, one, or a range: 2 to 3, 4 to 6, 7 to 10, 11 to 20, or over 20). Never their names, anything you type, or where you are." Your profiles, DOPE, and range data are never included. The same group lists the optional features that do send data when you use them. Weather auto-fill sends your coordinates to your phone's weather service and is on by default; it can be switched off under Data. LE/Military verification checks a hash of your access code, and a TAK server you set up receives what you send it. Bug reports are sent only when you send them. At the foot of Settings, three badges sum it up on both phones: No Tracking, No Ads, and No Account Needed.

Navigation: Settings → Privacy Details

21.19 Layout

Card-Style Inputs (on by default on both phones) shows the Calculator's inputs as compact two-column cards instead of standard rows. A few Calculator controls appear only in the standard row layout (the Air Density and Density Altitude readouts, wind bracketing, the 6DOF status row, cant from the phone's motion sensor, and the Coriolis map picker). Compact Shoot View opens the Calculate tab in the Shoot view (§4.15), once per launch.

Navigation: Settings → Layout

21.20 App Level

Basic, Standard, or Advanced: which tools More lists and which Calculator cards show (§2). Each level has a one-line summary on its row, and the footer says that search still finds every tool and that nothing you saved changes.

Navigation: Settings → App Level

22. Apple Watch & Wear OS

22.1 Apple Watch [iOS]

The Watch shows what your iPhone solved; it does not solve on its own. Every solve on the Calculate tab (and every card you make on the Range Card tab) is sent to the Watch, and the Watch keeps the last one it received. Units and the decimal mark follow your iPhone.

First launch: until something has synced, the Watch shows "No solution synced yet" with Pick Rifle/Load, Sync Now, and Weather.
Eight pages (swipe between them; the Watch opens on the first, Shoot, every launch): Shoot, Hold, Wind, Card, Range, Hunt, Match, Weather.
Shoot: the rifle and the load sit at the top (a tap opens the Rifle/Load picker). ELEV and WIND are two big numbers with the iPhone's hold arrows in place of the sign (§4.18) and their unit under them, MOA or MIL as the phone's turret is set; a tap on them moves through MOA, MIL, and clicks (the turret's own clicks). The range sits between − and + buttons, and the Digital Crown steps it too, by the Calculator's range increment, from the first range past the muzzle to the last the phone solved (in metric the stops move inward to whole steps: 25 to 1,500 yd is 25 to 1,350 m), starting at the phone's target range. Every step reads the synced table and interpolates between its rows, so it is instant and never waits for the iPhone. On a 40 mm watch or at large text the header goes to one line and the numbers stay on one line; VoiceOver reads "ELEV up 3.83 MOA, WIND left 0.11 MOA, range 300 yards". A table from an older iPhone shows the full-value crosswind at 10 mph (5 m/s) as WIND REF, with no arrow and its unit as MOA / 10 mph. With nothing synced it says "Sync a solution from iPhone first."

The Apple Watch Shoot page, the first of the eight pages: the rifle and load rows at the top, ELEV and WIND as two big numbers with hold arrows and MOA under them, and the range between the - and + buttons. The row of small icons at the bottom is the eight pages.

Hold: a range slider in 25-yard (or 25-meter) steps, limited to the ranges your iPhone actually solved ("Solved to …"), with the DROP in MOA and MIL, the WIND hold for a full-value 10 mph (5 m/s when metric) crosswind, VEL, and TOF. If the iPhone solve used several wind zones, the wind row shows that solved hold with its direction instead. The title at the top (Pick Rifle/Load or the rifle's name) opens the Rifle/Load picker: it lists your saved rifle and load pairs, and tapping one has your iPhone solve it and send the hold back. That solve uses the iPhone's current weather, no wind, and no Coriolis, and it does not change what the iPhone's Calculator shows.
Wind (Wind Call): the same range slider, a wind-speed slider, and a 1–12 o'clock direction picker; it shows HOLD LEFT or HOLD RIGHT in MOA and MIL, scaled from the synced trajectory, and says whether it is a full-value, partial, or head/tail wind. With a multi-zone wind from the iPhone it uses the iPhone's solved holds.
Card: the range table (range, drop in MOA and MIL, wind, velocity) with the conditions line and a sync button; the wind reads in the turret's unit with its direction arrow (←0.3 MIL).
Range (Range Day): the active trip's name, date, place, and rifle, with links to Quick Solve (the Hold page), Wind Call, and Range Card. Log Cold Bore opens a Cold Bore screen: the range, where the first shot hit against your aim point (vertical and horizontal, high and right positive, in inches or centimeters as the phone is set), and the temperature (the phone's, to start with); Log Cold Bore sends it. The shot is for the rifle of the solve the Watch shows; until the Watch knows one it says "Pick a saved rifle or load and solve it on iPhone." The iPhone checks the shot against the same limits as one typed there and saves it to that rifle's Cold Bore log, with protection against logging it twice, then replies "Cold bore logged for (rifle)". If a different rifle is loaded in the iPhone's Calculator by then, it says to calculate there and log the cold bore again; with no rifle loaded, or a value out of range, it says so instead. With no trip the page says to start one on the iPhone.
Hunt (Hunting): the active plan's name and species; sunrise, sunset, first light, and last light at the hunt's location (from the plan, or the Watch's own GPS if the plan has none), with a reminder that legal shooting hours come from your local regulations; the moon phase and how much of it is lit; the range limit set in the plan (labeled Ethical Range); and Log Harvest, which adds a harvested hunt record on the iPhone.
Match (Match Day): the next match's name, discipline, and days to go; a Par Time countdown (Start, Pause, reset; par set from 10 to 600 seconds in 10-second steps; the Watch taps your wrist at zero); and a Stage Score (hits out of possible, up to 50) that Send to Phone adds to today's registered match on the iPhone. Each stage keeps its own unsent hits on the Watch (the last five stages), so a phone sync or closing the Watch app does not erase them, and a stage that is sent twice is added only once.
Weather (Conditions): temperature, altitude, pressure, and wind (speed and the direction it blows from) from your iPhone's last weather fetch, with how long ago it was read. The Watch never fetches weather itself.

Who gets it: the synced Shoot, Hold, Wind, and Card pages are free. The Rifle/Load picker and the Weather page are Pro; without Pro the Watch says "Unlock Ballistics Pro on iPhone to use this." The Range, Hunt, and Match pages show what the iPhone's Range Day, Hunting, and Match Day suites send.

Needs the iPhone nearby: Sync Now, the Rifle/Load picker, Weather, Log Cold Bore, Log Harvest, and Send to Phone all ask the iPhone directly; when it cannot be reached the Watch says "iPhone not reachable." Everything already synced stays readable without the iPhone.

Navigation: Apple Watch → Ballistics app

22.2 Wear OS [Android]

The Wear OS watch app has the same eight pages as the Apple Watch (§22.1), in the same order, and the phone does the solving here too: each Calculator solve goes to the watch, and the watch keeps the last one. Units and the decimal mark follow the phone. Swipe between the pages (dots at the bottom show where you are); the watch opens on the first, Shoot, every launch: Shoot, Hold, Wind, Card, Range Day, Hunt, Match, Weather. Everything in §22.1 about what each page shows applies to the Wear OS watch as well; "phone" takes the place of "iPhone" in its messages. What is different on the watch:

Shoot: the rifle and load rows at the top (a tap opens the Rifle/Load picker), ELEV and WIND as two big numbers with direction arrows (§4.18), in MOA, MIL, or Clicks (a tap on the hold cycles them, and the unit you tapped stays through table updates; it resets only when the phone's turret unit changes). Turn the rotary crown or tap − and + to step the range on the increment the phone synced, from the table's first row to its last, with a haptic tick at each end; every step interpolates the synced table, so it is instant. The layout tightens in three steps to keep every number on one line at the smallest watch and the largest font scale, and TalkBack can adjust the range. A table from an older phone shows the full-value 10 mph (5 m/s) crosswind as WIND REF. Before any table has arrived the page says "Sync a solution from your phone first."
Rifle/Load picker: your saved rifle and load pairs, with a Close button. Tapping one has the phone run a fresh solve for the watch only, with no wind; it does not change the phone's Calculator or home-screen widget. With none saved it says "No Saved Profiles" and to save a rifle and load on your phone first.
Hold and Wind: a range slider with − and +, limited to the ranges the phone solved ("Solved to … yd"). Hold shows DROP in MOA and MIL, the full-value 10 mph (5 m/s) crosswind hold, VEL, and TOF; Wind adds a wind-speed slider and a 1 to 12 o'clock direction, and says whether it is a full-value, partial, or head/tail wind.
Range Day, Hunt, and Match: as on the Apple Watch, including Log Cold Bore (the Cold Bore form has range, vertical, horizontal, and temperature steppers and saves to the rifle loaded in the Calculator on your phone), Log Harvest, the Par Time timer (10 to 600 seconds; the watch buzzes at zero), and the Stage Score, which Send to Phone sends and which then reads Send Next Stage. With no active trip, no hunt plan, or no upcoming match, the page says so and points you to the phone.
First launch: before anything has synced, the watch shows "No solution synced yet" with Pick Rifle/Load, Sync Now, and Weather, as the Apple Watch does.

Who gets it: the synced Shoot, Hold, Wind, and Card pages are free; the Rifle/Load picker and the Weather page are Pro (without Pro the watch says "Unlock Ballistics Pro on your phone to use this"). The Range Day, Hunt, and Match pages show what the phone's Range Day, Hunting, and Match Day suites send. The watch needs the phone connected to sync, to solve a picked rifle, to fetch weather, and to log a cold bore, a harvest, or a stage score; when the phone cannot be reached it says "Phone not reachable."

Navigation: Wear OS → Ballistics app

23. Widgets & Live Activities

23.1 Home-screen widgets

iOS has 7 home-screen widgets (no lock-screen widgets): Last Solution (small, medium), Range Card (medium, large), DOPE Card (small, medium — holds are written in your scope's unit, MIL or MOA), Tag Deadline (small), Next Match (small, medium), Next Range Trip (small, medium), and Oldest Powder Lot (small, medium). Android has the same seven, and you can resize each one except Tag Deadline: Last Solution (your most recent solution: drop, windage, and velocity, in MIL or MOA as your turret is set), Range Card (a drop table from your last solution; it starts four cells wide), DOPE Card (quick-reference holds at key ranges), Tag Deadline (the soonest hunting-tag application deadline you track), Next Match (days until your next registered match), Next Trip (the date, place, and rifle of your next planned range trip), and Oldest Powder Lot (the oldest opened powder can in your inventory). The widgets that show a solution use the last solve from the Calculate tab.

Adding a widget: touch and hold the Home Screen, tap the + button, and search for Ballistics. The app is listed.

The Ballistics widget gallery: swipe through the widgets and sizes (the dots are the pages), then tap Add Widget. The first page is Last Solution, small, with its description.

Last Solution, small: the rifle name, the range, the elevation and windage in MIL, and how long ago the solve was made.

Last Solution, medium: elevation and windage in MIL and MOA, the velocity, the range, and how long ago the solve was made.

Range Card, medium: the first five rows of the drop table (range, MOA, MIL, wind in MOA) and the age of the solve.

Range Card, large: ten rows of the drop table, with the velocity column.

DOPE Card, small: the hold at one range in the scope's unit (MIL here), the wind hold, and the velocity.

DOPE Card, medium: quick-reference holds at four ranges (MOA, MIL, wind in MIL, velocity).

Tag Deadline, small, with no tag tracked yet: 'No tag deadlines. Add tags in Hunting.'

Next Match, small, with no match registered: 'No upcoming match. Add one in Competition.'

Next Match, medium, with no match registered.

Next Range Trip, small, with no trip planned: 'No upcoming trip. Plan one in Range Day.'

Next Range Trip, medium, with no trip planned.

Oldest Powder Lot, small, with no opened powder: 'No opened powder. Track lots in Reloading.'

Oldest Powder Lot, medium, with no opened powder.

Four of the widgets on a Home Screen page: Tag Deadline and Oldest Powder Lot (small), then the DOPE Card and the Range Card (medium).

Navigation: Home Screen → add widget → "Ballistics"

23.2 Range Session — Live Activity / Dynamic Island [iOS] and ongoing notification [Android]

On the iPhone, Start Range Session (Live Activity) puts your hold on the lock screen and in the Dynamic Island: rifle, range, drop and wind in MOA and MIL (the Dynamic Island shows your scope's unit, and the velocity when you hold it open), and, on the lock screen, a wind call when the wind hold is more than 0.1 MOA. The first time you start one, iOS asks "Allow Live Activities from Ballistics?"; tap Allow. It is offered only when the current solve has a hold at the target range; otherwise the app asks you to re-solve. End Range Session removes it. On Android the Range Session section starts an ongoing notification on the lock screen and notification shade with the same hold, in your phone's units; it asks for notification permission on Android 13 and later.

The Live Activity section at the bottom of the Calculate results, below Export: Start Range Session (Live Activity).

The first time a session starts, the lock screen asks 'Allow Live Activities from Ballistics?' with Don't Allow and Allow.

While a session runs, the same row reads End Range Session.

The lock screen with the session running: the Live Activity sits near the bottom of the screen.

The lock screen Live Activity up close: rifle, range, and the elevation and windage in MOA with MIL in brackets.

The Dynamic Island while the session runs: the crosshair icon and the elevation (0.0 MIL).

The Dynamic Island held open: rifle and range, ELEV, WIND and VEL in the middle, and the elevation and windage in MIL at the right.

Navigation: Calculate tab → results → Live Activity (iPhone) / Range Session (Android) → Start Range Session

23.3 Siri and Shortcuts [iOS] / launcher shortcuts [Android]

The iPhone offers seven App Shortcuts, usable from Siri and the Shortcuts app (ask Siri, for example, "What's my hold in" followed by the app's name):

The Ballistics section of the Shortcuts app, showing four of the seven App Shortcuts: Get Hold, Drop Table, Open Calculator and Log a Kill.

Get Hold: asks for a range (yards, or meters when the app is Metric) and answers with the elevation and windage to dial in MOA and MIL, the velocity, and the solver used, re-solved from your last Calculator solve; it adds a subsonic or transonic caution when the bullet is there. The range must be between 1 and 20,000 yards (1 and 18,288 meters).
Drop Table: reads back a short table (range, drop and wind in MOA, velocity) from the last solve; a long table ends with "open app for full table".
Open Calculator: opens the app.
Log a Kill (species and date), Start Range Trip (a trip title), Mark Optic Mounted (optional rifle), and Log Stage Score (hits, possible, optional match): each opens the app in the matching place, filled in for you to check: a new harvest record in Hunting, a new trip in Range Day, a new optic entry in Armory, or the stage score in Match Day.

Get Hold and Drop Table are free and need a Calculator solve first ("No profile loaded" otherwise). They answer free for a sample rifle and for a rifle that was on your phone before the free plan; for any other rifle they need Pro, and Siri says so ("Your own rifles calculate with Pro. The sample rifles calculate free."). They cannot answer for a 6DOF solve, and a load that uses a measured drag curve needs Pro. The four logging shortcuts open Pro tools, so without Pro they land on the upgrade screen. On Android, long-press the app icon for two launcher shortcuts, Get Hold and Drop Table, which answer the same way in a dialog.

Navigation: Siri / Shortcuts app → Ballistics (iPhone) · long-press the app icon (Android)

24. In-App Purchase — Ballistics Pro

Ballistics Pro comes two ways, and your store shows the price for your region:

Lifetime — $19.99, one payment, Pro for good (App Store product com.ballisticscalc.pro.unlock; Google Play pro_unlock).
6 Months, the Pro Pass (ships in version 2.0.38) — $14.99, one payment, Pro for six calendar months from the purchase date, after which it ends on its own (App Store com.ballisticscalc.pro.sixmonth, a non-renewing purchase; Google Play pro_six_month, a prepaid six-month plan with top-ups off). See §24.3.

Neither one renews or charges again, and both unlock exactly the same Pro features. No ads, no tracking. The optional Tip Jar (Settings → Tip Jar) takes a tip and unlocks nothing.

The Tip Jar (Settings, Tip Jar), 'Buy the Dev a Coffee': three tip amounts, with a note that tips are consumable purchases that unlock no features.

Free on both platforms: the five sample rifles, which calculate on every tool that solves a rifle without Pro (the Calculator with all four result tabs and the Shoot view, Quick Solve, the Range Card, the Reticle Simulator, and the rest in §24.5), with your own weather, wind, and range; adding rifles, ammo, optics, suppressors, and loadouts to the Armory, as many as you like; all 9 drag models, all 4 solvers, and multi-step velocity BC; the Field Guide and What is 6DOF?; CSV and Excel export from the Calculate results, JSON profile import/export, and QR profile sharing; sharing and adding a build by file, link, or QR code (§20.9); global search; backup and restore; the databases and libraries, to look through (the reticle library, the bullet, cartridge, pellet, and barrel/twist databases, the Target Library, and the cascading scope brand and model picker); the logs, trackers, and inventory (the Shot Log, Shot Book, ammo inventory, and Barrel Life among them); the maps (GPS target ranging, the Shooting Range Finder, the Range Planning Map, Wildfires and Public Lands, and Topo Map); and the tools that work on no rifle (Point Blank Range, Effective Range, Group MOA, Mil Relation, Recoil, Sound Delay, Shooting Light, Wind Guide, Shot Placement Reference, and the Range and Wind Estimation Training tools). Your own rifles calculate with Pro, or during the 7-day free trial (§24.5).

Pro unlocks: calculating your own rifles, on the Calculator and on every tool that works on a rifle; importing and editing in the databases, and bullet overrides; the tools that work on numbers of your own (Ethical Shot Distance, Moving Target, Cd Measurement, Muzzle Blast, Barrel Harmonics, Load Development, Chrono String Statistics, the Chronograph Session, and connecting Bluetooth devices); Doppler curves, Measured Drag Curves, Custom Drag Curves, and the Drag Curve Visual Editor; Custom Reticles; the suites (AI Insights is in them) and the Training Academy; Add Gear with Your AI; the night-vision and IR zero modes (phones that already had zero modes keep them free); the rifle picker and Weather page on the Watch and Wear OS (they need Pro even for the sample rifles); and the LE/Military/TAK tools, which also need an LE/Military access code (§12.10).

24.1 How to upgrade

Tap Upgrade to Pro (or any "Unlock Pro" prompt on a gated feature), review the comparison, and complete the purchase through your store account. Pro unlocks immediately. The comparison table counts what you get, each thing once: 139 Features & Tools on the iPhone and 138 on Android (every screen the More menu lists, once each, plus the capabilities that are not a screen of their own: the solvers, drag models, sensors, supported devices, exports, the Watch app, widgets, and Siri; the two counts differ only by the rows that exist on one phone), each marked Free, Samples (free on the sample rifles), Pro, or LE/Mil to match what the screen really does. The first page of the tour states the same number. The headline above the table reads "Free on the sample rifles, Pro for yours." From version 2.0.38 the Pro screen shows two cards, each with your store's price: Lifetime, marked Best value (Get Lifetime), and 6 Months (Get 6 Months). While a pass runs, the screen shows the date it ends and offers only the Lifetime card. From version 2.0.44 the two prices come first and largest, and a smaller Start 7-day free trial button sits below them with its terms (§24.5).

The top of Settings: the Upgrade to Pro row, with Tip Jar under it.

The top of the Pro screen on a phone that already has Pro: 'Free on the sample rifles, Pro for yours.', 'One payment. 139 features today. Nothing renews.', and the 'Zima Pro — Unlocked' card.

The comparison table: 139 Features & Tools with a Free and a Pro column, the LE/MIL note, and the first Core Calculator rows (Samples means free on the sample rifles).

More Core Calculator rows: Rifle profiles and Loadouts read Unlimited Rifles, the drag models and solvers are in both columns, and Custom drag curves, the Drag Curve Visual Editor and Measured Drag Curves are Pro only.

The end of the table: Maps & Ranging, then the eight Suites, each with a cross under Free and a check under Pro; the Military / LE Suite carries the LE/MIL badge.

Navigation: Settings → Upgrade to Pro

24.2 Restoring purchases

Reinstalling or changing devices: tap Restore Purchase; the app checks your store account's transaction history and restores Pro instantly. Restore covers both lifetime Pro and a pass that is still running; for a pass that has already ended it says "Your Pro pass ended on" with the date. Use the same Apple ID or Google account that made the purchase.

Navigation: Settings → Upgrade to Pro → Restore Purchase

24.3 The six-month Pro Pass (version 2.0.38)

How long it lasts: six calendar months from the purchase date; a pass bought on August 31 ends on the last day of February. The app counts it on the phone, so it works offline, and setting the phone's clock back does not stretch it.
Lifetime always wins: with both, you have lifetime Pro. Lifetime costs its full price during a pass; the pass's remaining time is not credited.
While it runs: Settings shows Pro pass ends with the date. In the last 14 days a banner on the Pro tools reads "Your Pro pass ends on (date). Keep Pro for life for (price)." with Get Lifetime and Dismiss; dismissed, it stays away until the next day.
When it ends: the Pro tools lock exactly as they do for a free user, and nothing you saved is deleted. On the next launch a one-time notice (a sheet on the iPhone, a dialog on Android) says "Your Pro pass has ended", notes that your rifles, loads, and logs are still there, and offers Get Lifetime or Not now. The Pro pages on the Apple Watch and Wear OS close with it.

24.4 Support answers: the Pro Pass

Is it a subscription? No. It is one payment that never renews and never charges again, so there is nothing to cancel. Google Play lists it among subscriptions because Play sells it as a prepaid plan, but it does not renew there either.
When does mine end? Settings shows Pro pass ends with the date, and so does the Pro screen.
My pass ended. Did I lose anything? No. Every rifle, load, and log, and everything else you saved, is still there; only the Pro tools lock. Buying Lifetime unlocks them again.
Can I switch to Lifetime? Yes, at any time, with Get Lifetime on the Pro screen, the ending banner, or the ended notice. It costs the full lifetime price; the pass's remaining time is not credited.
Refunds: the stores handle refunds, not Zima. On the iPhone, request one at reportaproblem.apple.com under the App Store refund policy; on Android, through Google Play's refund request. A refunded pass no longer unlocks Pro.
New phone or reinstall: sign in with the same Apple ID or Google account and tap Restore Purchase. Restoring does not reset the pass: it still ends six months after it was bought. A purchase stays with the store it was made in, so Pro bought on an iPhone does not carry over to an Android phone, or the other way round.
The price looks different: each store shows its own price for the customer's region; $19.99 and $14.99 are the US prices.

Navigation: Settings → Upgrade to Pro

24.5 The free plan and the 7-day free trial (version 2.0.44)

Free means free to use, with one line drawn: the sample rifles calculate free; your own rifles calculate with Pro.

Sample rifles: five rifles come with the app, M4 Patrol, M4 Service, .308 Precision, 6.5 CM Match, and AK Irons (a phone that had the earlier starter rifles keeps them as samples too). They calculate on every tool that solves a rifle without Pro, with your own weather, wind, and range. The app knows a sample by its numbers, not its name: a rifle and its ammo that still hold an example's numbers are a sample, so renaming one changes nothing, and typing in different numbers makes it a rifle of your own.

The Rifles list with the five sample rifles: 6.5 CM Match, AK Irons, .308 Precision, M4 Service and M4 Patrol.

Your own rifles, ammo, and gear: saved free, with no limit on rifles, optics, ammo, suppressors, or loadouts. What needs Pro is calculating them. Without Pro, Calculate with your own rifle says "Your own rifles calculate with Pro. The sample rifles calculate free." and shows an upgrade card with Use a sample rifle; a tool that has its own rifle list lists only the sample rifles ("Without Pro, only the sample rifles are listed here. Pro calculates every rifle you add."); and Siri answers the same way. A rifle a friend shares with you (§20.9) is added free like any other and counts as one of your own, so it calculates with Pro.
Rifles you already had: a rifle that was on your phone before the free plan began keeps calculating on Calculate without Pro, and a restored backup keeps that. Other tools still need Pro for it. Rifles you add after that follow the plan.
Three kinds of tools. Free for everyone: tools that calculate no rifle, such as the logs, trackers, maps, and small calculators, and the databases and libraries, which are free to look through (importing and editing in them need Pro). Free on the sample rifles: every tool that solves a rifle, including the Calculator, Quick Solve, the Range Card, DA Range Card, Come-Up Card, Reticle Simulator, HUD Mode, Competition Mode, Field Mode, Target List, Range Sheet, Multi-Target Solver and Scene, Load Comparison, 3D Trajectory, Multi-Rifle Drop Table, Stage Planner, Sight-In Assistant, and Truing. A tool that works on the rifle on the bench opens only while that rifle is a sample, and a tool with its own rifle list lists only the samples; with Pro, both take every rifle. Pro only: the tools that work on numbers of your own (Ethical Shot Distance, Moving Target, Cd Measurement, Muzzle Blast, Barrel Harmonics, Load Development, Measured Drag Curves, Custom Drag Curves, the Drag Curve Visual Editor, Chrono String Statistics, the Chronograph Session, and Custom Reticles), the LE/Military/TAK tools, and the suites and the Training Academy.
The 7-day free trial: Start 7-day free trial is on the Pro screen and on the upgrade card. It runs seven days from the moment you start it, once, and while it runs everything is Pro. The terms under the button read "Free for 7 days, once. Nothing renews and nothing is charged. When it ends, your own rifles stop calculating and the sample rifles stay free. Pro is (price) for life." It is offered only to someone who has never had Pro and has never started a trial, and only beside a price your store can bill. On the iPhone it is a free $0 App Store purchase, so the App Store keeps the start date and a new phone or a reinstall cannot start another; on Android the start date is kept on the phone and in its backups, with no store product behind it.
While it runs: Settings → Upgrade to Pro shows Trial: N days left (Trial: 1 day left on the last), and the Pro screen shows the days left with both ways to keep Pro, Lifetime and 6 Months. On the last day a banner on the Pro tools reads "Your free trial ends on (date). Keep Pro for life for (price)." with Get Lifetime and Dismiss.
When it ends: your own rifles stop calculating and the sample rifles keep calculating free; nothing you saved is deleted. Restore Purchase after it has ended says "Your free trial has ended. Your rifles and gear are still here; the sample rifles keep calculating free."

24.6 Support answers: the free plan and the trial

Why will my rifle not calculate? It is your own rifle and Pro is not on: your own rifles calculate with Pro or during the 7-day trial, and the sample rifles calculate free. Use a sample rifle on the upgrade card switches to one.
Did I lose my rifles or my ammo? No. Everything you saved is still there, and adding more is free; only calculating your own rifles needs Pro.
Is the trial a subscription? Will I be charged? No. Nothing renews and nothing is charged. It ends on its own after seven days.
Can I take the trial again? No, it is once. It is also not offered to anyone who has had Pro (Lifetime, a pass, or an earlier Pro purchase).
I do not see the trial button. It shows only to someone who has never had Pro and never started a trial, and only when your store is showing a price. Try again with the store reachable.
The trial ended. What now? The sample rifles keep calculating free. Get Lifetime or Get 6 Months on the Pro screen turns your own rifles back on.
I changed a sample rifle's numbers and it needs Pro now. A sample is known by its numbers; with different numbers it is a rifle of your own. Put the example's numbers back, or use Pro.
A rifle I had before still calculates on Calculate but not in another tool. Rifles from before the free plan keep calculating on the Calculate screen; the other tools take the sample rifles, or Pro for the rest.
New phone or reinstall: sign in with the same Apple ID or Google account and tap Restore Purchase for Pro; the trial cannot be started a second time, and a restored backup brings your rifles back, those from before the free plan still calculating on Calculate.

Navigation: Settings → Upgrade to Pro

25. Platform Differences

Both apps share the same screens and the same More-menu sections. The following are genuine native divergences (by design — never "fixed" by cloning), followed by the features that are on the iPhone only for now.

A. Permanent native divergences

Area	iOS	Android
Watch	Apple Watch: 8 pages (Shoot/Hold/Wind/Card/Range/Hunt/Match/Weather), opening on Shoot; the Digital Crown steps the range	Wear OS: the same 8 pages, opening on Shoot; the rotary crown steps the range
Home-screen widgets	7 WidgetKit widgets	7 Glance widgets
Range Session on the lock screen	Live Activity / Dynamic Island	ongoing notification
In-car	CarPlay (ships inert pending Apple's maps entitlement)	Android Auto (not implemented)
Voice	Siri + 7 App Shortcuts	2 launcher shortcuts (Get Hold, Drop Table)
Live weather	WeatherKit	Open-Meteo
Cloud backup	iCloud Drive (automatic backup file)	system file picker → Google Drive / Dropbox / OneDrive / local, plus an Auto-Backup switch
On-device AI	rule-based + optional Apple Foundation Models (iOS 26+)	rule-based only
LiDAR Target Capture	yes (hardware)	none
Tablets	iPad sidebar with a detail pane (§3)	Android tablet layout with a side menu and two-column tools
More menu	The same ten tool sections on both, then Tour, Feedback, and About, and an Upgrade to Pro row until you have Pro	Also lists a few tools of its own in their sections: Atmosphere Presets, Vital Zone, Calculation History, and in LE / Military / TAK, Mil Range Card, TAK Marker, Send Impact Marker, and Saved Zeros

B. iPhone only for now

These exist on the iPhone and not yet in the Android app (checked against the Android code for version 2.0.45). The Wear OS watch now has every page the Apple Watch has, including Range Day with its Cold Bore screen, so the watch is no longer on this list. What is left is:

A few exports: Session Tracker CSV, Stage Planner PDF stage card, Rifle Data Book PDF (Android shares a CSV), and the Visual Drag Editor's JSON import/export (§20.8)
The machine-translation notice
The iPad sidebar (§3); Android tablets have their own side menu (table A)

C. Genuinely open — decisions, not code gaps

Engine-data provenance — the Anti-Materiel maximum-range and minimum-energy values that have no published source are the app's own estimates, marked "(estimate)" on screen on both phones, which list the same 11 target classes. Reserved for the engine-data owner to source and reconcile.

Both apps match except for the native divergences and the iPhone-only items above.

26. Appendices

Appendix A — Glossary of ballistic terms

Ballistic Coefficient (BC) — a dimensionless number expressing how well a bullet overcomes air resistance relative to a standard projectile. Always tied to a drag model.
Drag model (G1, G2, G5, G6, G7, G8, GI, GL, GS) — a standardized Cd-vs-Mach reference curve the BC scales. G1 is the oldest and most widely published (flat-base reference); G7 better models modern long-range boat-tail bullets.
Cd (drag coefficient) — the dimensionless aerodynamic drag coefficient at a given Mach number. Custom drag curves express bullet-specific Cd-vs-Mach data.
MOA / MIL / IPHY — angular units. 1 MOA ≈ 1.047″ at 100 yd; 1 MIL = 3.438 MOA; IPHY is "inch per hundred yards."
DOPE — "Data On Previous Engagements" — your recorded real-world holds.
Zero — the range and conditions at which point of impact equals point of aim with no holds. All corrections are offsets from this reference.
Cant — a sideways tilt of the rifle or scope from vertical. It moves the point of impact toward the tilted side and slightly low.
Spin drift — gyroscopic lateral drift; right-hand twist drifts right, left-hand drifts left. Hemisphere-independent.
Yaw of repose — the small angle at which a spinning bullet rides to one side of its path; the 4DOF solver uses it to compute spin drift.
Coriolis effect — deflection from Earth's rotation, depending on latitude, azimuth, and time of flight. In the Northern Hemisphere it deflects to the right of travel; in the Southern, to the left.
Eötvös effect — the vertical component of Coriolis for east/west travel.
Aerodynamic jump — a small vertical deflection of the bullet path caused by a crosswind at the muzzle. With a right-hand twist, a wind from the right raises the impact and a wind from the left lowers it; a left-hand twist reverses both.
Density altitude (DA) — pressure altitude corrected for temperature/humidity; the combined air-density effect on drag.
Station pressure — the actual air pressure at your location, not corrected to sea level; it is what a barometer or weather meter reads.
Transonic / subsonic — transonic is Mach 1.2 down to 0.8, where drag becomes nonlinear and bullets can destabilize; subsonic is only below Mach 0.8 (color-coded in tables and overlays, with the same limits on every screen).
Maximum Point Blank Range (MPBR) — the furthest range a bullet stays within a vital-zone height without a hold correction.
WEZ (Weapon Effectiveness Zone) — a Monte-Carlo hit-probability estimate: the share of simulated shots that land in your target, with 50th, 90th, and 95th percentile miss radii.
SDF / DSF — Speed-Dial / Drop-Scale factors for adjusting dialed positions across density altitudes.
Truing — fitting the ballistic model to observed drop (via MV, BC, or DSF).
Sg (gyroscopic stability factor) — Miller stability; below ~1.3 is marginal, below 1.0 the bullet tumbles.
CEP (Circular Error Probable) — the radius containing 50% of shots.
ES / SD — extreme spread and standard deviation of a velocity string.
Muzzle velocity (MV) — the speed of the bullet as it leaves the barrel, usually measured with a chronograph.
Sectional density — bullet weight divided by the square of its diameter; higher generally penetrates better.
TOF — time of flight, muzzle to target.
Hit factor — points scored divided by elapsed time in seconds, used for timed match stages (Match Log). The whole-match figure counts timed stages only.
Par time — the time limit set for a stage; the Competition Mode, Stage Planner and Watch timers count it down.
CoT (Cursor-on-Target) — the XML message format used by TAK networks.

Appendix B — Supported drag models

Model	Reference projectile	Best for
G1	Flat-base, tangent ogive (19th-century standard)	Most factory-ammunition BCs (widely published)
G2	Aberdeen J projectile (ogival nose)	Some specialty projectiles
G5	Short boat-tail, small-arm model	Moderate boat-tail bullets at intermediate range
G6	Full flat-base, small caliber	Varmint and flat-base target bullets
G7	Long-range boat-tail	Modern high-BC VLD/Hybrid designs (preferred for LR)
G8	Flat-base, long ogive (the G7 shape without the boat-tail)	Some military projectiles
GI	Flat-base military reference	Legacy military ball
GL	Blunt lead nose (handgun, low velocity)	Handgun and other low-velocity lead bullets
GS	Sphere	Round balls and shotgun pellets
Custom (Pro)	User-defined Cd vs. Mach	When radar or two-chrono data is available; maximum accuracy
Measured (Doppler) (Pro)	Factory radar-measured	Eliminates BC approximation entirely

Recommendation by use case: factory hunting ammo — published G1 BC as a start, then true at long range; match bullets (Berger, Sierra, Lapua, Nosler RDF) — G7 BC; Lapua bullets — measured Doppler curves; reloads without a published G7 — derive your own with the BC Back-Calculator (§7.7). A BC is always saved with the drag model it was measured against (G1 or G7); switching the drag model re-pairs the BC from the bullet's published values, or leaves it empty with a note. The Pejsa solver works only with a single G1 or G7 BC.

Appendix C — Unit conversions quick reference

Angular	MOA	MIL	cm/100m	in/100yd
1 MOA	1.000	0.291	2.909	1.047
1 MIL	3.438	1.000	10.000	3.600
1 in/100yd	0.955	0.278	2.778	1.000
1 cm/100m	0.344	0.100	1.000	0.360

Distance	meters	feet
1 yd	0.9144 m	3.000 ft
1 m	1.0936 yd	3.281 ft
1,000 yd	914.4 m	3,000 ft
1,000 m	1,094 yd	3,281 ft

Pressure	hPa/mbar	mmHg	kPa
1 inHg	33.864 hPa	25.400 mmHg	3.386 kPa
Standard sea level	1013.25 hPa	760.0 mmHg	101.325 kPa

Appendix D — Solver comparison

Feature	3DOF	4DOF	6DOF	Pejsa
Type	Numerical (RK4)	Numerical (RK4)	Numerical (RK4)	Analytical
Spin drift	Empirical formula	Computed from the bullet's spin and yaw of repose during the flight	Computed from the flight	Empirical formula (same as 3DOF)
Aerodynamic jump	Empirical (launch angle from the muzzle crosswind)	Same as 3DOF	Computed from the flight	Same as 3DOF
Spin-rate tracking	No	Yes (4th DOF)	Yes	No
Rotational dynamics	No	Yaw of repose only (modified point mass)	Full 6-axis (McCoy's vector equations)	No
Needs	BC or drag curve	Bullet length and twist for spin drift	Eight bullet-specific aero tables you enter	A single G1 or G7 BC
Speed	Fast	Moderate	Slow	Instant
Best for	General field use	Physics-derived spin drift	The full model when you have aero data	Quick estimates

Recommendation: 3DOF for the vast majority of field and competition use; 4DOF when you want spin drift computed from the bullet's own spin and flight; 6DOF when you have the bullet's eight aero tables and want the full rotational model, which reproduces the published 6-DOF results in McCoy's Modern Exterior Ballistics; Pejsa for a quick approximate answer from a single G1 or G7 BC (for typical rifle loads its drop agrees with the point-mass solvers to about 1 MOA out to 1,000 yards, and less well as the bullet nears the speed of sound). Pejsa refuses custom drag curves, velocity-banded BCs, the other drag models, loads faster than its published speed bands, and wind whose headwind changes along the path.

Appendix E — Coriolis and spin drift: directionality

Coriolis and spin drift both introduce lateral deflection that matters at extended ranges; aerodynamic jump moves the impact vertically in a crosswind.

Coriolis: the horizontal deflection is to the right of travel in the Northern Hemisphere and to the left in the Southern, at every azimuth, and it grows with latitude. A separate vertical part, the Eötvös effect, depends on direction: firing east gives less drop, firing west more, and firing north or south none. With Coriolis switched on and no position yet, the Calculator and every tool either apply it or tell you why they cannot.
Spin drift: right-hand twist drifts right, left-hand twist drifts left — always, regardless of hemisphere.
Aerodynamic jump: with a right-hand twist, a wind from the right raises the impact and a wind from the left lowers it; a left-hand twist reverses both. The angle is set at the muzzle, so it is the same at every distance and the effect grows in proportion to range.

At 1,000 yards spin drift is commonly a few tenths of a mil and Coriolis is usually smaller; they can add or oppose depending on latitude, azimuth, and twist direction. The app accounts for each independently.

Appendix F — Real counts

Item	Count (both platforms unless noted)
Bullet database	3,719 bundled (over-the-air updates can add entries)
Reticle library	1,152 optic listings from 22 brands in the catalog; the library screen lists 808 reticles with no filter on (both change with over-the-air updates)
Cartridge database	152 (11 categories)
Pellet database	671
Barrel/twist database	151 rifles (over-the-air updates)
Measured (Doppler) drag curves	92
Standard drag models	9 (G1 G2 G5 G6 G7 G8 GI GL GS) + custom
Solvers	4 (3DOF / 4DOF / 6DOF, each checked against published data, plus Pejsa)
Vital-zone presets	16
Automated engine/data tests	More than 500 (iOS engine)
Training-Academy drills / pillars	60 / 6
Training-Academy glossary	299
Concept lessons / training plans	14 / 2
Anti-Materiel target classes	11
Barrier penetration	24 barriers and 12 reference rounds
Shooting-range directory	1,307 U.S. ranges
Home-screen widgets	7 (iOS and Android)
Sample rifles (calculate free)	5; rifles you add have no limit, and calculate with Pro or the 7-day trial
Languages	English plus 75 others
Features & tools (the Pro screen's table)	iOS 139 · Android 138
More menu	10 tool sections, plus Suites
App Levels	3 (Basic lists 20 tools)
Tour pages	10 the first time (9 when you replay it from More)
Apple Watch / Wear OS pages	8 (both watches)

Appendix G — Privacy and data security

On device: all profile, shot-log, and inventory data is stored locally in the app's protected data container. TAK received events are encrypted at rest (Complete File Protection on the iPhone; AES-256-GCM with a key held in the Android Keystore on Android). TAK certificates and credentials are stored in the OS keychain/keystore. Delete All Data removes your data from the device, including LE/Military access and TAK settings; the one thing it keeps is a random holder ID that the LE/Military access-code check uses.
Transmitted: your approximate location (rounded to about a kilometer) to the weather service (Apple WeatherKit on iPhone, Open-Meteo on Android) while Auto-Fetch Weather or Live Weather is on; the LE/Military access-code check (a one-way hash of the code plus a random holder ID; no name or other identity is returned or stored); reticle corrections you choose to make (the reticle, the changed values and your note); catalog and gear-picture downloads (public data files, no personal data; gear pictures use mobile data only if you leave that switch on, §21.9); map and public-land services when you open those screens; TAK solutions and positions (to your configured TAK server only); and anonymous, aggregated usage diagnostics, which you can turn off at any time with the Anonymous Usage Analytics switch in Settings (what is counted is spelled out under Settings → Privacy, §21.18). The iPhone's automatic backup goes to your own iCloud Drive and never to Zima's servers; Android backups are files you save to a place you choose. Bug reports and error reports are emails you read and send yourself. No data is ever sold or shared with advertisers.
Location: used for weather, Coriolis latitude auto-fill, GPS ranging, shooting-light calculations, and the map features. Auto-Fetch Weather is on by default, so the Calculator looks up current conditions the first time it opens; switch it off in Settings → Data to stop that. Other location features run when you tap a "use my location" control.

Canonical guide — supersedes the standalone iOS and Android drafts and the former FEATURES.md. Document current as of 2026-10-27 (app version 2.0.46); features are subject to change.

Zima Ballistics — Operator's Guide

Zima: Ballistics Calculator — Operator's Guide

Independently Verified Physics

Table of Contents

1. Introduction

Who it is for

Supported platforms

Important disclaimer

2. Getting Started

First launch

Onboarding tour (10 pages)

Suite Picker

App Level — Basic, Standard or Advanced

New-user walkthrough (zero to firing solution)

Starter rifles and the first-rifle offer

3. Navigation

Tab bar

More menu

Global search

Field Guide

iPad sidebar

4. Calculator

4.1 Projectile inputs

4.2 Firearm inputs

4.3 Atmosphere inputs

4.4 Wind inputs

4.5 Solver & Advanced inputs

4.6 Target inputs

4.7 Corrections summary

4.8 Trajectory table

4.9 Trajectory charts

4.10 Reticle holdover overlay

4.11 Quick Actions

4.12 Suppressor

4.13 Saved calculations

4.14 What Changed? (compare two solves)

4.15 Shoot view (Compact Shoot View)

4.16 Send Inputs & Results

4.17 What is 6DOF?

4.18 Hold arrows

4.19 The bench

4.20 Loadouts

4.21 My View

4.22 Something look off?

5. Profiles — My Armory

5.1 Rifle editor

5.2 Load editor

5.3 Multiple zeros per rifle

5.3a Zeroed with a different load (the zero check)

5.4 Zero modes — Day / Night Vision / IR Laser

5.5 6DOF aero-coefficient editor

5.6 Vital-zone presets

5.7 Copying, renaming and sharing loads

5.8 Add a Rifle (guided setup)

5.9 Picture shelves and the + catalogs

5.10 Add Gear with Your AI

6. Databases

6.1 Bullet Database

6.2 Pellet Database

6.3 Cartridge Database

6.4 Measured Drag Curves

6.5 Custom Drag Curves

6.6 Drag Curve Visual Editor

6.7 Barrel / Twist Database

6.8 Target Library

7. Analysis Tools

7.1 3D Trajectory Visualization

7.2 Hit Probability (WEZ)

7.3 DOPE Trend Analysis

7.4 Terminal Ballistics

7.5 Load / Trajectory Comparison

7.6 Multi-Rifle Drop Table

7.7 BC Back-Calculator

7.8 Cd Measurement (Two-Chrono BC)

7.9 DSF Library

7.10 Effective Range Calculator

7.11 Point Blank Range (MPBR)

7.12 Moving Target

7.13 Danger Space Calculator

7.14 SDF Table